Category: General

Definition of Round Table Conference – The Round Table Conference (KMB) or in Dutch: Nederlands-Indonesische rondetafelconferentie was a conference or meeting which was held in The Hague, Netherlands, from 23 August to 2 November 1949.

The meeting was held between representatives of the Republic of Indonesia, the Netherlands, and also BFO ( Bijeenkomst voor Federaal Overleg ) representing various countries created by the Dutch in the Indonesian archipelago.

Prior to this conference, three high-level meetings had taken place between the Netherlands and Indonesia, namely the Linggarjati Agreement (1947), the Renville Agreement (1948), and also the Roem-Royen Agreement (1949). This conference ended with the result that the Netherlands was willing to surrender its sovereignty to the United Republic of Indonesia.

Background

Attempts to thwart Indonesian independence by using violence ended in failure. The Netherlands received harsh criticism from around the world. The Netherlands and Indonesia then held several meetings to resolve this issue through diplomacy, through the Linggarjati negotiations and the Renville agreement.

On January 28, 1949, the United Nations (UN) Security Council passed a resolution condemning the Dutch military attack on Republican troops in Indonesia and demanding the restoration of the Republican government. He also called on the continuation of negotiations to find a peaceful settlement between the two parties.

As a continuation of the Roem-Royen Agreement which was implemented on May 7, 1949, which was effectively established by a Security Council resolution, Mohammad Roem said that the Republic of Indonesia, whose leaders were still exiled in Bangka, was willing to participate in the Table Conference. Round in order to accelerate the achievement of the transfer of sovereignty.

The Indonesian government, which had been exiled for a period of six months, returned to the provisional capital, Yogyakarta on 6 July 1949. To ensure the equality of negotiating positions between the Republican and federal delegations, in the second half of July 1949 and from 31 July 1949 – 2 August 1949 , the Inter-Indonesia Conference was held in Yogyakarta with participants being all the authorities of the part of the United Republic of Indonesia that would be formed. The participants agree on the principles as well as the basic framework for the constitution. Following preliminary discussions sponsored by the UN Commission on Indonesia in Jakarta, it was decided that the Round Table Conference would be held in the city of The Hague, Netherlands.

Negotiations In The Round Table Conference

The negotiations resulted in several documents, including the Charter of Sovereignty, the Statute of the Union, economic agreements and agreements related to social and military affairs. They also agreed to withdraw the Dutch troops from the Serikan Republic of Indonesia “in the shortest possible time”, and the United States of Indonesia to give the Dutch the most favorable national status.

In addition, there will no longer be discrimination against Dutch citizens and companies, and the United Republic of Indonesia is willing to take over the trade agreement previously negotiated with the Dutch East Indies. However, there is debate about the debts of the Dutch colonial government and also the status of West Papua.

JH van Maarseveen, Sultan Hamid II and Mohammad Hatta signed the Round Table Agreement, 2 November 1949

Negotiations regarding the foreign debts of the Dutch East Indies colonial government continued to drag on, with each side presenting their calculations and submitting opinions as to whether the United Republic of Indonesia should bear the debts incurred by the Dutch after they surrendered to Japan in 1942.

The Indonesian delegation was especially angry and disapproved because RIS had to pay costs which, in their opinion, were used by the Dutch in military action against Indonesia. In the end, thanks to the intervention of US members in the UN commission for the United States of Indonesia, the RIS finally realized that the willingness to pay part of the Dutch debt was the price that had to be paid in order to gain sovereignty. On October 24, 1949, the delegation of the United States of Indonesia agreed to bear around 4.3 billion guilders in debt from the Dutch East Indies government.

Although much public opinion from the Netherlands supports the handover of West Papua to RIS, the Dutch cabinet is worried that it will not be able to ratify the Round Table Agreement if this point is agreed upon. In the end, at the beginning of 1 November 1949 an agreement was reached, the status of West Papua would be determined through negotiations between the United Indonesia and the Netherlands within one year after the transfer of sovereignty.

Results of the Round Table Conference

1. The conference was officially closed at the Dutch parliament building on 2 November 1949. The contents of the conference agreement were as follows:
2. The Kingdom of the Netherlands handed over sovereignty over Indonesia wholly to the United States of Indonesia unconditionally and irrevocably, and therefore recognized the United States of Indonesia as an independent and sovereign State.
3. The United States of Indonesia accepts this sovereignty on the basis of the provisions of its Constitution; constitutional amendments have been announced to the Kingdom of the Netherlands.
4. Sovereignty will be transferred not later than December 30, 1949

Additional information regarding these results is as follows:

1. Transfer of sovereignty over the Dutch East Indies territory from the Dutch colonial government to the United States of Indonesia, except for western Papua. Indonesia hopes that the entire former Dutch East Indies region will become the territory of the United States of Indonesia, while the Netherlands wants to make western Papua a separate country because of ethnic differences. The conference was closed without any decision on this matter. Therefore article 2 states that western Papua is not part of the handover, and that this issue will be resolved within one year.
2. The formation of an alliance from the Netherlands – Indonesia, with the leader being the Kingdom of the Netherlands as the head of state
3. The Dutch East Indies debt was taken over by the United Republic of Indonesia
4. The Dutch Parliament debated the agreement, and the Upper and Lower Houses ratified it on 21 December 1949 by the required two-thirds majority. Despite the criticism, particularly regarding the assumption of Dutch government debt and the unresolved status of West Papua, the Indonesian legislature, the Central Indonesian National Committee (KNIP), ratified the agreement on December 14, 1949. Sovereignty was then transferred to the United Republic of Indonesia on December 27 December 1949.
5. The Netherlands recognizes the United Republic of Indonesia (RIS) as an independent and sovereign country.
6. The withdrawal of the Dutch ships and several corvettes or small warships was handed over to RIS.
7. Withdrawal of all Dutch troops from the United States of Indonesia.

People in the Round Table Conference

The recognition of Indonesia’s political sovereignty at the Round Table Conference (KMB) is inseparable from the role of important figures. Who are the figures involved in the KMB? The Government of Indonesia arranges the delegations to be sent to the KMB, with the following composition:

Chairman: Mohammad Hatta

Member :

1. Mohammad Roem
2. Dr. Soepomo
3. Johannes Leimena
4. Ali Sastroamidjojo
5. Suyono Hadinoto
6. Sumitro Djojohadikusumo
7. Abdul Karim Pringgodigdo
8. Colonel TB Simatupang
9. Muwardi

In the Round Table Conference, delegates from Indonesia were represented by Mohammad Hatta, Mohammad Roem, and Prof. Dr. Soepomo. As for the representative from the BFO ( Bijeenkomst voor Federaal Overleg ), which is a collection of various federal states formed by the Dutch in Indonesia, is Sultan Hamid II.

For the representative of the delegation from the Netherlands, namely Johannes Henricus van Maarseveen who at that time served as Minister of Overseas (Minister of Colonial Affairs). Also present were representatives of the United Nations Commission for Indonesia or the United Nations Commission for Indonesia (UNCI), namely Tom Critchley.

For Indonesia, the location of the transfer of sovereignty was carried out at the Indonesian Merdeka Palace. The representative from the United States of Indonesia, namely Sultan Hamengkubuwono IX. Meanwhile, the representative from the Netherlands, namely AHJ Lovink, who at that time served as High Representative of the Dutch Crown.

For the Netherlands, the location of the surrender of sovereignty was carried out in the throne room of Amsterdam. The Indonesian side was represented by Mohammad Hatta and the Dutch side was represented by Queen Juliana, Prime Minister Dr. Willem Dress, and Mr. EMJA (Maan) Sassen who at that time served as Minister of Overseas Affairs.

The Impact of the Round Table Conference on Indonesia

On December 27, 1949, the provisional government of the United States of Indonesia was installed. Its president, Ir. Sukarno, with Moh. Hatta as Prime Minister, who formed the United Republic of Indonesia Cabinet. The United States of Indonesia was formed like a sovereign federated republic and consisted of 16 states and was an alliance state with the Kingdom of the Netherlands.

The date of transfer of sovereignty by the Netherlands to the United States of Indonesia is also the date recognized by the Netherlands as the date of Indonesian independence. It was only after about sixty years later, on August 15, 2005, that the Dutch government officially acknowledged that Indonesia’s de facto independence began on August 17, 1945.

In a conference in Jakarta, Dutch Prime Minister at that time Ben Bot expressed his “profound regret for all the suffering” experienced by the Indonesian people during the four years of the National Revolution, although he did not officially convey this apology.

Indonesian reaction to the Dutch position was generally positive; The Minister of Foreign Affairs of Indonesia, namely Hassan Wirayuda said that, after this acknowledgment, “it will be easier to move forward and strengthen bilateral relations between the two countries”.

Regarding the debts of the Dutch East Indies which had been agreed through the Round Table Conference, the Indonesian side finally continued to pay approximately 4 billion guilders in the period 1950 – 1956 but then decided not to repay the remaining debt.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Room names in English – Sinaumed’s must have known that English is one of the international
languages ​​that will never die in the future. The need for English until now is like an
everyday language. An example is when in an office where there are people with foreign
citizenship.

Now seeing this, until now learning English has been taught starting from the lowest class.

This is also a form of government support to prepare a generation that is smart and can compete on the
international stage. Learning English can also be started from memorizing some vocabulary in
everyday life, you know .

Sinaumed’s can start by studying the parts in the house. Even though it sounds trivial, learning
English with objects around us can be the easiest alternative in learning this international
language.

Besides being able to add vocabulary in English. This can also help you speak English more
fluently .

Room Names in the Home Area in English

As explained earlier, learning English will be easier if the vocabulary increases every day.
Learning vocabulary can actually be started from several objects around us.

It is undeniable that there are many objects around us. One of them is the objects in the
room, in English alone there are tens of words. Even though there are many, we can still
memorize them if there is information support related to the names of the rooms in the area of ​​the house
in English or other objects.

So, here is a description of the names of the rooms in the house area in English. Let’s
see!

1. Anteroom : The front room.
2. Armory : Warehouse for storing weapons.
3. Attic : The attic is right under the roof of the house.
4. Back Yard : The backyard of the house.
5. Balcony : Can also be called a balcony. An area that is at the top of
   the house but has a low wall boundary. Most are built on the front side of the
   house.
6. Ballroom : A dance hall. This room has a large size without any
   furniture in it.
7. Basement : A most basic floor of a building. Often in the area of
   ​​hotels and other large buildings.
8. Bathrooms : Bathrooms.
9. Bedroom : A bathroom. This room is often used to rest at night.
10. Boudoir : A dressing room that is often used by women.
11. Box Room : A small room that is often used to store goods. In addition,
    this area is also often referred to as the box room .
12. Cabin : Cabin.
13. Cellar : The warehouse room which is at the bottom of the house .
14. Changing Room : A room used to change clothes.
15. Chapel : A room used for worship.
16. Chimney : A chimney in a house or other building.
17. Cloakroom : A room used for temporary storage of material before entering the house.
18. Closet : A room used for storage of various types of clothing. Many
    people say that this area is the wardrobe.
19. Conservatory / Greenhouse : A
    greenhouse. This room is usually used for planting various kinds of
    plants.
20. Den : A living room (pronounced informally).
21. Dining Room : The room used for eating with the family.
22. Drawing Room : A living room. However, the guest was received by the
    host and given a treat.
23. Dressing Room : Dressing room. The contents in it are clothes, shoes and
    various kinds of clothing equipment.
24. Dungeon : A dungeon. This room will mostly be pitch black.
25. Extra Room : An extra room. Mostly used as an additional room for
    guests.
26. Family Room : Family room. Used as a gathering area for the whole
    extended family.
27. Foey : A lobby or waiting room.
28. Front Yard : The area of ​​the front yard of the house.
29. Games Room : Games room. Homeowners can provide attributes such as a
    ping pong table or billiard table.
30. Garage : Room for parking cars or motorcycles. Most of these rooms will
    be attached to the main house.
31. Garden : Garden area, mostly used as a place to grow crops for homeowners.
32. Garret : Attic area. Most are under the roof of the house.
33. Guest Room : Living room. Usually in the form of a bedroom for
    guests.
34. Gym : A special room for indoor sports. Most people call it by the name
    of the gym
35. Hall : A large room without furniture in it. Most people call it by the
    name of the hall.
36. Hallway : Aisle area that connects one room to another.
37. Home Office : Workspace that is in a private house, not an office.
38. Inglenook: The area of ​​the room near the fire pit.
39. Kitchen: Kitchen room that contains the equipment and cooking ingredients needed.
40. Landing: An area that is above the steps. The condition of this room is
    open and connects one room to another.
41. Larder: A food storage area.
42. Laundry Room: A room used for
    washing clothes.
43. Library: A room used to store books.
44. Living Room : Family room that is used to gather with family.
45. Loft: The loft area. Its position is usually in the section just below
    the roof of the house.
46. Lounge Room : A family room.
47. Music Room : An area used for playing music. Most contain various
    musical instruments.
48. Nook: The area at the corner of the wall.
49. Pantry: Kitchen area but on a smaller size.
50. Parking Space : Outdoor parking area, mostly shaped like a large field.
51. Parlor: Living room, a room used for gathering.
52. Playroom: The room used for playing.
53. Porch: Verandah area, mostly there is furniture such as tables and chairs for homeowners to
    relax on.
54. Praying Room : Room for worship.
55. Rooftop: The roof ridge. This room is at the very top of the house
    itself.
56. Shed: Warehouse room used to store various kinds of unused objects.
57. Shower Room : Shower room or a small room used for bathing purposes but with the help of a
    shower .
58. Sitting Room : A room used for families.
59. Spare Room : A spare room, mostly used for overnight guests.
60. Staircase: Staircase, an area used to move floors can also be referred to as a bridge
    connecting one room to another.
61. Study Room : A room used for study.
62. Sun Room : A room that on the sides is made of glass. This room is
    usually used to enjoy views of the outside area of ​​the house.
63. Swimming Pool : Swimming pool
64. Tack Room : A room used to store nails, armor, saddles
65. Terrace: Terrace area, an open space in front of the entrance
66. Toilet: The toilet area or washroom.
67. TV Room : Room for watching television.
68. Utility Room : Utility area, mostly used to store various things related to clothes.
    For example the laying area of ​​the washing machine.
69. Washing Room : A room for washing clothes.
70. Water Closet : WC room or latrines
71. Wine Cellar : An underground area that is mostly used for wine or wine storage.
72. Workroom : A room to work:
73. Workshop : A workshop or an area used to repair something.

Room Names In School Buildings In
English

In the previous point explained are the names of the rooms in the area of ​​the house. So, for
the next discussion, this will be related to the name of the room inside the school.

At least school buildings have several important areas in them. Most of these areas or rooms
can also be mentioned in English. As previously explained, at this point I
will explain the names of the rooms in the school in English and their meanings.

Now, the explanation below is some of the names of the rooms in the school area in English and their meanings.

1. Classroom: A classroom that is used for the teaching and learning process.
2. Staffroom: An administrative room, most people call it the TU room.
3. Teacher’s room : A room for teachers to gather. In addition, several
   important documents are also placed in this area.
4. Headmaster’s room : The room used by the principal.
5. Library: The library area is used to store a collection of books from the school.
6. Language Laboratory : Laboratory area for additional language
   learning.
7. Computer room : Computer room, usually used for computer learning or extracurricular
   activities.
8. Hall: Hall Room.
9. Science Laboratory : A special laboratory room for natural science or natural science
   practicum.
10. OSIS room : Student council room, this room is used as the student council meeting area and
    stores important student documents.
11. School Medical Room : UKS room, a room used to provide assistance to students who are sick
    in the school area.
12. Canteen: Canteen, a dining area for school students or girls.
13. Parking area : Parking area.
14. Garden: The garden in the school area.
15. School Yard : The yard area, usually located in front of the main school room.
16. Toilet: Toilet or bathroom.
17. Store room : Warehouse area used to store objects that are no longer used at school.
18. Mosque : Mosque or prayer room

Names of Things in the Home Area in English

After knowing several room names at home and school. Of course there will be more vocabulary
if Sinaumed’s knows the names of the furniture in the house in English.

Because knowing the names of rooms and furniture in the house using English is one unit.
Imagine if Sinaumed’s only knew the room without knowing the names of the objects
in it using English. Surely that would be a little troublesome, right
?

Now to make it more fluent and rich in vocabulary in English. The following is a list of
objects in the house using English.

1. Windows : Windows
2. Door :
3. Curtain : Curtains / curtains
4. Clock : Clock
5. Couch : Couch
6. Photos : Photos
7. Picture frame: Frame
8. Flower vase : Flower vase
9. Tables :

Names of Things You Use To
School in English

Going to school, of course, also requires some objects of support. Who would have thought that
these objects had names in English, you know . So what are these things?
Here is the full review that you can read.

1. Uniforms : Uniforms
2. Tie : Tie
3. Hats : Hats
4. Shoes : Shoes
5. Watch : Watches
6. Bag : Bag
7. Socks : socks
8. Skirts : Skirts
9. Trousers : Trousers
10. Belt : Belt

Objects in the Classroom Area in
English

If previously there was an explanation of some of the objects you use at school in English. So
next are some objects in the class, but using English. Below is a full explanation.

1. Whiteboard : Whiteboard
2. Blackboard : Blackboard
3. Markers : Markers
4. Chalk : Chalk
5. O’clock : Wall Clock
6. Map : Map
7. Windows : Windows
8. Door :
9. Curtains : Curtains
10. Trash Box : Trash box
11. Picket List : Picket List
12. Lesson Schedule : Subject Schedule
13. Calendar : Calendar
14. Vase : Flower vase
15. Table Cloth : Table cloth

Common Building Names In English

The home and school sections have been discussed in the explanation above. Of course, by
reading some of the vocabulary above, you will also be rich in vocabulary knowledge. Not only
that, you know, there are several common building names that can also have English vocabulary.

Some of the lists below are the names of public buildings or facilities in English.

1. Airport : Airport
2. Amusement park : An amusement park
3. Auditorium : Auditorium
4. Bakery : A bakery
5. Banks : Banks
6. Bars : Bars
7. Barbershop : A place to cut hair
8. Bookstores : Bookstores
9. Bus stop : Bus stop or bus stop.
10. Café : Café Cafeteria
11. Canteen : Canteen
12. Church : Church
13. Cinema : Cinema
14. Clinic : Clinic
15. College/university : College/university
16. Drugstore : Drug store
17. Gallery : Gallery
18. Gas station : Gas
19. Gym : Gym (exercise place)
20. Hospital : Hospital
21. Hotels : Hotels
22. Internet café : Warnet
23. Libraries : Libraries
24. Malls : Malls
25. Market : Market
26. Mosques : Mosques
27. Museums : Museums
28. Night market : Night market
29. Office building : Office building
30. Park : Park
31. Parking lots : Parking
32. Pharmacy : Pharmacy
33. Playground : Playground
34. Port/harbor : Harbor
35. Post office : Post office
36. Public health center : Puskesmas
37. Rest area : Rest area
38. Restaurant : Restaurant
39. Saloon : Saloon
40. School : School
41. shop : shop
42. Sport center : Sports center/sports building
43. Stadium : Stadium
44. Stationery store : Stationery store
45. Supermarkets : Supermarkets
46. Swimming pool : Swimming pool
47. Temple : Temple
48. Theater : Theater building
49. Town hall/city hall : City hall
50. Train station : Train station
51. Zoo : Zoo

So, those are some vocabulary related to room names in English. Even though not everything is
listed, the information above can help Sinaumed’s in learning English.

Related Article Recommendations

Author: Hendrik Nuryanto

Risk management is important to avoid risks that occur in a company. Risk is defined as an unpleasant consequence of an action. Risk is a familiar word and has a negative connotation. For example, if we have a business, but employees are dishonest and like to steal, then there is a risk that the business will suffer losses (unpleasant events).

In a company where there is certainly business activity, a risk must be managed as well as possible, especially in the midst of a pandemic situation like today. Because risks can appear at any time and vary. It takes a method or way to anticipate it. Let’s study carefully about the following risk management.

1. Definition of Risk Management

Risk is related to uncertainty, this occurs because of a lack of information about what will happen. Something that is uncertain can be beneficial or detrimental. As interpreted by (Regan: 2003) that risk is a possibility that causes or implies loss or danger.

Defined by Wideman and Mamduh (2009) that risk is uncertainty that creates a profitable possibility known as opportunity, while uncertainty that causes adverse consequences is known as risk .

Emmaett J Vaughan and Curtis Elliot (1978) state, risk is defined as the chance of loss, the possibility of loss, uncertainty, the dispersion of actual from expected result), the probability that a result is different from the expected (the probability of any outcome different from the expected).

Risk is classified into two by Mamduh Hanafi (2009) , namely: pure risk and speculative risk. Pure risks or commonly called pure risks are risks where the possibility of loss exists but the possibility of profit does not exist. Example: fire, accident, flood, etc. Meanwhile, speculative risk is a risk where we expect losses as well as profits. Example: buying stocks, business ventures, and so on.

In this world, we must face uncertainty. This element of uncertainty often results in a loss. This is a universal trait, almost always present in all aspects of human life. Losses from this element of uncertainty (risk) can be manifested in a variety of activities, both in economic, social and legal activities.

For this reason, in order to overcome all risks that may occur, a process called risk management is needed. Risk management is a management activity carried out at the executive leadership level, namely the activity of finding and systematically analyzing losses that may be faced by a company due to a risk and the most appropriate method for dealing with losses associated with the level of profitability of the company.

Herman Darmawi (2006) states, risk management is an effort to find out, analyze, and control risks in every company activity with the aim of obtaining higher effectiveness and efficiency.

Irham Fahmi (2010 ) defines risk management as a field of knowledge that discusses how an organization or company applies measures in mapping various existing problems by placing various management approaches in a comprehensive and systematic manner.

This risk management is also an application of general management that tries to identify, measure, and handle the causes and effects of uncertainty in an organization or company. Thus, risk management is needed to avoid and minimize risks that will arise or be faced by the company.

In its application in banking, risk management is also used to identify market, operational and bank credit risks which you can learn about in Risk Management 1 book below.

2. Benefits of Risk Management for the Company

The benefits that a company will get if it carries out risk management properly include:

a. Guarantee the achievement of goals

Management in a company uses every good means to achieve its company goals. In an effort to achieve this goal, many things can happen. There are things that can be anticipated in advance, and there are possible uncertain futures. Uncertainty is what creates risk.

The goal will be easier if the obstacles that may occur are known beforehand. Ronny Kountur (2004) says, the success of a company is determined by management’s ability to use various existing resources to achieve company goals. Companies can be successful if they have good goals to achieve.

Companies that have good risk management will find it easier to achieve their goals compared to companies that do not have good risk management.

b. Minimizes the possibility of bankruptcy

All companies have the possibility of bankruptcy or bankruptcy. The risk of bankruptcy can happen to anyone at any time. No one can guarantee that a company will not go bankrupt.

Companies that implement risk management properly will be able to handle various adverse possibilities that will occur to their company. This can minimize the possibility of loss and the existence of the company can be maintained.

c. Increase company profits

Good and regular risk management can certainly increase company profits. One of the benefits of risk management is that it can minimize losses so that the profits will be greater.

By handling good risk management, all possible losses that could befall the company can be kept to a minimum so that costs are reduced and the profit that goes to the company can be increased. This should be one indicator of the successful implementation of risk management within a company.

d. Provides job security

Managers must have the ability to understand, analyze, and handle risk. Managers who can handle risk well can help save the company.

If the company that the manager handles can avoid losses, then it is certain that the company will experience progress and the manager’s career will also progress.

Ronny Kountur (2004) once said that many companies were not willing to hire managers from companies that had previously been bankrupt or did not perform well while being led by that manager. Reluctance to hire underperforming managers is sometimes not due to inexperience, but possibly due to a lack of understanding in dealing with contingencies or risks.

In better understanding the benefits of risk management and integrating it with other management systems in the company, the ISO 31000:2018 Based Risk Management book: A Guide for Risk Leaders and Risk Practitioners is here for you.

3. Objectives of Risk Management

The purpose of risk management is to ensure that a company or organization can understand, measure and monitor the various types of risks that occur and also ensure that the policies that have been made can control the various types of risks that exist. In order for the implementation to run smoothly, it is necessary to have support in developing risk management policies and guidelines in accordance with the conditions of the company.

The purpose of risk management is generally used as a basis to be able to predict the hazards or unpleasant things that will be faced with careful calculations and careful consideration of various information in advance to avoid things that are not desirable.

In particular, the objectives of risk management are:
a. Provide information regarding risks to regulators.
b. Minimizing losses from various uncontrolled risks.
c. So that the company stays alive with continuous development.
d. Cost efficient and effective risk management.
e. Gives a sense of security.
f. So that the company’s income is stable and able to provide satisfaction for owners and other parties.

To achieve its objectives, there is a risk management process that starts from identification, measurement, to handling which is discussed in the book Easy to Understand Enterprise Risk Management which is used to achieve this goal.

4. Principles of Risk Management

Principles in risk management that need to be considered include:

a. Formulation of goals

The clarity of the company’s vision and mission serves as a guideline for determining rational steps and strategies that must be taken, one of which is the goal to be achieved in managing corporate risk through general risk anticipation measures aimed at avoiding all forms of waste.

b. Unity of direction

In carrying out an activity within the company, it must have the same goals as those directed by the leadership. In the book of management principles it is said, an employee who works in one section only receives instructions regarding certain activities from a section head who is his superior.

c. Division of labor and delegation of authority

Division of work and delegation of authority in a company needs to be done so that each unit clearly knows the authority and responsibility it carries. The purpose of the delegation of authority is to achieve maximum results as desired by delegating some of the tasks to subordinates.

d. Coordination

Coordination is one of the management functions or the process of integrating, synchronizing and simplifying the implementation of separate tasks on an ongoing basis to achieve goals effectively and efficiently. With coordination, it is hoped that there will be no overlapping work. Without coordination, it is difficult to obtain effective and efficient company goals.

e. Supervision

With the principle of supervision, it can be known about the results that have been achieved. Supervision can function to measure how far the results that have been achieved are in accordance with what has been planned. Supervision must be carried out to prevent abuse of authority.

5. Various Forms of Risk

a. Risk nature of business

Various types of businesses contain risks that are different from one another. Initiating businesses that have never been carried out before have a high risk. This is due to a lack of experience.

b. Geographic risk

Geographic risk is closely related to natural disasters that often occur in certain business locations. For example, floods, fires in plantation businesses, and others.

c. Political risk

Political risk also affects a business. Unclear political policies can cause business failure. Therefore, an analysis of the political stability of a region or country is sufficient to provide input on predicting the success of a business in the future.

d. Uncertainty risk

The uncertainty factor will lead to speculation and speculation will carry a high risk, because everything cannot be planned well in advance.

e. Competition risk

Competition risk can take the form of competition among companies within the same industry. To win the competition, of course, marketing management is required to carefully take into account the overall analysis of strengths and weaknesses.

We can see this in one example, namely banking, where there are often risks and to study this, the Bank Risk Management Strategy book was made by the Indonesian Bankers Association.

6. Risk Management Measures

The steps or processes that are usually carried out in an effort to deal with a risk (risk management process) are very dependent on the basic concepts adopted. To make a good plan to avoid the risks faced by the company, several steps must be taken, including:

a. Identification of company risks

Risk identification can be done with the help of using a checklist. In a company, a systematic method is needed to explore all aspects of a company. The methods that can be used are:

1). Risk analysis questionnaire (risk analysis questionnaire)

The risk manager needs to ensure that the required information regarding the company’s assets and operations is not forgotten.

2). Financial reporting method

This method is carried out by analyzing financial statements, namely balance sheets, profit and loss statements , and other financial records. The risk manager can identify all the risks related to the company’s assets, debts and personnel. Each estimate is analyzed in depth with regard to the possible losses that can occur from each estimate.

3). Flow map method

This method will describe the entire series of business operations starting from input to output. A checklist of potential losses is used for the operations shown in the flow map so as to determine the losses faced by the company concerned.

4). On-the-spot inspection method

This method is used to carry out direct inspections at places where company activities are carried out. The risk manager’s observation can produce results regarding the realities on the ground so that it is useful for risk management.

5). Interact with external parties

Outside parties can be interpreted as having relationships with individuals or other companies. Especially those who can assist the company in dealing with risks such as legal advisers, accountants, management consultants, and others. They can assist in developing an identification of potential losses.

6). Statistical record of past losses

These records can be used for performance evaluation. Performance that has the potential to cause losses needs to be monitored and refined, such as: production quality, service quality, and others.

7). Environmental analysis

This step is very necessary in order to determine the conditions that influence the emergence of risks such as consumers, competitors, suppliers, and others. In analyzing each component, important considerations include: the nature of the relationship, their diversity and stability. For example: product sales directly or indirectly, from producers directly to consumers or from producers through wholesalers, new retailers to consumers, and others.

b. Measure risk

Measuring effort is carried out with the aim of knowing the relative importance and obtaining information to determine the right combination of risk management tools to handle. Methods for measuring this risk include:

1) Sensitivity method

The sensitivity method is a way of measuring the impact on exposure as a result of the movement of a risk variable. Measurement with the sensitivity method is widely used because this method is the easiest technical calculation and almost all company analysts and managers have used the sensitivity method for planning decisions. The risk variables analyzed using the sensitivity method include: interest rate risk, exchange rate risk, market risk, credit risk and liquidity risk.

2) The volatility method

The volatility method is a method that shows the magnitude of the possible results around the expected results. The volatility that is often used is the range and standard deviation. The calculation of the standard deviation can use two types of data, namely historical data and forecasted data.

3) Downside risk

Risk can have a positive or negative impact. This risk only measures the potential adverse impact if the risk becomes a reality. Keep in mind, there are conditions where companies can face risks that only have a positive impact, but not only have a negative impact.

c. Risk control

Risk control (risk control) can be done through risk control and risk financing. Risk control can be carried out by avoiding risk

Rights and Obligations of Citizens – Sinaumed’s, as good citizens, we should know and understand their rights and obligations. In the life of the nation and state, there are things that must be done or obligations, and there are also things that must be earned, namely rights.

Citizen rights can be interpreted as all things that are obtained or obtained by a citizen, both in the form of authority and power. Rights are basically something that should be accepted or enjoyed. That means we have the right to receive things that are our rights and we must not violate the rights of others.

Meanwhile, obligations are things that must be done as members of society. Generally, obligations are things that must be done in order to get our rights.

Definition of Citizen

Citizens are people who are part of a population that is an element of the state. AS Hikam defines that a citizen who is a translation of citizenship is a member of a community that forms a country.

In short, Koerniatmo S. also defines citizens as members of the state. As a member of the state, citizens have a special position towards the state. They have a relationship of rights and obligations that are reciprocal to their country. In the Indonesian context, the term citizen (in accordance with the 1945 Constitution article 26) is meant for the native Indonesian nation and other nations that are legalized by law as citizens.

In addition, in accordance with article 1 of Law no. 22/1958 states that citizens of the Republic of Indonesia are people who based on laws, agreements or regulations that have been in force since the proclamation of 17 August 1945 have become citizens of the Republic of Indonesia.

Every country has the freedom and authority to determine the basis of a person’s citizenship. In applying the principle of citizenship there are two guidelines, namely the principle of citizenship based on birth and the principle of citizenship based on marriage.

However, before the state determines who becomes a citizen, the state must recognize that everyone has the right to embrace religion and worship according to their religion, choose education and teaching, choose a job, choose citizenship, choose a place to live in the territory of the country and leave it, and has the right to return. as stipulated in article 28 E paragraph (1) of the 1945 Constitution.

This statement means that persons living within the territory of a country can be classified as follows:

1. Indonesian citizens are native Indonesian people and people of other nations who are legalized by law as citizens.
2. Residents, namely foreigners who live in a country temporarily in accordance with a visa (permit to enter a country and stay temporarily, which is given by an official of the destination country) given by the country through the immigration office.

Rights and Obligations of Citizens Based on Pancasila

Every community has rights and obligations as citizens based on Pancasila, starting from the first precept to the fifth precept. The following are examples of rights and obligations as citizens based on Pancasila,

Rights and Obligations of Citizens Based on the First Sila

The first precept of Pancasila reads, “Belief in the One and Only God”. In this precept, we have rights and obligations as citizens, as follows:

1. The right to embrace religion and belief according to their choice and belief.
2. The right to worship according to the chosen religion and belief.
3. It is obligatory to give other people the freedom to choose their religion and beliefs.
4. Must give freedom to others to worship.
5. Obligatory to respect the beliefs of other religions.

Rights and Obligations of Citizens Based on the Second Will

The second precept of Pancasila reads, “just and civilized humanity”. In this precept, we have rights and obligations as citizens, as follows:

1. Right to get justice in the eyes of the law.
2. The right to a decent life and to be treated fairly in society.
3. Must be fair and defend the truth.
4. Must uphold human values ​​and tolerance.

Rights and Obligations of Citizens Based on the Third Precept

The third precept of Pancasila reads, “Indonesian unity”. In this precept, we have rights and obligations as citizens, as follows:

1. The right to participate in national defense.
2. The right to be a servant of the state.
3. Mandatory to foster unity based on Bhinneka Tunggal Ika.
4. Must appreciate and respect all the differences that exist in Indonesia.

Rights and Obligations of Citizens Based on the Fourth Precept

The fourth precept reads, “people who are led by wisdom in representative deliberations”. In this precept, we have rights and obligations as citizens, as follows:

1. The right to express an opinion.
2. The right to take part in the general election if it meets the requirements.
3. Must respect the opinions and input of others.
4. Must respect the results of decisions that have been taken in deliberations.

Rights and Duties of Citizens Based on the Fifth Precept

The fifth precept reads, “social justice for all Indonesian people”. In this precept, we have rights and obligations as citizens, as follows:

1. The right to protection from other people and the government.
2. The right to welfare in various ways.
3. Must participate in mutual cooperation activities in the community.
4. Must participate in state activities in order to realize social justice.

Rights and Obligations of Indonesian Citizens Based on the Constitution

Every citizen has rights, even from birth. Rights possessed by citizens since birth are called basic rights or human rights (HAM). This right is universal and cannot be taken or tampered with by any party.

Article 1 of Law no. 19 of 1999 defines human rights as a set of rights that are inherent in the essence of human existence as creatures of God Almighty and are His gifts that must be respected, upheld and protected by the state, law, government and everyone for the honor and protection of dignity and rights. human dignity.

Basic rights are balanced with basic obligations. The meaning of fundamental obligations is a set of obligations that if not implemented, human rights cannot be implemented and enforced.

In general, the rights of Indonesian citizens in the constitution are as follows:

1. Right to live.
2. The right to freedom and physical security.
3. The right to respect his personality.
4. The right to equal rights under the law.
5. The right to enter and leave the territory of a country.
6. The right to obtain nationality or citizenship.
7. The right to own objects in a legal way.
8. The right to express thoughts and feelings.
9. The right to choose and embrace religion.
10. The right to freedom of expression.
11. The right to hold meetings and meetings.
12. The right to get social security.
13. The right to get a decent job.
14. The right to trade.
15. The right to participate in the collaborative movement in their respective communities.
16. The right to enjoy the arts.
17. The right to participate in advancing science.

The obligations of Indonesian citizens in general are as follows:

1. Obey the law and government.
2. Respect the rights of others.
3. Obey the law.

Rights of Citizens in the 1945 Constitution (UUD).

The rights and obligations of citizens in Indonesia are regulated in the constitution. In the 1945 Constitution, the rights of citizens are contained in articles 27 to 34.

1. Article 27

The rights of Indonesian citizens in article 27 paragraph (2) reads “every citizen has the right to work and a life worthy of humanity”.

2. Article 28 A

The rights of Indonesian citizens in article 28 A reads “everyone has the right to live and has the right to defend his life and existence”.

3. Article 28 B

The rights of citizens in article 28 B are contained in two paragraphs. Paragraph (1) reads “a citizen has the right to form a family through a legal marriage”. Whereas in paragraph (2) contains the right to survival, which reads “every child has the right to survival, growth and development”.

4. Article 28 C

The rights of citizens in article 28 C are contained in two paragraphs. Paragraph (1) reads, “everyone has the right to develop himself and through the fulfillment of his basic needs and has the right to receive education, science and technology, arts and culture in order to improve his quality of life for the welfare of human life”.

As for verse (2) it reads, “everyone has the right to advance themselves in fighting for their rights collectively to build their society, nation, and country”.

5. Article 28 D

The rights of citizens in article 28 D are contained in four verses. Paragraph (1) reads, “everyone has the right to fair recognition, guarantee, protection, and legal certainty and equal treatment before the law”. Paragraph (2) reads, “everyone has the right to work and receive fair and decent remuneration and treatment in the work relationship”.

Paragraph (3) guarantees the same right to participate in government, while paragraph (4) guarantees the right to citizenship status.

6. Article 28 E

The rights of citizens in article 28 E are contained in three paragraphs. Paragraph (1) discusses the right of every person to choose and embrace their own religion without coercion, choose a job, choose citizenship, and choose a place to live in the territory of their country and have the right to return.

Furthermore, in paragraph (2) it is stated that everyone is free to believe in beliefs, express attitudes and thoughts that are in accordance with their conscience. As for paragraph (3) it is stated that everyone is free to speak, associate, assemble, and express opinions.

7. Article 28 F

This article contains information and technology rights. This article reads, “everyone has the right to communicate and obtain information to develop his personality and social environment and has the right to seek, obtain, possess, store, process and convey information using all types of available channels”.

8. Article 28 G

Article 28 F contains the protection of the government and the state for the right of every person to obtain permission from him and his family for the assets under it, have the right to security and freedom from threats. In addition, citizens are also entitled to political asylum from other countries.

9. Article 28 H

Article 28 H consists of four paragraphs, each of which contains the right of every person to receive birth and spirit, get a decent place to live, the right to proper health care; the right to obtain special approval and assistance to obtain equal opportunities and benefits to achieve agreement and justice; everyone’s right to social security; as well as private property rights that should not be taken arbitrarily.

10. Pasal 28 I

The rights of citizens in article 28 I are contained in two paragraphs. Paragraph (1) contains the right to be recognized as a person before the law and the right not to be prosecuted on the basis of retroactively applicable law are human rights that cannot be reduced under any circumstances. Meanwhile, paragraph (2) provides for the right to be free from discrimination and to receive protection from discriminatory actions.

11. Article 29

Article 29 explains that every citizen has the right to worship according to their respective religions and beliefs.

12. Article 31

The right of citizens in this article is to get an education, while the implementation of basic education is guaranteed and financed by the state.

13. Article 33

Article 33 consists of three paragraphs which contain provisions that the economy is structured as a joint venture based on the principle of kinship; branches of production which are important and approved by the people’s livelihood are controlled by the state; and the use of all natural resources in the earth, air and land for the greatest prosperity of the people; as well as the implementation of a democratic, environmentally sound, just and sustainable national economy.

14. Article 34

In this article, the state guarantees all the poor and neglected children. Citizens also have the right to receive proper health services provided by the government. In addition, citizens are also entitled to receive social security, especially for the weak and the poor. This social security is administered by the government.

Rights and Obligations of Foreign Citizens in Indonesia

For foreign citizens (WNA) who get a residence permit also receive rights and obligations while in Indonesia, including:

1. Obligation to obey and comply with laws and regulations.
2. The right to receive protection for himself and his property.
3. Do not have the right to be elected and vote.
4. Have no rights and obligations for different religions.

The implementation of citizens’ rights in the 1945 Constitution is directly related to obligations because they are related. This is what makes the formulation of rights and obligations included in one article, such as article 27 paragraph (1), namely “all citizens have the same position before the law and the government and are obliged to uphold the law and government without exception”.

In this regard, issues of citizens’ rights can be raised, for example issues of education, social welfare, and defence. Before the amendment, there were no human rights in the 1945 Constitution. This was because human rights were not in accordance with the integralistic state ideology adopted by the 1945 Constitution. The integralist state ideology taught by Spinoza, Adam Muller, and Hegel was not to guarantee individuals or groups, but to guarantee society as a whole. unity.

That is a brief explanation of the rights and obligations of citizens. Rights and obligations are things that are related to each other, so that in practice they must be carried out in a balanced way. Rights are everything that is appropriate and absolute to be obtained by individuals as members of the state since they are still in the womb, while obligations are a necessity or obligations for individuals in carrying out their role as members of the state in order to obtain recognition of rights in accordance with the implementation of these obligations.

If rights and obligations do not run in a balanced way in the practice of life, a problem will occur which will cause social turmoil in the implementation of individual life, both in the life of society, nation and state.

The function of ribosomes – Every living body in this world must be composed of various kinds and types of cells and their own tissues. These cells and tissues then have their respective roles to maintain the stability of living bodies, including plants and humans.

Meanwhile, one of the organelles that have an important role in the body of living things is the ribosome cell or tissue. The function of the ribosome itself is an organelle that has a very small size and is dense in a cell which also acts as a place for carrying out protein synthesis or the process of forming protein particles which in the process involves RNA synthesis which is also influenced by DNA.

In the mid-1950s, a scientist named George Emil Palade from Romania conducted the first ribosome research using an electron microscope. Meanwhile, the use of the word ‘ribosome’ itself was first used by a scientist named Richard B. Robert in 1985.

All living things and cells, like animal cells, plant cells, prokaryotic cells, and eukaryotic cells have ribosomes. The function of the ribosome which is very important in the continuation of living things makes us have to learn more about it. The reason is, ribosomes also have a function as one of the cell components that play a role in making proteins from all the amino acids that exist.

The location of this ribosome is in the cytoplasm and attaches or attaches to the ER membrane when the protein synthesis process is taking place. Meanwhile, if the protein synthesis process is not taking place, the ribosome will form in two cell sub units, namely the large sub unit and the large ribosome sub unit.

In terms of appearance or shape, this ribosome has a very small size with a diameter of about 20 to 22 nanometers and also consists of about 65 percent ribosomal RNA and about 35 percent ribosomal protein. Cells or tissues with a high rate of protein synthesis will have lots of ribosomes around them.

This can be seen in human liver cells which have several million ribosomes. Because, as previously said, these ribosomes are composed of various types of proteins and various types of RNA molecules.

So, what exactly is the function of the ribosome? Curious? Come on, look at the following information regarding the function of the ribosome, its meaning, structure, shape, function, how it works, and its characteristics. Check this out !

Definition of Ribosomes

Literally, the word ribosome comes from the Greek, namely from the word ‘ soma ‘ and the word ‘ ribonucleic acid ‘. The word Soma itself means ‘body’, while ribonucleic acid means ribonucleic acid.

According to Rahmadina and Husnarika Febriani’s book entitled Cell Biology: The Smallest Unit that Makes Up a Living Body, which was published in 2017, it was explained that ribosomes are organelles that are small, dense, and also do not have membranes that are normally present in all living cells. .

The main molecule that makes up ribosomes is ribosomal RNA. Ribosomal RNA is also commonly known by the abbreviation rRNA.

In addition to ribosomal RNA or rRNA, ribosomal constituent molecules also consist of protein. So, it’s no wonder that ribosomes are one of the body’s smallest organelles which are also found in prokaryotic and eukaryotic cells in very large numbers, up to thousands of ribosomes.

In eukaryotic cells, ribosomal organelles can be located in many places, including places such as the endoplasmic reticulum and cytosol. The endoplasmic reticulum itself is one of the organelles or cell organs found in all eukaryotic cells and is a part of a system called the endomembrane.

While the cytosol is a component of cells in the cytoplasm in the form of fluid where metabolism occurs.

Meanwhile, in prokaryotic cells, ribosomal cell organs can only be found in places such as cytosol cells. This happens because in this type of cell there are no cell organs that have membranes like in the endoplasmic reticulum.

Structure of the Ribosome

As previously mentioned, the structure that forms the ribosome is composed of two very important parts, namely ribonucleic acid or RNA and protein. Each ribosome contains two subunits of RNA and protein. The subunits are the large subunit and the small subunit.

The position of the RNA and protein subunits in the ribosome overlaps with all the large subunits that are on the top of the small subunit. Then, in the middle of the two subunits, there is more RNA. Because of this, new ribosomes are formed which make the cell organ look not much different from a stacked hamburger.

According to the Center for Science , the two subunits in the ribosome will come together when the ribosome feels ready to make a new protein. Both of them will come together and form strands consisting of RNA and various proteins.

What needs to be known next is that each sub-unit has its own duties and functions. As in the small subunit, this subunit has the function of the ribosome as a reader of messages previously conveyed by mRNA in amino acids. Meanwhile, the large subunit has the task of forming peptide bonds on the ribosome.

In addition to the large subunit of the ribosome, there is a place where new bonds will be made. This new bond is made to produce a new protein again. Meanwhile, the small subunit will convey or flow information during this protein synthesis process.

Based on the composition of the bodies of eukaryotic cells and prokaryotic cells, each ribosome arrangement or structure has its own coefficient value. In eukaryotes, the small subunit has a sedimentation coefficient of 40S Svedberg units, while the large subunit has a value of 60S. However, if put together as a unit, the value of the sedimentation coefficient of eukaryotic bodies is 80S.

Meanwhile, in prokaryotes, the small subunit has a sedimentation coefficient of 30S, and the large subunit has a sedimentation coefficient of 50S. However, if the two sedimentation coefficient values ​​are combined, the value of both will reach 70S.

As is well known, the constituent ribosomes are RNA and protein. The thing to note is that the RNA that makes up the ribosome must consist of ribosomal ARN or ARNr. And when the process of protein synthesis takes place in the ribosome, there will be other ARN involved. They are Transfer ARN (ARNt) and Ambassador ARN (ARNd) which are located attached to the ribosome.

The two ARNs involved have their respective roles as well. This ARN Transfer functions to provide various types of amino acids which will later be processed into proteins. Meanwhile, ARN Duta serves as a transmitter of genetic information about the protein that must be synthesized.

Ribosome Shape and Size

After discussing the meaning and structure of ribosomes, we also need to know the shape and size of the organ cells in our body. The shape and size of the ribosome actually depends on the location or place where it is located.

As previously explained, ribosomes are present in two cells, namely eukaryotic and prokaryotic cells. So, the function of the ribosome in the two places also has a different shape and size. For more detailed information, see the explanation below.

1. Eukaryotes

Eukaryotic ribosomes are ribosomes found in eukaryotic cells. These ribosomes are located independently in the cytoplasm and are usually attached to the endoplasmic reticulum. Meanwhile, the size of the eukaryotic ribosome itself has a length of about 32 x 22 nanometers with a mass of 4,220,000 Daltons.

In eukaryotic ribosomes, the combined value of the sedimentation coefficient is 80S. This makes eukaryotic ribosomes composed of 40 percent RNA and about 60 percent protein content.

2. Prokaryotes

Slightly different from eukaryotic ribosomes, prokaryote ribosomes are cell organs that are basically located on the inside of the cytoplasm. These ribosomes have subunit sizes with sedimentation coefficients of 50S and 30S. This organ cell has a length of about 29 x 21 nanometers with a mass weight of 2,520.00 Daltons.

Ribosome Function

Ribosomes can be found in plant and animal cells. And each of these cells also certainly has roles and functions that are very important for life.

As mentioned in the explanation above, the function of the ribosome is as one of the cell organs that helps the process of making protein in the cell or commonly known as protein synthesis.

Consists of two different subunits, making the function of the ribosome more inclined to the translation process than to the cell transcription process.

Cells in the body need to carry out the process of producing protein with the aim of being able to speed up the normal and important biological processes that the body goes through. In addition, the protein produced by the ribosome also plays a very important role in helping the body’s biological processes to function properly.

This is because protein itself is a very important part of various organs in the body, such as skin, hair and nails. So, if there is no protein in the body as a result of ribosome function, there will definitely be many other body functions that are disrupted.

Therefore, it is not surprising that ribosomes have a very important role in every activity or metabolic activity. Because, ribosomes also have a role as a collector of amino acids to be prepared into certain proteins. The process of forming proteins is an important aspect carried out by organ cells.

Ribosomes can make proteins that will later be used in cells or proteins to be released by cells. Proteins that are in this cell are basically made by ribosomes that are in the cell cytosol.

Meanwhile, proteins that are outside the cell are usually produced by ribosomes from the endoplasmic reticulum or nuclear envelope.

Apart from the explanation above, there are actually three functions of the ribosome that are most important and need to be known. The function of the ribosome is as follows:

1. The function of ribosomes as a process of protein synthesis

Ribosomes are organelles or cell organs that do not have membranes in their bodies. However, ribosomes still have a very important function in every process of protein synthesis or formation.

The most important function of the ribosome itself in the process of protein synthesis is to effectively translate the code from mRNA which will later turn into protein. In fact, not only that, ribosomes can also carry out the process of synthesizing proteins and enzymes freely so that they can also function as catalysts for fluids in the cytosol.

2. The function of the ribosome as translation

When the process of forming a protein occurs, in general, the ribosome will carry out a task called translation. The function of this translation task is to translate or distribute information regarding the nucleotide sequence contained in the mRNA-forming molecule. After that, the ribosome will turn it into a new sequence of amino acids as a constituent of a new protein as well.

In this translation process, mRNA will usually be a copy of the sequence of DNA which will later be used as a component of the gene in the form of an open reading frame. In addition, mRNA also in this process has information regarding the sequence of amino acids needed during protein formation.

3. Function of ribosome as transcription

The next function of the ribosome is as transcription in the process of protein synthesis. In the process of forming this protein, one of the several DNA sequences that is formed will undergo a process called transcription which will produce RNA as the end result later.

For the record, this transcription process is still part of the genetic expression process. So, this transcription process can also be referred to as a process of copying text from DNA which will then be converted into RNA. And right when this process takes place, the component that will undergo changes in DNA is the nitrogenous base thymine. After that, change the DNA into RNA.

How Ribosomes Work in the Body

So that all the proteins needed by each cell can be fulfilled and produced, then of course there is only one way that can be done. It is protein synthesis with the help of ribosome function. The process of making this protein certainly involves DNA and RNA, besides that the process also starts from within the cell nucleus or nucleus.

The process of protein synthesis begins when an enzyme in the nucleus opens a specific part of its DNA. This is done so that the DNA can be accessed by the RNA copy and continue the process of protein synthesis.

After RNA successfully copied DNA information, RNA molecules moved from the cell nucleus to the cell cytoplasm. It is in the cytoplasm that the process of protein formation will occur. The end result of this process is protein which is used for various bodily functions.

Features of the Ribosome

Based on the explanation above, of course we already know the function of the ribosome itself. In addition, ribosomes also have several characteristics that can be used as their characteristics. The characteristics of the ribosome, among others:

1. > Consists of predominant sequences of RNA and protein
2. >In ribosomes, ribosomal RNA (rRNA) is 65% and protein is 35%
3. >The shape resembles small grains with a diameter of about 20-22 nanometers.
4. >It is the smallest cell organ in the cell.
5. > The function of the ribosome is to produce protein.
6. >Some are categorized as bound ribosomes and free ribosomes.
7. > Found in every cell of living things, from plants, animals, to prokaryotes and eukaryotic.

Conclusion

Ribosomes are very small and compact cell organelles that are in a cell. The function of the ribosome itself is as a place to carry out protein synthesis or protein formation.

The size of these ribosomes is generally only 20-22 nanometers. With a shape like a small grain, ribosomes have a very important role in maintaining the stability of living things. This is because ribosomes are present in all living cells, from plants, animals, to prokaryotes and eukaryotes.

That is a summary description of the function of the ribosome, its definition, structure, shape, function, way of working, and its characteristics. Hopefully what has been explained can be understood and useful for #FriendsWithoutLimits, OK?

If you want to find various kinds of books on biology, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

 

Retained Profit – Business people are certainly familiar with the term profit which is the goal when running a business. Not all profits will go into the pockets of entrepreneurs and shareholders. Profits are also retained for various reasons, for example for business development.

Retained earnings can be found on a company’s balance sheet and is at the bottom of shareholder equity at the end of each accounting period. This is because retained earnings are still profits owned by the company, although not directly.

So, what is the meaning of retained earnings? What are the characteristics of retained earnings? Then what is the relationship between retained earnings and dividends? How to calculate retained earnings?

Definition of Retained Profit

Retained profit is a part of net profit that is retained and the company does not pay out to investors in the form of dividends whose purpose is as a precautionary fund, additional reserve capital, as well as the company’s investment needs. Retained profit, usually referred to as retained earnings . In short, retained earnings can also mean the remaining net profit that has been reduced by dividends. Dividends are distributions of profits by businesses to shareholders in equal or proportionate proportion to their shareholdings.

This retained earnings decision can occur based on a joint decision at the General Meeting of Shareholders (GMS). Decision making can occur due to various factors, namely based on the financial condition of the business, its marketing strategy, and operational funding requirements for the coming period.

The effect of rising or falling profitability also occurs due to various factors, such as changes in corporate taxes, changes in selling costs, changes in production costs, changes in the cost of goods, changes in net income, changes in the amount of dividends that companies must pay to shareholders, and changes in administrative costs.

Profit Retention Function

1. Help pay the company’s debts

Companies can increase profits by holding profits for a relatively long period of time if the company has a significant amount of debt. Because by utilizing the rest of the profits, company accountants can make debt payments on time. In addition, in paying off its debts, the company will not interfere with other sources of funding so that the company can ensure the safety of its main funds.

2. To finance the company’s operations

A business must have sufficient funds to operate, including petty cash and large cash. Companies can retain profits to finance the company’s operations. The company does this to provide the possibility that the company can continue to operate and have the hope of continuing to grow.

3. As a reserve capital

Another advantage of retaining profits is that the funds from profits have a function as a capital reserve if the business experiences financial difficulties. The use of reserve funds is to increase funds so that businesses can continue to operate effectively without having to borrow money from third parties such as banks.

4. For business development

Besides having a function as a source of reserve funds when the company’s finances are experiencing a loss. The function of retaining profits is that it can also be used as capital for business development. This business development is not limited to development, but can also include adding human resources to the company.

5. The company’s investment capital in the future

Of course, business owners want a business that is not static or even relatively declining, but wants growth and innovation to survive and develop. Another advantage of holding profits is to expand the business or make investments.

Factors Of Retained Profit

There are several factors that contribute to retained earnings, including the following:

1. There is a change in company management

If the management or control of the company changes, existing profits will generally be maintained. The new management made changes with the aim of enabling them to adapt and show credibility to their financial management.

2. There were errors in the financial statements of the previous period

Another factor is the occurrence of errors in the financial statements in the previous period. The company improves the financial statements to obtain validation and calculates the value of retained earnings reports accordingly.

3. There is an adjustment in the value of the rupiah from the previous period

Adjustment of the rupiah value is also an influential factor in determining retained earnings. The rupiah exchange rate can fluctuate at any time and can affect the results of calculating company profits. Thus, accountants have the option to maintain existing profits.

4. There is a change in the calculation method

The factor of changing the calculation method also contributes to retained earnings. For example, if the previous calculation method was always monthly and then switched to weekly, it would be confusing. Accountants have the option to retain existing capital gains because the data they have is ambiguous.

5. Changes in accounting principles from the previous period

Changing accounting principles since the previous period can also affect the value of retained earnings. For example, when the next period businesses start adopting sharia accounting, bookkeeping along with the results is mandatory for implementing sharia law.

Characteristics of Retained Profit

The characteristics of retained earnings, according to the definition, have not been calculated to be divided into various sectors that have the right to receive funds, such as investors or shareholders. Several factors become the background for retained earnings, among others:

1. There were errors in the financial statements in the previous period

Profits can be retained when the accountant has not been able to provide valid data. To avoid fraud and losses in profit sharing, the distribution will be stopped until the financial statements are correct or appropriate.

2. Changes in calculation methods

Changes in calculation methods are often the reason for retained earnings. For example, the previous calculation method always applied the monthly system and then changed it to daily.

3. Changes in accounting principles from the previous period

Changes in accounting principles from the previous period can affect retained earnings. For example, changes in calculation methods, financial reporting models prepared and accounting schemes.

4. There is a change in company management control holders

Withholding profits in this case was carried out in order to maintain work stability, suppress acts of suspicion and fraud. This is done so that the new management can adapt and show the credibility of its management to manage finances.

5. There is an adjustment in the value of the rupiah from the previous period

The rupiah exchange rate can go up and down at any time. If the change in the exchange rate significantly affects the results of calculating the company’s profit, the accountant generally decides to retain existing profits.

The Link between Retained Profit and Dividend

Retained earnings have a strong relationship with dividends. Dividends are rights owned by shareholders for the profits generated by the company. The actual retained earnings are the property of the shareholders which are still held by the company for business expansion purposes. When the retained earnings are finally decided to be distributed to shareholders, then it is called dividend distribution.

Dividend distribution is based on the number of shares owned by each shareholder. This dividend distribution policy varies from time to time according to the circumstances and conditions of the company.

If the company sees good prospects in the future, some of the profits will be retained by the company in the form of retained earnings with the aim of increasing its capital requirements and financing most of its own needs.

How to Calculate and Make a Retained Profit Report

Retaining earnings is one of the most important financial statements for a company and requires regular preparation. The ability of a business to operate effectively and achieve its business objectives is highly dependent on the quality of this report.

We must calculate how much profit is retained by the company, here are the ways and steps to calculate profit:

Step 1: Calculating gross profit

The first component of calculating profit is the gross profit or business profit obtained from sales, namely in the profit formula as follows:

GROSS PROFIT = SALES FIGURES – COST OF COST

Step 2: Calculating operating profit

If Sinaumed’s has obtained the amount of gross profit, the next step is to calculate the company’s operating profit using the following profit formula:

OPERATING PROFIT = GROSS PROFIT – OPERATING COSTS

Step 3: Calculating net profit before taxes

Calculating net profit before tax is the next step to determine retained earnings. This is calculated by deducting interest, amortization, and depreciation from operating profit. The following is the net profit formula.

NET PROFIT BEFORE TAX = OPERATING PROFIT – (INTEREST+AMORTIZATION+DEPRESSION)

Step 4: Calculate taxable net income

The way to calculate net profit after tax can be Sinaumed’s using the following profit formula:

NET PROFIT AFTER TAX = NET PROFIT BEFORE TAX – TAX RATES

Step 5: Calculating retained earnings

After Sinaumed’s knows the company’s net profit in a certain period, Sinaumed’s can calculate the company’s retained earnings by using the following formula:

RETAINED PROFIT = NET PROFIT AFTER TAX – DIVIDEND

Example of Retained Earning Report

In the retained earnings report , there are 3 examples that can be used by companies:

1. Example of a Separate Retained Earnings Report

In this report, the initial balance of retained earnings is reported and then added to net income or reduced by net loss.

Then, the result is reduced by dividends to obtain the ending balance for the period.

An example of a separate retained earnings statement is as follows:

2. Sample Report of Retained Earnings Compiled with a Report on Shareholders’ Equity

Any change in shareholder equity must be reported during the period.

If changes only occur in net income, net loss, and dividends, then it is enough for the company to make a retained earnings report .

However, if there are changes in shares and other paid-in capital accounts, the company must prepare them in the shareholders’ equity statements

Below is an example of retained earnings on a statement of shareholders’ equity.

3. Merged with the Profit and Loss Report

In addition to the two previous formats, the retained earnings report can be combined with the income statement.

One of the advantages of using this presentation format is that it can emphasize net income as an intermediary for the income statement with the retained earnings portion of shareholder equity.

Conclusion of Retained Profit

The way to calculate retained earnings is of course different for each company. This is due to differences in the amount of dividends that have been agreed upon by the commissioners or different types of companies. When all of these calculations have been fulfilled, the remaining amount of retained earnings can return to the company as an investment for the next quarter.

However, this retained profit can also be allocated for other things according to the agreement of the company’s commissioners. Retained earnings are also possible to have a minus value because the company is experiencing losses when compared to the previous year. Because the loss is greater than the total, this is what allows a minus to the total retained earnings .

Also read:

• Several Factors Causing Economic Problems in Indonesia
• Understanding Green Economy: Origins, Goals, Principles
• Economic Principles: Definition, Characteristics, and Examples
• Economic Measures: Definition, Types, & Relationships
• Economic Goods: Definition, Types, and Examples

The object of research is often referred to as something that will be analyzed, researched, and researched. The term can arise because something to be studied has the same meaning as the object of research. The object of research itself can be a work or an event that happened, it can even be the result of an interview or survey.

Determining the right object in a research will also help expedite the research activity. In addition, the right research object can also produce research or research results that are very good and useful for readers.

However, in determining the object of research still have to adjust to the needs of researchers. In Indonesia, most are dominated by research or research conducted by lecturers, but a small number have also conducted research or research. Therefore, it can be said that research is often carried out at the higher education level.

In determining the object, a researcher must also know about the meaning of the object. Then, have you understood how to determine an object in research activities? See a more complete explanation of the object of research as follows.

Definition of Research Object According to Experts

The first thing that needs to be understood about the object of research is its meaning. By understanding the meaning of the object of research, it will be easier to determine the object of research. The understanding of an object of research is then conveyed by a number of experts and the following are some of them.

1. Sugiyono (2014: 20)

The first opinion regarding the meaning of the research object used in a research was conveyed by Sugiyono. Sugiyono explained that an object of research in research is an attribute or nature and value of people, objects or activities with a certain variation and determined by the researcher to be studied and conclusions drawn.

The object of research in a research itself can be the nature of a person or group of people. Then found problems or views from groups of people that need to be investigated more deeply. From the problems that have been found, then look for the causes or to find suggestions for the problems they face.

Variations regarding an object in research are compiled and determined personally by researchers. The purpose of preparing research objects is so that research can be carried out by focusing more on one problem. That way, research can be carried out in more detail and more complex because it only focuses on one research object.

2. Supriati (2012: 38)

While the second opinion regarding the meaning of the object of this research was conveyed by Supriati. Supriati herself thinks that the object of research is a variable that will be researched or researched by researchers who are carried out at the research site. Therefore, researchers need to determine one variable and then do research on the object that has been determined previously.

This variable itself can be interpreted as a problem that needs to find a solution as the goal of the research to be carried out. Therefore, it can be said that this variable will then be closely related to the object itself. Research results in the form of a solution or a new technology will be of direct benefit to the object under study.

3. Iwan Satibi (2017: 74)

This third opinion was also conveyed by Iwan Satibi. Iwan Satibi explained that the object of research is an activity that aims to map or describe research or research objectives or research in a comprehensive manner. In this case, matters relating to the comprehensive, such as the origin of a region, the duties and functions of each, and related to the characteristics of the region.

In addition, in practice in the field, the object used in a research itself includes not only people in an environment, but also all the factors that influence the object in the research. For example, the condition of the surrounding environment, the economic aspects of the community, and so on, all research objects should be adapted to various research needs.

4. Suharsimi Arikunto (2010: 29)

The last is the opinion expressed by Suharsimi Arikunto. According to him, the object of research is something that is part of the core problems in a study. Suharsimi also mentioned that objects in research can also be referred to as research variables.

The purpose of this problematic core is basically an object to be used in research or it can also be the center of the problem found by the researcher which will then be analyzed and researched. Without an object of research, the topic of research problems or research will not just appear.

Based on the understanding of the research object that has been conveyed by the experts above, it can be said that the research object is a scientific goal aimed at obtaining valid data and finding solutions to a topic problem. In addition, choosing the right research object will make it easier for the writer to determine what will be discussed in a study.

Kinds of Research Objects

After understanding the meaning of the research object, the next discussion is to find out the various types of research objects. In general, in research activities, research objects are divided into two, namely primary research objects and secondary research objects. Here’s the full explanation.

1. Primary Research Object

The first type of research object is the primary research object. Primary research object is an object that will be used in research that comes from the first source. In this case, the first source can be interpreted as taking data directly from the source.

For example, when conducting research in village A, the researcher can then conduct various interviews with the village head in village A, and this village head can then be obtained directly. That way, it does not go through various third-party intermediaries, and is processed by the researchers themselves.

This data is then filtered and data is taken if it is really needed to support the research. Even so, basically, not all interview results will produce the data needed in the research, so researchers must choose the right sources.

2. Secondary Research Objects

The next type of research object is secondary research object. Secondary research objects are data obtained from objects which are secondary sources. The difference between the primary and secondary research objects lies in the method of obtaining the data.

For example, if researchers are going to take data from monthly reports, annual reports, and news published in newspapers related to village A, then the data obtained is an object of secondary research.

Research Object Principles

In discussing an aspect of the object of research in research activities, it is also necessary to know the principle of the object of research. You also need to understand the principles in the object of research, including:

1. Digital Identity

The first principle is digital identity, which can be interpreted as the process of building a digital identity. For example, on a profile in a media or on a platform that is commonly used in a research activity.

This principle itself aims to perform unique identification. Identification here itself is useful for facilitating various data processing processes and knowing where it has gone and by which party. For example, there is a DOI statement which is then intended for the publication process of research data. Then there is also the Orchid ID which is intended for the researcher himself.

2. Data Aggregation

The second principle in determining and processing data from research objects is data aggregation. This data aggregation itself is needed for a broader study, where researchers then need more data and studied in more depth.

This data aggregation process will also assist researchers in obtaining all the data needed. In fact, this process can simultaneously ensure credible and appropriate data to be used as research data, so that invalid data is not obtained. Because, invalid data will affect the validity of the research results themselves.

3. Annotations

The principle of the last research object is the annotation. This annotation has the function of providing additional metadata. In this case, all the metadata that has been obtained relates to the research to be carried out. That way, metadata can support the success of a research that has been done, and research results can provide a solution to a problem and be of benefit to the wider community.

How to Determine the Research Object

In conducting research, determining the object of research can be regarded as an important thing to do. This is because the object of research can facilitate research in completing research. In addition, the research results become more accurate.

There are many methods that can be used to determine the object of research, one of which is the SMART method. SMART stands for Specific or Specific, Measurable or Measurable, Achievable or possible to achieve, Realistic or Realistic, and Time or within a certain period of time. Here’s a detailed explanation:

1. Specific

The first is specific, in this step the researcher must look for a specific problem topic. That way, the object of research will become clearer, so that the direction of the research becomes clear too.

For example, researchers want to discuss community education, to be more specific, people who drop out of school are chosen. That way, researchers do not need to look for research data from all regions in Indonesia.

2. Scalable

Furthermore, measurable, which means that all data from a research object will then be measured to make it easier for researchers to achieve research goals. For example, data in the form of numbers, obtained from the results of values ​​and reports in a numerical form. This data is then easily processed and calculated by the researcher, so that the research data becomes more valid.

3. What Can Be Achieved

The third method of determining the object of research is knowing the objectives to be achieved in a study. By knowing this, the object of research can be found easily and full of confidence. In fact, by knowing this, it will be easy for researchers to determine what efforts need to be made to complete their research.

4. Realistic

How to determine the fourth object of research is realistic. In this case realistic can be interpreted as a researcher who must be able to determine research objectives that are in accordance with the existing reality.

5. Timeframe

The last step in determining the object of research is the time period. In other words, researchers must be able to determine when research can be completed. With that timeframe, research can be completed on time and get maximum results.
Thus the discussion about the object of research, I hope all the discussion that has been explained above is useful for Sinaumed’s. You can also search for various kinds of books on sinaumedia.com and can get #MoreWithReading with sinaumedia information.

Related Books

1. Quantitative Research Methods, Hypothesis Development and Testing Using SmartPLS

Hypothesis development is a crucial step in quantitative research. Hypotheses need to be built on the basis of strong arguments as the basis for proposing the hypothesis. In practice, especially in theses and dissertations that are being prepared, hypotheses often appear suddenly without starting with strong arguments. After the hypothesis is made properly and correctly, and the data is available to test it, it comes to the step to test the hypothesis. This book invites readers, especially those who do quantitative research, to develop hypotheses properly and correctly. The hypothesis is then tested using SmartPLS. The hypothesis that is built is then modeled with a structural model that contains mediators and moderators.

2. Information Systems Integrated Research Methods

Based on the author’s personal experience as a researcher and student research supervisor, the main obstacle that many students and novice researchers encounter in conducting research is ‘confusion’ in determining research designs and analytical techniques when dealing with research problems and/or questions.

On the other hand, the development of science, technological innovation, and the dynamics of environmental change provide an opportunity for the field of Information Systems Management (MSI) to develop from its roots which in turn makes MSI a multidisciplinary and borderless branch of science, so that sometimes it creates debates about the scope and research limitations.

On the basis of these problems, a book entitled Information System Integrated Research Methods was published so that it could be an alternative reference regarding MSI research methods from the point of view of a quantitative research approach.

3. Quantitative Research: Data Analysis Design Methodology

This Quantitative Research Book on Methodology, Design and Data Analysis with SPSS, AMOS & NVivo will help us realize quality quantitative research. The quality of quantitative research is not only determined by statistical data analysis techniques, but also how our philosophical views determine the strength of the quantitative research that we carry out. Therefore, we need to read this book to understand general views on research so that these views become our basis for designing and collecting quantitative research data. The quality of empirical research is also largely determined by the research design we choose. Therefore this book will help us to determine the best choice, which quantitative research design is most appropriate to answer our research problems. This book will explain in more detail the various types of quantitative research designs, including survey and experimental research designs. By understanding the research designs described in this book, we will be able to design appropriate quantitative research.

4. Research Methodology: Complete, Practical, and Easy to Understand

This book is part of the enrichment of literature on research methodology that has been widely written. This book, which is written based on extensive literature, will present complete chapters where these chapters are most needed for research. With the presence of this book, the author hopes that it can be a guide for students and researchers who want a practical, complete, and easy-to-understand research manual. For this reason, this book is designed to be easily accepted by anyone who requires knowledge of research methodology.

5. Easy Learning Research Methodology

Research methodology is a way or method used to conduct a research. The research methodology contains a set of rules, activities, and a procedure used by actors of a scientific discipline to solve a problem or research an object. Chapter 1 – Fundamentals of Research Chapter 2 – Quantitative and Qualitative Research Chapter 3 – Basic Elements of Research Chapter 4 – Elements of Qualitative Research Chapter 5 – Elements of Quantitative Research Chapter 6 – Educational Research: Classroom Action Research Chapter 7 – Health Research Design Chapter 8 – Research Implementation and Reporting.

Research methodology – Have you ever heard of the word research? Research is
a scientific activity that aims to obtain data which is then used for certain purposes. Someone
who conducts research is also known as a researcher. In addition, research is not only carried
out by one person, but sometimes by groups or organizations.

Research which is a scientific activity, in carrying out this activity, must be carried out in a
systematic, rational or reasonable way, and the data is valid or in accordance with the facts.
Therefore, in conducting research it should not be done carelessly because it can produce research
that is difficult for readers to understand.

So that research is not carried out carelessly, researchers must use what is called a research methodology.
Talking about research methodology can be regarded as one of the scientific disciplines that is
still growing today. In fact, until now the research methodology continues to be developed.
Therefore, methodology is included in one of the courses that must be followed.

The use of this research methodology is adapted to the field to be studied, for example in the health
sector, so the research methodology used must be related to health. This research methodology
will direct researchers to choose the right research methodology and according to the research objectives.
Therefore, it can be said that the selection of the right methodology can produce the right
research as well and the contents are easily understood by the readers.

There are two research methodologies that are generally known by many people, namely qualitative
methodology and quantitative research methodology. However, actually there are several other
types of research methodologies that are often used by researchers, what are these methodologies?

In this article, you will not only know the types of research methodologies, but also know the meaning of
research methodology to the objectives of research methodology. So, Sinaumed’s, check out this
article, OK?

Definition of Research Methodology

The research methodology consists of two words, namely methodology and research. In the Big
Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), methodology is the science of methods; description of the method.
While research in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), research is an activity of collecting,
processing, analyzing, and presenting data that is carried out systematically and objectively to solve a
problem or test a hypothesis to develop general principles.

So, research methodology is a way or technique to obtain information and data sources to be used in
research. This information or data can be in any form, literature, such as journals, articles,
theses, books, newspapers, and so on. In addition, research methodology can also be obtained
through electronic media such as television or radio. Even data sources can also be obtained
from surveys or interviews.

Therefore, when someone wants to do research, determine the methodology first. By determining
the research methodology, the researcher becomes more understanding of the workflow or steps in conducting
research. Not only that, researchers will also find it easy to find answers to the topic of the
problem being researched, so that research can be completed with maximum results.

The need for a research methodology is not without reason because conducting research requires a systematic
method. With this research methodology, a research can be accounted for because it has a fairly
high level of credibility.

Some people think that research methodology is the same as research method, but in fact the two things are
different. The difference between the two terms lies in their scope (which is in the form of
methods or techniques of conducting research). The research methodology has a greater scope.
Meanwhile, research methods have a smaller scope. Therefore, the research method is
part of the research methodology.

Research methodologies are often used by lecturers, researchers, or even students in conducting research.
In making a research methodology it usually consists of the formulation of the problem, a framework
or framework of thinking, then enters the hypothesis section. The formulation of the problem
and the hypothesis can be said to be things that need to exist in making a research methodology because
these two elements complement each other and can explain a topic of the problem to be studied.

Research Methodology According to Experts

Some experts also express the meaning of research methodology. The following is the definition
of research methodology according to experts.

Nawawi

Nawawi said that research methodology is a science about methods, and if compiled it will become a research
methodology, the meaning is a science about methods that can be utilized in conducting various kinds of
research. Research methodology can also be interpreted as a science that functions to explain
and reveal social phenomena and natural phenomena that exist in human life by using work procedures that are
regular, orderly, systematic, and can be used scientifically.

Sugiyono

According to Sugiyono, research methodology is a scientific method used in an effort to find or obtain data for a
specific purpose or use.

Prof. ME Winarno

According to Winarno, research methodology is a scientific activity carried out with systematic techniques.

Muhammad Nasir

Muhammad Nasir said that research methodology is the most important method used by researchers to carry out
research activities.

Muhiddin Sirat

According to Muhiddin Sirat, research methodology is a way or step to determine and select a topic problem that
is intended to be used as a determinant for making a research title.

Based on the understanding of research methodology from experts, it can be said that methodology is a method or
scientific step used for a particular purpose.

Types of Research Methodology

Quoted from several sources, the research methodology is divided into eight, namely qualitative methods,
quantitative methods, descriptive methods, experimental methods, phenomenology, surveys, grounded methods, and
ethnography.

1. Qualitative Method

Qualitative method is a type of research methodology which in its application uses data derived from
research results which are then analyzed. In this case, research results can come from
interviews, filling out questionnaires, and a poll. Therefore, the qualitative method is a
method that comes from the participant’s point of view.

2. Quantitative Method

Quantitative method is a research method whose data source is taken through mathematical samples.
Therefore, the quantitative method is always synonymous with arithmetic and is always related to
numbers.

3. Descriptive Method

The descriptive method is a research method related to writing, especially in making a description.
In other words, this method is a method in the form of language and descriptive sentences.
Even so, in using this method it is also necessary to do research and retrieve valid data
sources.

4. Experimental Method

The experimental method is a research method derived from an experiment. Even so, in using
this method it is also necessary to make observations of the data first. Usually this method is
used to find the cause and effect of a behavior from an observed data

5. Phenomenology

Phenomenology is a research method used to discuss and analyze a particular phenomenon.
Therefore, the data source used in this type of research methodology is an analysis that has been
carried out in previous studies and subjects who have experienced a phenomenon.

6. Survey

Surveys are a type of research methodology used to find out and analyze a behavior in the subject.
In general, the data from this method is in the form of interviews or questionnaires, so that the
resulting data is more often in the form of numbers. Therefore, this method is also often said
if the data is quantitative.

7. Grounded Method

The grounded method is a research methodology that is often used to conduct research or research in the
field of sociology. With this method, the results of sociological research can be clearer, so
that the content is very complex but still easy to understand.

8. Ethnography

Ethnography is a type of research methodology that is more often used in research related to a person’s
social behavior or actions. With this method, researchers will conduct research in detail and
without engineering or you could say it is in accordance with the data that has been obtained.

Benefits of Research Methodology

As previously explained that this research methodology will be used when conducting research.
The research methodology itself has several benefits including:

Benefits of Research Methodology:
Sharpening Research Results

A sharp and in-depth research certainly requires a lot of data sources. Not only are there
many, but the data sources used in research must also be of high quality and related to the topic of the
research problem. The sharper a study indicates that the research is more detailed and
complex.

To be able to produce sharp and in-depth research, it is necessary to create a research methodology.
With this, researchers will find it easier to know the basic things in conducting research.
In other words, without a research methodology, it will be difficult for researchers to conduct or
initiate research, analysis, and even draw conclusions. If it has happened like that, then the
research carried out will be less than optimal.

Research Flow Becomes Clear

The second benefit that can be felt when using research methodology in research is that the research flow
becomes clear. In this case, it can be said that it will be easier for researchers to complete
the research because they already know the steps that need to be done first.

With a clear research flow, the results of the research will be clear or not going anywhere, so that
readers will find it easier to understand a research. Readers who easily understand a research
do not rule out the possibility that the research will be used by readers to conduct research with the same
topic of discussion (development) or with a new topic of discussion.

Can Generate Useful Research

Useful research is research that provides solutions to the topics of the problems that have been
researched. The benefits of this research can be felt by researchers or readers.
However, to be able to produce useful research or research that is solutive, in-depth research is
needed.

The thing that needs to be done to be able to do in-depth research is to carry out research activities in a
systematic way or you could say using a research methodology. Sources of data that come from
valid methodologies and research will be carried out with great care, so that the solutions given to the
topic of research problems do not have gaps and can be utilized.

Research Can Be Accountable

The benefit to be gained from using research methodology is that research results can be accounted for.
This benefit can be obtained because when using a research methodology, the data source is very
valid. In addition, with valid data sources, the results of researchers will be trusted by many
people. In fact, the researchers themselves can also be trusted by many people who can make
quality research.

So, to get a valid data source, a systematic step is needed and that step is in the research methodology.
Therefore, in conducting research, research methodology is often used by researchers so that they
can still produce quality research that can be accounted for.

Can Overcome Limitations

The fifth benefit of research methodology is that it can overcome limitations when conducting research.
In this case, the limitations in question include costs, time, effort, and so on. With
various kinds of limitations that can be overcome, it will be easier for researchers to complete their
research.

Even though it has limitations in research, with methodology, all these limitations can be managed
properly. Therefore, it can be said that research methodology is one way to overcome obstacles
that occur during research. So, never hesitate to create a research methodology when conducting
research.

Those are some of the benefits that can be obtained when using a research methodology. So,
what research methodology have you created?

Research Methodology
Objectives

Quoted from the deepublish publisher’s page, the research methodology objectives are divided into two, namely
general objectives and practical objectives.

General Research Methodology
Objectives

The objectives of the research methodology in general, including:

• Aims to develop existing knowledge.
• To gain knowledge and discoveries that are new or have never been researched on the same research topic.
• To prove as well as test the source of the data used in the research, whether it is valid and can be
  accounted for.
• To get research with an appropriate theoretical basis.

Purpose of Practical Research
Methodology

Practical research methodology objectives, namely:

• Facilitate researchers in completing research.
• Provide support to readers or people in overcoming current problems through research results.
• Advancing science and technology, so that it can provide benefits to society.

Example of Research Methodology

This research was conducted using a qualitative research methodology. Research using
qualitative research methodology aims to be able to reveal social facts in the form of descriptions.
According to Ratna (2007:47) qualitative methods pay attention to natural data, data in relation to
the context of its existence. The scientific ways that drive qualitative research methodology
are considered multi-method because research in turn involves a large number of relevant social
phenomena.

In research of literary works, it will involve the author, the social environment in which the author is
located, including elements of culture in general. In other words, qualitative research
methodologies in the social sciences and humanities have two distinct sources. As stated by
Ratna (2007: 47) in social science the data source is society, research data are actions, while in
literature the data source is manuscript works, research data, as formal data are works, words, sentences,
and discourse.

This research pays more attention to the content of messages contained in a literary work.
Therefore, the author emphasizes how to give meaning to the content of communication, to interpret
the contents of symbolic interactions that occur in communication events in literary works.
Content analysis is a methodology for analyzing content, especially those related to communication.
The content in the content analysis methodology consists of two kinds, namely latent content and
communication content. Latent content is the content as intended by the author, while the
content of communication is the content as manifested in the relationship between the text and the consumer
(Ratna, 2007:48).

Conclusion

With the existence of a research methodology, a research can be more easily completed and can be accounted
for. In fact, with research methodology, researchers can produce research that can provide
benefits to readers or researchers themselves, so that this research can play a role in advancing science
and technology.

Middle school students to college students are certainly familiar with research. Research is presented to train students and students to think scientifically. In writing scientific papers, we must know the hypothesis of the research. So, this hypothesis is the researcher’s preconceived notions of the problem to be studied. But understanding the hypothesis is not this simple.

The hypothesis comes from the Greek words hupo and thesis . Hupo is provisional, while thesis is a statement or theory. It can be concluded that the meaning of the hypothesis is a temporary statement. This is the researcher’s presumption of the research problem. However, this hypothesis is not the truth. Because of preconceived notions, hypotheses can be right or wrong.

The use of hypotheses, for example, is the process of research on the relationship between human habits of throwing garbage and the high amount of waste in Indonesia. Based on the temporary data that you get, the hypothesis that emerges is that human behavior is related to the amount of waste. That is, bad human habits affect the high amount of waste from time to time.

Hypothesis writing cannot be called the truth. Even if you design a hypothesis based on valid and strong data. To prove this hypothesis is true or not, you have to do the research. The results of the research will show whether it is in accordance with the hypothesis or actually produces new findings.

In several opinions, one of them from Zikmunda reveals that a hypothesis is a proposition or conjecture that has not been proven. So, the hypothesis is still tentative. Hypothesis statements only explain phenomena and possible answers to research questions. The real answer is obtained after the research is done.

Suryabrata, a writing expert, provides an explanation of the hypothesis in several ways. technically, a hypothesis is defined as a statement regarding the state of the population to be tested or studied. This study is based on data taken from research samples. Meanwhile, a statistical hypothesis is a statement regarding the state of the parameters tested through statistical samples.

Definition of Research Hypothesis

General Definition of Research Hypothesis

The hypothesis is generally interpreted as a temporary answer (conjecture) of a research problem. The hypothesis is only arranged in the type of inferential research, namely the type of research with a quantitative approach that aims to test. Testing a hypothesis is always through inferential statistical analysis techniques, while descriptive research does not require an explicit hypothesis formulation.

Hypotheses can be prepared by researchers based on a strong theoretical basis and supported by relevant research results. Researchers must understand about the content and how the steps in formulating a research hypothesis.

The formulation of the hypothesis has requirements or characteristics that must be met by the researcher. As for some of the characteristics of the formulation of the hypothesis, according to Soesilo (2015) as follows:

• The hypothesis is stated in a declarative statement , not a question sentence. This statement is the view of researchers based on the results of the study of the theory used.
• Researchers must be consistent (not changeable) about the contents of the hypothesis. Therefore, researchers need to conduct an in-depth study of the theory used in compiling the hypothesis.
• In experimental research, the hypothesis contains statements regarding the effectiveness, difference, or influence of one variable on another. In the hypothesis there are at least two variables studied.
• The hypothesis must be testable ( testable ). In addition to explaining the method (technique) of measuring each variable to be studied, the research methodology section also explains the analytical techniques used to test the research hypothesis.

Definition of Research Hypothesis According to Experts

1. The American Heritage Dictionary

The American Heritage Dictionary defines a research hypothesis as a provisional explanation of a scientific phenomenon that needs to be tested by further research. In other words, from this understanding we can conclude that a scientific hypothesis must be scientifically proven, and vice versa.

2. Kerlinger

Kerlinger wrote that a hypothesis is a statement or conjecture based on two or more variables.

3. Suryabrata

Suryabrata argues that the hypothesis used in quantitative research uses the deduction method. On the other hand, in qualitative research a hypothesis is defined as a temporary conclusion from the results of observations in order to produce a new theory.

4. Erwan Agus Purwanto and Dyah Ratih Sulistyastuti

Erwan Agus Purwanto and Ratih Sulawyastuti argued that a hypothesis is a temporary allegation of problems raised by researchers in conducting research whose existence is still weak. Because it is still weak and not necessarily true, testing is needed.

5. Dantes

More simply, the meaning of the research hypothesis according to Dantes is an assumption that needs to be tested data. Then from testing through research will produce data. This data will be used as a reference for drawing conclusions, sometimes also generate new solutions and discoveries.

6. Fraenkel dan Wallen

Fraenkel and Wallen are more focused on meaning that the type of undirected hypothesis describes research conducted by researchers who do not make predictions, causing unclear directions and will affect the results of the research itself.

Talking about the undirected hypothesis actually includes an alternative hypothesis (Ha). Besides Ha, there is also a null hypothesis (Ho). There are two types of alternative hypotheses, namely directional hypotheses and non -directional hypotheses .

The undirected hypothesis is a hypothesis made by the researcher by explicitly formulating the problem and the researcher has also stated that the independent variable already has an influence on the dependent variable. The so-called undirected hypothesis is a hypothesis that has not been formulated explicitly, and the independent variables do not necessarily have an influence on the dependent variable.

7. Suharsini Arikunto

For those of you who have done research several times, you must be familiar with Suharsini Arikunto. He interpreted the hypothesis not much different from previous opinions. Broadly speaking, a hypothesis is a temporary answer to a problem being investigated by researchers. Until the research is complete, then the hypothesis can be proven through the data obtained and collected, whether it is appropriate or not.

8. Sigismund

Zikmund defines a hypothesis as a proposition (conjecture) that has not been proven. In other words, the alleged statement is still tentative (temporary). To explain it requires facts or phenomena (research studies) that allow answers to these propositions.

9. Sudjana

The definition of research hypothesis according to Sudjana is a temporary assumption (allegation) of something that is made. Generally, this assumption is made to explain something that requires confirmation or checking.

10. Sugiyono

Sugiyono interprets the hypothesis as a temporary answer made based on the research problem formulation that has been determined by the researcher. Writing the formulation of the problem is packaged in the form of a question. The hypothesis is said to be temporary because the conjecture is based on theory, so hypothesis testing is needed.

Types of Hypotheses

In inferential research, especially in correlation and comparative research, hypotheses are classified into two, namely hypotheses without direction which are also called two-way hypotheses and unidirectional hypotheses, as explained below.

1. Directionless Hypothesis (Two Way)

A directionless hypothesis is a formulation (sentence) of a hypothesis that contains statements only regarding a relationship or only a difference, without explaining the direction of the relationship between the variables studied, for example, positive (+) or negative (-) directions. For example, the directionless hypothesis “There is a significant relationship between Learning Motivation and Student Achievement”. In this example, the direction of the relationship (whether towards a positive or negative relationship) between the variables of learning motivation and student achievement is not explained.

Another example, the hypothesis that reads “There are significant differences in student achievement based on learning motivation”. This hypothesis also does not include an explanation of which learning motivation has high learning achievement.

2. Unidirectional Hypothesis

The unidirectional hypothesis is generally structured as a statement indicating the direction of the relationship or difference of the two variables studied; direction reflects a positive or negative relationship. For example, the research hypothesis “The higher the student’s learning motivation, followed by the higher the student’s achievement”; indicates the direction of a positive relationship. Another example “The higher the self-concept, followed by the lower the student’s aggressiveness”; which indicates that there is a negative relationship.

How to Develop a Hypothesis

It should be understood that research hypothesis formulations do not “fall from the sky” or appear suddenly without being based on a theory or scientific study. The research hypothesis is not formulated simply by following the assumptions or assumptions of the researcher, even though the researcher’s assumptions can be a starting point in theoretical studies and predictions of future research results. So, the formulated hypothesis does not just follow the assumptions or assumptions of the researcher, but originates from the elaboration of the theoretical basis previously prepared.

The theory links the existence of the independent variable with the dependent variable. Therefore, theoretical analysis and relevant research findings serve to explain the problem and establish predictions about the answers to the research questions.

As stated by Azwar (1999), that in formulating a hypothesis, there are two ways. The first way is to read and review (review) the theories or concepts that discuss the research variables and their relationships. This method is often referred to as a deductive thinking process. The second way is to read and review the results or findings of previous studies that are relevant to the research problem.

This is known as an inductive thinking process. After reviewing the theories and research findings, researchers can formulate research hypotheses. The results of the theoretical study as well as the findings of the research results are an important provision (foundation) for researchers in preparing their hypotheses. Therefore, in general, the hypothesis is placed after the researcher examines the theories, concepts and research findings, namely at the end of chapter II of a research report.

The hypothesis must be tested for validity through statistical tests using appropriate analytical techniques. The hypothesis that has been prepared needs to be verified using advanced statistical analysis techniques. The choice of statistical analysis technique depends on several things, namely the type of research, research objectives and the type of data scale on each variable.

In the formulation of the hypothesis statistically expressed through symbols. There are two kinds of hypotheses, namely
the null hypothesis (Ho) and the alternative hypothesis (Ha), which are always written in pairs. If one is rejected, the other must be accepted, so that a firm decision can be made, that is, if H0 is rejected, Ha will be accepted. By pairing it, a firm decision can be made, which one is accepted and which one is rejected.

Below is an example of a statement that can be formulated as a statistical hypothesis:

1. In an experimental study entitled “The effect of traditional learning models on students’ pro-social abilities”, the formulation of the statistical hypothesis is structured as follows: Ho : There is
   no effect of traditional learning models on students’ pro-social abilities
   Ha : There is an influence of traditional learning models on pro-social abilities -Social students
2. In the experimental research entitled “Effectiveness of BK Services on Increasing Student Confidence”, the formulation of the statistical hypothesis is structured as follows:
   Ho: BK services are not effective in increasing student self-confidence
   Ha: BK services are effective in increasing student self-confidence

Proof of Research Hypothesis

In inferential research that has to test a hypothesis, including experimental research, proving a hypothesis is always related to the term significance. An understanding of the significance level is very important in the use of statistical methods to test hypotheses. This is due to the fact that inferential research conclusions are always based on statistical decisions, which cannot be supported by one hundred percent absolute confidence level.

In inferential research, researchers always use probability, namely the possibility of error in rejecting or accepting a hypothesis. In analyzes that use statistics, the significance level (sig) is often given the symbol p or the symbol alpha (α) expressed in a proportion or percentage, which means the magnitude of the probability of
error.

According to the consensus of statisticians, the highest acceptable error probability is 0.05 or 5%; means that the chance of error is 5%, meaning an error of 5 out of 100 events. Conversely, this also means that the confidence level is 100-5 = 95% or 0.95. In social research, especially in the field of education, the significance level is generally measured from a p of 1%, or 5%.

When conducting research analysis, the researcher especially needs to read (interpret) the results of Sig (p), and then read the value (score) of r (correlation coefficient). Whereas in the different test study, after the researcher read the sig results, followed by the t score (t-test results), or F (Anova results), and the r square score (r2).

It should be emphasized again that the significance of the research results (probability of error) is referred to from the level of significance (p or sig) found. In the research analysis, the distribution of the probability of error (sig) is divided into three groups, namely:

1. p <0.01, then the correlation or difference is stated to be very significant. Thus the hypothesis is accepted!
2. p <0.050 (between 0.011 – 0.050), then the correlation or difference is stated to be significant. Thus the hypothesis is accepted!
3. P > 0.05, then the correlation or difference is stated to be non-significant (not significant). Thus the hypothesis is rejected!

For example, experimental research on the Effect of Assignment Learning Models on Student Learning Motivation, which produces sig = 0.089, and the magnitude of r square is 0.061. This means that in this study there was no significant effect of the assignment learning model on student learning motivation. Thus, the hypothesis which reads “Assignment Learning Model influences Student Learning Motivation” is rejected. The effective contribution of the assignment learning model to the existence of student learning motivation appears to be low, namely only 6.1%.

There are differences in proving (testing) hypotheses in inferential research (including experimental research) and action research. Proving the hypothesis in inferential research always uses statistical tests, as described above. Acceptance or rejection of a hypothesis is assessed from the results of its significance score. If the significance score obtained is more than 0.050 then the research hypothesis is not significant or is rejected. Whereas in action research, hypothesis testing is assessed from the results of each action compared to the formulation of the research achievement indicators.

Thus, in action research researchers need to formulate indicators of achievement. If the results of the action have exceeded the achievement indicators, the research is proven to have succeeded in achieving its objectives.

 

Research Instruments – When writing scientific papers, research instruments are a part that cannot be missed. You will not be able to do research without determining the instrument first. For this reason, understanding research instruments is very important in the process of writing scientific papers such as theses, theses, dissertations, or research reports.

Given the importance of research instruments, you should study them too. The reason is, as a student or researcher you will often write scientific papers. Automatically, you will also do research. Well, when researching something, you have to make instruments. In order for the process of writing scientific papers and determining instruments to run well, you should first pay attention to the following reviews.

Definition of Research Instruments

In general, research instruments are tools used to obtain research data. Without instruments, you will not be able to collect the data needed in research. If the data is not available, the research will not be carried out.

It should not be arbitrary, there is a separate way when determining the research instrument. As is known, research is scientific in nature, so the instrument must be measured and tested scientifically. If not, the research can be questioned and simply broken.

Basically, qualitative and quantitative research instruments are different. However, before discussing the differences between the two, it is better to look at the meaning of the instrument according to the experts below. The definitions below will give you an idea of ​​the research instrument.

1. Suharsimi Arikunto

Research instruments are tools used by researchers when collecting data. The goal is to make research more systematic and easy.

2. Ibn Hajar

The research instrument is a measuring tool used to obtain quantitative information that contains objective and character variables. The data or information in question includes:

• Quantitative data, namely the type of data related to the amount or quantity in the form of numbers, so that the data is counted and symbolized in the form of certain measurements.
• Qualitative data, namely the type of data related to quality values, for example very good, good, moderate, good, sufficient, lacking, and so on.
• Nominal data, ordinal data, and interval or ratio data.
• Primary data or secondary data.

3. Suryabrata

The research instrument is a tool used to record the state or activity of psychological attributes. The term psychological attribute is indeed less familiar to the layman. These attributes are divided into two, namely cognitive attributes and non-cognitive attributes. Cognitive attributes are associated with questions, while non-cognitive attributes are associated with statements.

4. Notoatmodjo

Research instruments are the tools used to obtain or collect data. This can be done by using questionnaires, observation forms, other forms related to data recording, and others.

5. Sugiono

Instruments in research are tools used by researchers to measure social and natural phenomena as they exist in research variables.

6. Sukmadinata

The instrument in the research is a test that has the characteristics of being able to measure informants through a number of questions in the research.

7. Sanjaya

Instruments in research are tools used in data collection activities and research information. According to him, research activities are measurement activities, so they must use valid and good measuring instruments.

Some of the experts above do have different views. However, from the various definitions according to these experts you can find similarities. The various meanings and definitions are expected to make you able to better understand the meaning and function.

Well, how about you guys? After seeing some of these definitions, you can take the general definition right? In simple terms, instruments in research can be interpreted as tools or methods used in data collection.

As previously mentioned, quantitative research instruments and qualitative research instruments are not the same. In qualitative research, the data collection instrument is the researcher himself. That is, researchers who observe, ask, hear, and retrieve research data.

Researchers are required to obtain valid data, so that the data obtained is not arbitrary or can be accounted for. For this reason, the condition of the information must be clear and in accordance with the needs. This needs to be done so that the data collected can be recognized as true.

Meanwhile, the data obtained in quantitative research is usually by using a questionnaire or questionnaire. The data is quantified so that it can be processed statistically. If the data obtained deviates from statistical provisions, it can be ignored. Broadly speaking, the difference between the two lies in the type of data obtained. Qualitative data is in the nature of statements, while quantitative data is in the form of numbers or symbols that can be processed statistically.

Functions of Research Instruments

Research instruments have a very important function in the research process, which is used as a tool in collecting data needed in a study. With the existence of research instruments, it will know the data resources to be examined and the types of data, data collection techniques, data collection instruments, the steps for preparing the research instruments and knowing the validity, reliability, level of difficulty of differentiating power, and distractors of data in research. .

A good instrument has certain criteria in research, so as to produce good quality research data as well. Vice versa, instruments that do not have good criteria in research will produce poor research data quality as well.

It is often found that research data do not match the expected results. This is caused by a discrepancy between the theory used as a basis and the instruments used to measure variable characteristics. In order for the research instrument to carry out its functions properly, the instrument must be prepared according to the theory used in the research.

The research instrument is derived from the theories raised in the research. Therefore, the selection of the theoretical basis is to really consider the characteristics of the research variable data to be studied. Instruments derived from the theory used will produce data in accordance with the basic concepts outlined in the theory.

Types of Research Instruments

There are several types of research instruments that are usually used by researchers. This instrument can be used for research and writing scientific papers such as theses, theses, dissertations, reports, and so on. Research instruments are also used for qualitative research and quantitative research.

The following are some of the research instruments:

1. Questionnaire

What is a questionnaire? Questionnaire is an instrument that contains a list of questions. Usually used to collect research data from respondents. The questionnaire contains a series of questions that are structured and not. If the questionnaire is wrong, the research results will also be wrong. For this reason, the questionnaire must be formed and designed in a valid, reliable, and not fake. This is done so that the data obtained can be validated.

According to Popoola, a good questionnaire has criteria, namely:

• Questions should not be ambiguous and should have one interpretation.
• Questions should be easy to understand.
• Questions must be able to have a precise answer.
• Questions should not contain words that are not clear in meaning.
• Questions should not require strict calculations.
• The questions do not require the respondent to decide on a classification.
• Questions should not trigger biased answers.
• Questionnaires should not be too long.
• Questions are not too wordy.
• The questionnaire must include the right object.

When compared with other types of instruments, the questionnaire has the advantage of hiding the personal data of the respondent; so the respondent can be anonymous. The data collected can be large in a relatively short time.

It’s just that, kueseiner was not free from weaknesses. Sometimes some of the questions in the questionnaire are confusing and cannot be classified. This is because the researcher is not in place to explain questions that are difficult for the respondent.

2. Interview

Interviews are one of the research instruments that are often used for qualitative research. In interviews, researchers collect information from respondents through verbal interaction. Previously the researcher prepared a list of structured questions related to research. The researcher then met with the resource persons and asked questions.

Tools and equipment that can be used during the interview period are tape recorders, paper, pens, laptops, and others. Interviews can be conducted in person or by telephone or electronic mail system (e-mail).

The main advantage of the interview method is that it produces a high response rate. In addition, the interviews were more representative of the entire study population. In addition, the personal contact between the researcher and the respondent allows the researcher to explain confusing and ambiguous questions in detail.

Just like the questionnaire, the interview was not without its weaknesses. This instrument has a weakness, namely the number of sources reached is not large due to limited time and research staff.

3. Observation

The next type of instrument is observation. This method is used by a researcher to observe individual behavior or situation. So far, there are two types of observation, namely participant observation and non-participant observation. In participant observation, the researcher is a member of the group to be observed.

Accurate and timely results will be obtained by researchers, but sometimes have problems with bias. Whereas in non-participant observation, the researcher is not a member of the group to be observed. So the results are more feasible because they are free from bias but have problems with imprecision and delayed results.

The advantages of the observation method are that it is more flexible and cheaper to run. This method requires less active cooperation than observed and the results can be relied upon for research activities. However, Akinade & Owolabi emphasized that the observation method is a popular tool in research, especially in the behavioral and social sciences.

This method requires specific skills to make and evaluate behavioral observations in research. When observing behavior, the first thing you should do is develop a category of behavior (coding scheme). This method involves identifying specific attributes that will provide clues to the problem at hand.

4. Focus Group Discussion (Focus Group Discussion)

Have you ever had an FGD? Yes, the research instrument in the form of this discussion can also be used to obtain data. This data collection instrument allows the researcher to obtain data from a large group of people at the same time. This method is different from the interview method.

If in the interview method the researcher focuses on one person at a time, then in the focus group discussion method, the researcher obtains data from a large number of people for his research activities. Usually the focus group discussion method is very popular when conducting research related to behavioral (behaviour), library and information science, archival science, records and information technology.

In the FGD, a researcher must identify key informants who can be contacted. The goal is to obtain proper information about the variables studied in the study. This approach is used to produce qualitative research data in explaining a phenomenon that is being researched or investigated.

Another condition, FDG membership may not be more than 10 people. It is like a mini-conference, where group members can gather in a conducive location. Before carrying out the FGD, the researcher must first obtain consent from the participants. In addition, the researcher must design an FGD guide which usually contains an outline to capture the variables of interest.

The main advantage of this method is that it adds credibility and originality to research activities. Meanwhile, the challenges of the FGD method include too much cost to do, too much time to do, and some respondents may not be free to contribute.

5. Experiment or Trial

The next type of data collection is experimentation. This method takes place in both pure and applied science research. So the researchers conducted several experiments in a laboratory setting to test some of the reactions that might occur in the object of study.

The advantage of the experimental method is that it produces direct data, the results are persistent and error-free if it is carried out properly under normal conditions or circumstances. The downside is that it is quite expensive. When in laboratory studies the chemicals used can cause permanent damage if they are handled carelessly.

6. Test

Tests can be in the form of a series of questions, exercises, worksheets and so on which have the purpose of measuring skills, intelligence, abilities and talents possessed by an individual or group that is the subject of research.

The test can later be in the form of standardized questions that require research subjects to answer them in order to obtain certain results. Examples include personality tests, talent interest tests, academic potential tests, achievement tests, and so on.

7. Multilevel Scale

A multilevel scale is also called a rating, which is an objective measure that is made scalable or multilevel. This instrument makes it easy for researchers to provide an overview of appearance which can then indicate the frequency of appearance of certain traits.

This instrument is also useful for obtaining a quantitative description of certain aspects of an item in the form of an ordinal scale such as very good, good, moderate, not good, and very bad.

8 . Documentation of Research Instruments

Documentation refers to written items. This instrument allows researchers to obtain data through research on written objects, such as books, magazines, diaries, artifacts, videos and so on. This instrument was developed in research with a content analysis approach. Therefore, it is usually used in research such as historical evidence, the legal basis for a regulation, and so on.

Examples of Research Instruments

This example is in the form of an interview method. Before collecting data, researchers must prepare a list of questions as below.

Appendix 1. Interview Draft (Research Instrument)

Researchers have a role as an instrument of data collection. In collecting the data, assistive devices were also used. The tool used is an interview guide (interview guide). In this case, the researcher conducted interviews with Mr. H. Abu Bakar as the manager of the Manba’ul ‘Ulum Islamic Boarding School Cooperative and Nina Zuliani as bookkeeper. The interview draft used is as follows:

Draft Interview for Mr H. Abu Bakar

• Regarding the financing products available at the Manba’ul ‘Ulum Islamic Boarding School Cooperative, which profit-sharing financing can dominate all existing financing?
• What is the process of doing mudharabah financing at the Manba’ul ‘Ulum Islamic Boarding School Cooperative?
• What is the intent and purpose of applying the concept of mudharabah ?
• What is the target market for mudharabah distribution ?
• What type of financing (business) is financed by mudharabah financing ?
• What policies are taken to avoid the risk of mudharabah financing ?
• What is the profit sharing system for mudharabah financing ? Is it different for each type of business, and will the financing period also affect the profit sharing of the business?
• When calculating margin distribution, is it in percentage or nominal form?
• What is the system and procedure for payment and settlement of mudharabah financing ?
• During the implementation of the mudharabah concept , what obstacles were sufficient to impede the implementation process?

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Research Design – Does Sinaumed’s know that before we do research in any field, be it literature, linguistics, science, to law, we also need a research design. Similar to working on a work of art, research must also be preceded by compiling a research design first. This was done so that the research results did not deviate and were in accordance with existing guidelines.

All types of research must have their own research design, so Sinaumed’s cannot and should not just pick one research design to use in other types of research. However, it should also be noted that to implement a research design one must also pay attention to its compatibility with the research variables. So what exactly is research design? What are the types of research designs that can be used for a study?

So, so that Sinaumed’s can carry out research properly and correctly, let’s look at the description of the definition of research design and matters relating to it.

Definition of Research Design

Before discussing what research design is, it would be better if Sinaumed’s understood the meaning of one word at a time. According to KBBI (Big Indonesian Dictionary) the word ” design ” itself means ” framework ” or ” design “. While the word ” research ” means “activities of collecting, processing, analyzing, and presenting data that are carried out systematically and objectively to solve a problem or test a hypothesis to develop general principles” .

So, from the translation of the meaning of each word, it can be concluded that the research design is the design of activities for collecting, processing, analyzing, and presenting data that is carried out systematically and objectively; to solve a problem or test a hypothesis. In short, the definition of this research design is a form of research design that is structured in such a way as to guide researchers in their efforts to obtain answers to their research questions. The design of this research is not the same as trying to determine the results of the research, but is more directed at efforts to narrow down the possible results.

These research questions cover many things, starting from an explanation of what the problem will be researched, why the problem must be researched, to how the problem can be researched in order to get results that are useful for society.

Questions that Assist the Preparation of Research Design

In an effort to develop a research design, it is better to use guidelines for questions related to research variables. Not only that, the division of chapters in the research can also be used as a guide for the questions. So here are some examples of questions that can help Sinaumed’s in compiling a research design:

Matters Relating to the Problem Formulation Chapter

• What are the main problems that require research?
• What is the purpose of conducting research?
• Can data be obtained and how?
• Was the researcher able to carry out the research in terms of cost, effort, time, and theoretical background?
• Is it easy to obtain research permits, especially from related parties?
• Do you still need to do a preliminary study?

Matters Relating to The Theoretical Review Chapter

• What theories can support the research?
• Where do these supporting theories come from?
• Is there any previous research that is relevant to this research?
• What is the form of the framework of this research?

Matters Relating to Hypothesis Formulation

• Does this research require a hypothesis?
• What is the basis used in formulating the hypothesis?
• What form of hypothesis will be formulated?

Matters Relating to Determination of Variables and Data Sources

• What variables will be examined?
• Where will the data source be obtained?

Matters Relating to the Data Collection Chapter

• What data must be collected?
• What form of instrument to collect data?
• Who will collect the data?
• What is the total cost in the data collection process?
• How much labor is required to collect data?
• What are the procedures that must be met in an effort to collect data?

Matters Relating to Data Analysis and Interpretation

• What is the format for data tabulation?
• Who will do the data tabulation?
• How long does the data tabulation process take?
• What analysis tools will be used?
• What software will be used for the data analysis process?

Matters Relating to Conclusions and Suggestions

• How do you convey the conclusion?
• For whom will the advice be given?
• Is the delivery of advice in a general or specific form?

Matters Relating to Research Design

• What is the design problem formulation?
• What is the theoretical basis of the design?
• How is the design of the formulation of the hypothesis?
• What is the scale of measurement?

Research Design Function

1. Testing the Research Hypothesis

In this case, the research design is more directed at appropriate statistical analysis techniques to test hypotheses as well as answer the problems discussed in the study. Not only that, the research design also serves to determine the conclusion.

2. Controlling VS (Secondary Variables)

The research design will later direct about how to minimize the variables outside the secondary variables.

3. As a Handbook for Researchers

In this case, the research design can provide clearer guidelines or guidelines, especially for researchers when conducting a study. Like building a house, we certainly need a design that includes the shape, size, materials, time of execution, and the costs that will be required. So, when you want to do a research, you have to be prepared in such a way.

When preparing a research design, there are several things that researchers must pay attention to, namely:

• Target population
• Selected sampling method
• Sampling size
• Data collection procedures
• How to analyze data after the data is collected
• Whether or not to use statistics
• How to draw conclusions

4. To Determine Research Boundaries

Research design can also serve to define research boundaries that are closely related to objectives. If the objectives are not formulated clearly, then the research also seems to have no end. Now, with the formulation of clear objectives, the preparation of research designs will also be easier because researchers can focus their attention towards more effective goals.

5. As an illustration of the difficulties that may be encountered

Research design can also serve to provide an idea of ​​what difficulties researchers might face. So, through this research design, the researcher will be able to think of ways to overcome the difficulties or problems that will be encountered.

Research Design Classification

The grouping or classification of the research design varies when viewed from various perspectives, starting from the method of data collection, according to its purpose, to the point of view of controlling the variables carried out by the researcher.

So, here is the classification of the research design.

Based on the problem formulation

1. Explorative Research
2. Hypothesis Testing Research

Based on Data Collection Method

1. Observational Research
2. Survey Research

Based On Variable Control

1. Experimental Research
2. Ex Post Facto Research

Based on Purpose

1. Descriptive Research
2. Comparative Research
3. Associative Research

Based on the Time Dimension

1. Time Series Research
2. Cross Sectional Research

Based On Study Environment

1. Field Study
2. Field Experiments
3. Laboratory Experiments

Based on Number of Contacts

1. Cross-Sectional Research
2. Research Before and After
3. Longitudinal Research

Based on Referral Time

1. Retrospective Research
2. Prospective Research
3. Mixed Research

Based on Investigation Characteristics

1. Experimental Research
2. Non-Experimental Research
3. Semi-Experimental Research

Forms of Research Design

The form of this research design is almost related to the classification of research designs. So here are some explanations about the forms of research design based on their classification.

1. Survey Research Design

Survey research is conducted for the purpose of gathering information about a large population of people, by conducting interviews with a small number of the population. This survey research can be used in an exploratory, descriptive, or experimental research. In order to obtain information or answers regarding the issues to be discussed in this study, not only interview techniques can be used, but also questionnaires, observation, or a combination of several existing techniques.

The following are the strengths and weaknesses of the survey research design.

No.	Advantages of Survey Research Design	Disadvantages of Survey Research Design
1.	Involve a large number of people if using the right data collection techniques, the results will be accountable.	The answers from the target population are often not in-depth.
2.	Explorative nature	Opinions expressed by this population of people can change in a short time.
3.	Having official “evidence” for the answers of a large number of people.	There is no guarantee that the entire population will answer the questionnaire, because it is only a sample.
4.	If the data collection technique uses an online questionnaire, the cost range is much cheaper.	–

2. Cross-Sectional Research Design

This research design is often also known as a one-shot study or case study, which is mostly used in research in the social field. This cross-sectional research design aims to find an occurrence of a phenomenon, situation, problem, behavior, or social issue that occurs in a population.

The research design is very simple, because the researcher only determines what to find in the problem, identifies the population, selects the sample, and makes contact with the respondents in order to obtain the required information at a certain time. Unfortunately, this research design has the disadvantage of not having the ability to explain the possibility of changes in conditions or the relationship of the population being investigated in different time periods. Since this research design cannot measure or explain changes in the population, so if you want to do this, you need at least two points in time for the same population.

3. Research Design Before and After ( Pre-Test and Post-Test Design )

In this research design, it can be described as data collection on the existence of a set of cross-sectional studies of the same population in order to obtain answers to changes in phenomena that occur between two points in time. This change is measured by comparing the differences in phenomena or variables that occur before and after the intervention treatment.

This research design also has advantages and disadvantages. In terms of advantages, it can be used to measure changes in situations, phenomena, issues, behaviors, and problems that occur within a community group at two different points. This before and after research design is usually used in research related to the effectiveness of a program in society.

The drawbacks in this study design varied, ranging from the possibility of expensive research costs, the existence of changes in the population at these two points in time, to the existence of reactive effects and regression effects on the answers given by the population.

4. Longitudinal Research Design

If the research design before and after that cannot explain the pattern of changes that have occurred, then this longitudinal research design can be used to determine the pattern of these changes, especially those related to time. In this research design, population studies are carried out repeatedly or periodically, especially at certain time intervals.

The drawback of this longitudinal research design is the occurrence of a conditioning effect, which describes a situation where the same respondent will be surveyed repeatedly, so that the respondent already knows the answer and the expectation of the answer from the researcher, which in turn causes the respondent to respond to questions without thinking and potentially will give an answer. which is always the same.

Even so, this research design also has the advantage of enabling researchers to determine patterns of change and obtain factual information on an ongoing basis.

5. Retrospective Research Design

In this research design will tend to observe or investigate a phenomenon, problem, or issue that occurred in the past. Usually in this study, researchers will ask respondents to answer questions (interviews) to explore the events or phenomena that occur. This research design is suitable for research in the fields of history or sociology.

6. Prospective Research Design

This research design is more inclined to research on the occurrence of a phenomenon, situation, problem, behavior, or the impact of a phenomenon in the future. In contrast to the retrospective research design that…

Since the phenomenon to be studied occurs in the future, this research must wait for a treatment that has an impact or influence on a population.

7. Mixed Research Design

The mix in this research design is a combination of retrospective and prospective which focuses on studying the pattern of a phenomenon in the past and observing it for the future.

So, that’s a review of what research design is and its forms that Sinaumed’s can apply in research. However, it should be noted that before compiling this research design, it must first be matched with existing research variables.

 

Source: 

Hamdani, Mohammad Ir. Research Design . www.istn.ac.id

Also Read!

• Classification of Types of Research Methods
• Methods and Steps of Geographical Research
• Definition and Development Research Functions
• Understanding the Types of Research
• Data Collection Techniques in Research Designs
• Proper and Correct Use of Commas
• Understanding and Language Rules in Proposal Systematics
• History and Development of the Internet in Indonesia
• Explanation of History as Art

Examples of Renewable Natural Resources – At school, usually in Social Sciences (Social Studies) subjects they often alluded to Natural Resources (Natural Resources). So, does Sinaumed’s still remember what the definition and examples of natural resources are?

Come on, let’s look at the following explanation!

Definition of Natural Resources

Natural resources are all contents contained in the biosphere of this planet earth, both in the lithosphere (soil), hydrosphere (water), and atmosphere (air) which can be used as a potential source of energy so that it can be useful to meet the needs of human life.

So that these natural resources can also be referred to as natural wealth in the form of inanimate objects and living things on this planet and can be used to meet human needs.

Meanwhile, according to Alen (in Rinjani, 2007) SDA (Natural Resources) can be divided based on the recovery process into three classifications, namely:

• Natural resources that cannot be exhausted ( inexhaustible natural resources ), for example air, solar energy, and rainwater.
• Natural resources that can be replaced or renewed ( renewable resources ), for example water in rivers, soil quality, forests and wildlife.
• Non-renewable natural resources , for example coal, oil and metals.

This is also stated in the following book entitled Geography Encyclopedia: Natural Resources by Giyarto

Definition of Renewable Natural Resources

Renewable natural resources are natural resources that will never run out. This can be caused by an ongoing renewal cycle, for example the presence of water which is always there because of the hydrological cycle.

Even though this renewable natural resource is said to never run out, we as humans must also consider its existence so that we have an obligation to maintain it according to its use.

Renewable natural resources include water, soil, plants and animals. As previously explained, natural resources must be preserved so as not to damage the balance of the ecosystem.

Classification of Renewable Natural Resources

The natural resources found on this planet, both renewable and non-renewable, are natural resources that can be utilized for human needs.

Renewable natural resources are so called because they are reformed in a relatively short period of time. This type of natural resource has two ways of recycling, namely:

1. Renewal by reproduction

This reproduction process only occurs in renewable natural resources. However, don’t underestimate it even though it can add up in a short time. If the management is not right, this type of natural resource may become extinct in the future.

For example: animals. Both reproduce by giving birth or laying eggs.

2. Renewal with a cycle

In some natural resources, such as water and air, they undergo a rotating process or commonly known as a cycle. This cycle process is also only found in renewable natural resources.

However, there are several things that can reduce the quality and quantity of these renewable natural resources, namely:

• Air pollution (decreased quality of the atmosphere)
• Deforestation (decreased quality and quantity of groundwater)

This is also written in the following book entitled Management of Marine & Forest Resources: Perspectives, Policy by Robert Siburian and Masyhuri Imron.

Benefits and Examples of Renewable Natural Resources

Economically, the existence of this renewable natural resource can be used as a trade staple. The process of economic growth can be balanced with the level of welfare of the people.

Natural Resources (SDA) that are spread in our country have a very large amount, especially natural resources that can be renewed. For example: chickens, cows, rice plants that can be used as rice, fish, and others. At the level of people’s welfare, the existence of this renewable natural resource can be used as a staple food.

Utilization of renewable natural resources includes agriculture, forestry, plantation, fishery and mining.

1. People’s Agriculture is agriculture managed by the general public using narrow land and little yield. This type of land usually uses food crops, such as paddy fields, farming, dry land, and farming as well as yard plants. Examples of types of food crops are rice, corn, soybeans, sago, and others.

2. Plantation Agriculture is an agricultural activity that prioritizes trade agriculture and is managed by individuals and a certain institution with large capital and ample land. The types of plants commonly used in plantation agriculture are rubber, coconut, tea, sugar cane and oil palm.

3. Fishing activity is an activity to cultivate fish, both land fishery and sea fishery. These cultivation activities can be carried out by nurturing, sowing seeds, catching fish and developing them. Examples are catfish, mujaher fish, carp, and others.

4. Animal Husbandry is an activity of the community that maintains and breeds animals to meet their needs. Livestock in Indonesia are grouped into large animal farms, small animal farms and poultry farms.

Renewable Natural Resources (SDA) can actually be used directly in human daily life. Natural resources in the form of plants are examples of biological natural resources which have a large number and diversity. Utilization of natural resources in the form of plants can be used as food, clothing, processed materials, even medicines.

Source of carbohydrates	Source of fat	Source of protein	Source of vitamins

https://sourcebelajar.belajar.kemdikbud.go.id/

Apart from being a food ingredient, natural resources in the form of plants can also be used as clothing materials or as tools for everyday household needs, for example doormats.

Does Sinaumed’s know that clothing can have a high price value because it is made from special natural resources? An example is clothes made of cotton.

Fibers derived from certain plants can be used as the main ingredient in the manufacture of clothing and produce high price values. This certainly can improve the standard of living of the people who make it.

Then, there is a renewable natural resource in the form of wood. Considering that the territory of Indonesia is a country that has a lot of tropical forests, the presence of wood will be easy to find. Forest products in the form of wood, rattan, and pine can be used as household furniture which produce high price values, you know~

Natural resources in the form of rattan originating from Kalimantan, Sumatra and Sulawesi can be used as the main material for making chairs, tables, even today rattan basket hampers are being loved by young people.

Apart from rattan, natural resources in the form of pine originating from North Sumatra can be used as the main material for making paper and matchsticks.

Furthermore, natural plant resources can be used as the main ingredients for making medicines. Plants that are commonly used as medicinal ingredients are better known as live pharmacies. Examples of plants that are often used as medicinal ingredients are cat’s whiskers, ginger, turmeric, temulawak, and rosella flowers.

The use of Rosella flowers as the main ingredient in medicines is a smart step in utilizing natural resources. Rosella flowers are known to contain quite a lot of nutrients and nutrients so they are good for human health. This rosella flower is considered to be able to cure pain and is useful as an antiseptic.

Efforts to Manage the Environment

The existence of natural resources certainly determines the daily human activities. Simply put, we certainly cannot live without air and water. However, on the other hand, there are also several human activities that greatly affect the existence of resources and the surrounding environment.

Why do we have to manage the environment, huh?

So, here are the objectives of the environmental management process. Let’s see!

• Obtain safety relationship between human and environment
• control the wise use of resources
• realizing Indonesian people as builders of the environment
• carry out environmentally sound development for present or future generations
• protect the country from activities outside the country that have the potential to cause environmental damage and pollution.

Often we encounter events of pollution and environmental damage caused by human actions, such as air pollution, water pollution, soil pollution. forest destruction, and others.

If we as Indonesians are reluctant to properly manage natural resources, it is not impossible that in the future there will be many environmental crises. This situation can certainly affect our economic development.

The following are examples of environmental crises that are often caused by irresponsible human activities:

• Flood

Floods can occur due to several reasons, one of which is the reduction of green areas for water retention. The process of deforestation, littering, and lack of catchment areas are some examples of inconsequential human activities that cause flooding to occur at any time.

Floods certainly have an impact on human survival, such as health problems. skin diseases, decreased food productivity, and others.

• Landslide

Landslide is an event where land is eroded by rainwater due to reduced water-holding soil. This event can certainly have an impact on damage to homes in the community, disrupt the economy and transportation.

Then, what efforts have been made to manage and preserve these natural resources so that they can be maintained properly?

1. Government Efforts

The government is obliged to foster and develop public awareness regarding the importance of protecting, caring for and preserving natural resources and the environment. These efforts can take the form of counseling. guidance, education, and research.

The law even regulates environmental management rules, namely:

• Law No. 32 of 2009 concerning Environmental Protection and Management
• Law No. 23 of 2014 concerning Regional Government

These efforts are openly made so that our society is aware of preserving the environment. In addition, so that our society can also play an active role in efforts to improve the environment.

If our environment is maintained, it will go hand in hand with the increasing quality of natural resources that we often use in our daily lives.

2. Government and Community Efforts

Some of the efforts made by the government in the process of managing and preserving the environment have received support and responses from the wider community. These efforts are as follows,

a. Air conservation efforts

• Develop efforts to reforest the land by planting trees
• Prevent forest fires and field systems that have the potential to cause haze
• Requires the construction of a chimney in the factory that functions as a smoke filter
• Stop the operation of motorized vehicles that have excessive gas/smoke exhaust

b. Forest conservation efforts

• Reforestation
• Maintain protected forests and wildlife reserves
• When cutting down trees, it is best to replant them with new tree seedlings

c. Marine and Beach Preservation Efforts

• prevent spillage of crude oil into the oceans as it can be lethal to sea creatures
• prohibit dumping of waste into the sea
• Cultivating mangroves on the beach
• Prohibit the use of explosives in fishing

d. Efforts to Preserve Flora and Fauna

• Maintain nature reserves to protect rare plants
• Maintain wildlife sanctuary to protect endangered animals
• Cultivating compassion for endangered animals and plants to the community
• Prohibiting the hunting of endangered species by giving the law

Sinaumed’s can find these efforts in the following book entitled The Economics of Human Resources: In the Perspective of Development, the Revised Edition by Mulyadi Subri.

• Differences in Weather, Climate and Seasons
• Why is the Sun Called the Biggest Source of Energy on Earth?
• Definition of Energy and Forms of Energy
• How Do Rainbows Appear? Here’s the theory
• 4 Types of Clouds, Examples and Processes

Refraction of light is – Maybe you have heard a glimpse of the explanation of the refraction of light. Usually when I was at school, learning material about light refraction was indeed taught.

Rainbow is one example of a natural event that can occur as a result of light refraction. Simply put, refraction of light is an event of deflection of the direction of light when it passes through two substances or mediums. Which when this process occurs there is also a different optical speed of light.

Refraction of light can also occur due to the speed of light when it enters a different medium. Because this can make the speed of light change and cause light waves to bend.

The light that was in the air will enter the water and can make the light bend. This bending event of light entering a different medium is often referred to as refraction or reflection.

There are many other interesting things about light refraction. Now for those of you who want to know more about light refraction. You can really read reviews about light refraction in this article.

Definition of Refraction of Light

The first thing we will learn together is the meaning of light refraction. Previously, it was explained briefly about what light refraction is. But at this point we will explain more deeply what is meant by refraction of light.

Refraction is an event of deflection of the direction of propagation of light that can occur when light passes through a boundary between two different mediums. Refraction events can occur when there is an incident ray and forms a certain angle the incident light is not perpendicular to the boundary or the angle of incidence is smaller than 900 to the boundary.

Meanwhile, light itself is an electromagnetic wave that propagates straight in all directions with a speed of 3 x 108 m/s and has a wavelength of around 380 to 750 nm. In physics, light is a package of particles called photons.

From these two explanations, an understanding can be drawn if light refraction is a process of bending light when the light beam passes through the boundary of two media with different refractive indices.

The refractive index of a material is the ratio of the speed of light in a vacuum to the speed of light in that material. Meanwhile, the relative refractive index is a comparison of the refractive indices of two different media.

The relative index of refraction of the second medium to the first medium is the ratio of the index of refraction between the second medium and the index of refraction of the first medium. The existence of this light refraction can cause an apparent depth and perfect reflection.

Properties of Light

A light also has properties based on the direction of propagation. You can read more about some of the properties of light below.

1. Light Travels According to a Straight Line

The sun is the largest source of light on earth. Where the sun has straight rays. Because the propagation of light from the sun to the earth can cause day and night events.

As for examples of real events where the process of light propagating in a straight line is a solar eclipse and a lunar eclipse. Where the sunlight that is blocked by the moon can make some of the earth experience the dark side.

2. Light can propagate through clear objects

Objects that have clear or transparent properties can be penetrated by light. Objects that have colorless or transparent particles can be propagated by light more easily. This happens because clear or transparent objects can easily transmit the incoming light.

An example is the incident of light through a clear glass window. Where the window glass cannot block the coming of sunlight and can directly enter the house. We can even look outside the glass window because basically light can still penetrate outside the clear glass and be caught by our eyes.

3. Light Can Be Reflected

Light can be reflected by reflecting or emitting light from the surface of an object that was previously exposed to light. The nature of the reflection possessed by this light can be divided into two, namely regular reflection and diffuse or diffuse reflection.

In the process of regular reflection, the light rays will reflect in parallel. This is like when you play during the day with a mirror that is used to reflect light. When you point the mirror towards the light. Then the light can be reflected in all directions from the reflected light.

Meanwhile, diffuse or diffuse reflection is a reflection of light that occurs on an uneven surface. An example is the reflection of light on water, rocks, trees, asphalt and shoes. Mirrors also have the property of reflecting light and are divided into several types, namely flat mirrors, convex mirrors and concave mirrors.

4. Deflectable Light

Light can be refracted when it moves obliquely through mediums of different densities. An example is the light from the air will then pass through the water. Because of this, light will experience refraction and deflection in the medium.

The nature of light that can be refracted or deflected is also widely used in various kinds of optical devices. An example is when you see a pond that looks shallow because it has clear water, even though the pool may have a deeper depth than what you see above the surface.

Those are some of the properties of light. In addition to the four properties described above, light also has several other properties.

Properties of Light Refraction

After knowing the nature of light in general. Next is about some of the properties in light refraction which you can read in full below.

1. Refraction of Light from a Loose Substance to a Dense Substance

The first property is the refraction of light from a sparse substance to a denser substance. Where this can happen when light is refracted from air to water. Air is a more tenuous medium than water, so light will be refracted close to the normal line.

2. Refraction of Light from a Dense Substance to a Loose Substance

The next property is the refraction of light from a denser substance to a more sparse substance. This condition can occur when light is refracted from glass to water. Glass has a denser medium than water. Therefore the light will be refracted away from the normal line.

Those are the two properties of light refraction that you can read in full.

Causes of Refraction of Light

Refraction of light is a change in the direction of propagation of light when it moves from one medium to another that has a different optical density. The cause of the refraction of light will be divided into two types. The two types of causes for the occurrence of light are as follows.

When light comes from a medium that has a less dense density towards a denser medium, then the incoming light will be refracted towards the normal line. An example is when light comes through the air medium to the water.

When light comes from a denser medium to a more tenuous medium, the incident light will be refracted away from the normal line. An example is when light comes through the medium of water into the air.

Light Refractive Index

Refraction of light can occur due to differences in the speed of light in the two media used. The speed of light in a medium that is smaller than the speed of light in a medium that is less dense.

Mathematically it can be formulated as follows.

Refractive index is never less than 1 (that is, n ³1)

The Law of Light Refraction

Around 1621, a Dutch scientist named Willebrord Snell conducted an experiment to find the relationship between the angle of incidence and the angle of refraction. The results obtained from these experiments are called Snell’s law as explained below.

The incident ray, the normal and the refracted ray will lie in one plane.
The quotient of the sine of the incident angle with the sine of the angle of refraction is a fixed number or can be called the index of refraction.

When viewed mathematically, the quotient of the angle of incidence and the angle of refraction will be expressed as follows.

The Application of Refraction of Light in Life

In everyday life there are several events of light refraction. What are the applications of refraction of light in everyday life? The following is a full explanation of this.

1. Perfect Bounce

Perfect reflection can occur when a beam of light comes from a dense medium or a large index of refraction to a less dense medium or a small index of refraction. The condition for perfect reflection is that the angle of incidence must be greater than the critical angle or angle of incidence that can produce a 90 degree angle of refraction.

This perfect reflection is usually used in the manufacturing process as well as in optics. Optical fiber is a type of cable that has such a high transmission power.

2. A pencil or straw that looks broken

Maybe you have personally conducted experiments using pencils or straws and water. Where when a pencil or straw is put into the water in a glass it will look like it is broken. This can happen because it is caused by differences in the medium through which light passes.

3. Seawater looks shallow

If you have ever been to the beach, maybe you have also seen sea water that is so shallow and want to swim in it. Even though the sea water is not shallow.

Sea water that can appear shallow is none other than because of the light that passes through two different mediums, namely from air to water. The principle used is almost the same as the pencil experiment which appears to break when it is placed in water.

4. Refraction in the lens

Lenses do have many benefits in this life. For example, lenses can be used in glasses, binoculars, lenses and microscopes. Did you know that the lens that is used to see objects beyond the limits of the human eye is due to the refraction of light that enters it.

The index of refraction between the lens medium and air is indeed different. Because of this, the lens can refract the light that enters it.

An example is for those who suffer from nearsightedness or farsightedness. After wearing glasses, they will be able to see more easily at normal distances. This is none other than because there are more formed by objects still falling on the retina.

Those are some applications of light refraction in everyday life. Maybe after reading a few examples of the application of light as above, it will be easier for you to know what forms of light refraction are in everyday life.

Refraction of Light in the Lens

The lens is a clear object that is shaped in such a way as to refract or allow most of the light that passes through it. Currently there are two types of lenses that you can find easily, namely convex lenses or positive lenses and concave lenses or negative lenses.

You can read these two types of lenses in more detail in the review below.

1. Convex Lens or Positive Lens

A convex lens is also known as a converging lens or positive lens. Which convex lens has a thicker center than the edges.

Convex lenses are also divided into three types of lenses as explained below.

1. A double convex or biconvex lens is a lens with both surfaces having a convex shape.
2. A flat convex lens or plankonvex is a lens that has one convex lens shape and one flat lens shape.
3. A concave convex lens or convex concave lens is a lens with one convex and one concave surface.

It should be noted that a convex lens has properties like a concave lens. Therefore the image formed will be almost the same as a concave lens. For further explanation about this is as follows.

The real image is formed from the intersection of the refracted rays that gather. The real image on a convex lens occurs when the object is in space II and III.

A virtual image can form from the intersection of divergent or spreading rays of venom. A virtual image on a convex lens can occur if it is located in space I.

2. Concave Lens

A concave lens is also known as a diverging lens or negative lens. Where a concave lens is a lens that has a thinner center than the edges. It should also be noted that a concave lens has a property called diverging or being able to scatter light. The formation of an image on a concave lens has a focal point or focus which is expressed negatively.

Same with convex lenses, concave lenses are also divided into three types of lenses. The three types of lenses in a concave lens are as follows.

1. A double concave lens or biconcave lens is a lens with both concave surfaces.
2. A flat or planconcave concave lens is a lens with one concave surface and the other is flat.
3. A convex or convex concave lens is a lens with one concave and the other convex surface.

The special rays produced by a concave lens are as follows.

1. Rays coming parallel to the main axis of the lens will be refracted as if they were coming from the active focus point F1.
2. The incoming ray as if going to the passive focal point F2 will be refracted parallel to the main axis.
3. Rays will come to the optical center point O forwarded without refraction.

That’s a summary of the refraction of light . Sinaumed’s can read books related to Physics by visiting sinaumedia.com , so you have #MoreWithReading information.

Characteristics of Stomach Acid – The characteristics of stomach acid are often ignored
because they can subside and just disappear. In fact, a disease known as Gastroesophageal
Reflux Disease (GERD) can cause other, more serious digestive problems. Such as inflammation,
narrowing of the esophagus, or respiratory problems.

Therefore, Sinaumed’s must recognize the characteristics of stomach acid from an early age so as not to think
of this disease as a “normal” problem experienced by many people. In addition, it will be
easier for you to distinguish it from other symptoms of digestive diseases.

Characteristics of Stomach Acid that You Need
to Watch Out for

Stomach acid is a liquid produced by the stomach, the form is runny, colorless, and acidic in nature.
In the body, this fluid has a function to help the absorption of vitamin B-12, prevent infection,
digest protein, and prevent food poisoning.

However, when this liquid rises, the acidity level (pH) of the stomach increases and causes various
problems in the mouth, esophagus and digestion. Here are some of the characteristics of stomach
acid that usually appear:

1. Difficulty swallowing

The first symptom that Sinaumed’s needs to be aware of is difficulty swallowing or dysphagia. The
acidic liquid in the stomach can actually rise to the esophagus, causing injury and irritation.

If the esophagus is injured, the digestive tract will become narrower and make it difficult for you to
swallow food. Which certainly disturbs your comfort while eating.

2. Chest pain

Not only is it difficult to swallow, stomach acid can also cause chest pain. This pain
generally begins with a burning sensation that is felt in the upper abdomen. After that, slowly
the burning sensation rises to the chest.

Usually, the pain is much more pronounced after eating food, lying down, or bending over. If
Sinaumed’s often feels a burning sensation like this, it’s better not to let it go, OK?
Immediately consult a doctor, I’m afraid this is a symptom of stomach acid or GERD.

3. Inflammation of the esophagus

As mentioned in the first point, stomach acid can rise up to the esophagus and cause inflammation.
This is caused by stomach acid pressing on the back of the esophagus.

Be careful, you know, if you leave this acidic liquid in your esophagus, your esophagus can be damaged and cause
inflammation or esophagitis.

4. Pain / heat in the esophagus

Apart from inflammation, it turns out that stomach acid can also damage the lining of your esophagus or
esophagus. The result of this damage is pain and a burning sensation in the lower throat and
chest.

If left unchecked, the esophagus can also cause other injuries, such as scar tissue (keloids) and ulcers in the
esophagus.

5. Bad breath

Sufferers of stomach acid are also at risk of experiencing bad breath problems. The main cause
is due to damage or relaxation in the muscles of the esophagus or also known as the lower esophageal
sphincter (LES).

Under normal conditions, the muscles of the esophagus will open automatically when swallowing so that food
can enter the stomach, after which it will close tightly again. When there is damage, this
esophageal muscle will remain open so that acid from the stomach can flow back into the throat and cause bad
breath.

6. Burp

Actually burping is the process of expelling excess air from the upper digestive tract.
Normally, burping only occurs when you swallow large amounts of air.

However, if the belching occurs more than one to two times at an adjacent time, this might be a sign of
increased stomach acid. This condition is still associated with narrowing of the esophagus
which causes difficulty swallowing. Because when it’s hard to swallow, excessive incoming air
cannot be released smoothly.

Apart from the stomach, other health problems that occur around the stomach area are ulcers.
Both need to be watched out so as not to become more dangerous. For this reason,
Sinaumed’s can read the book Maag: Recognize, Avoid and Treat by Nurheti Yuliarti.

Gastric Acid Medications
Without a Doctor’s Prescription that Can Be Purchased at Pharmacies

If the characteristics of gastric acid that occur are not too frequent, Sinaumed’s can handle it with
non-prescription drugs, aka over-the-counter drugs available at the nearest pharmacy. So, here
are three types of over-the-counter drugs that you can buy:

1. Antacids

The function of this drug is to neutralize stomach acid because it contains simethicone.
Simethicone is an ingredient that can expel excess gas from the body.

Unfortunately, this drug cannot treat sore throat caused by stomach acid. In addition, if used
too often will cause some side effects. Starting from diarrhea, stomach cramps, constipation,
to kidney problems. So make sure to follow the instructions for use on the medicine label,
OK!

Examples of antacid drugs are Mylanta®, Malox®, Rolaids®, Gaviscon®, Gelusil®, and Tums®.

2. H-2 receptor blockers

Histamine-2 (H-2) receptor blockers can reduce the body’s production of stomach acid. It’s
just that, its performance is not as fast as antacids. However, this drug can last longer in
the body and relieve various complaints.

Even a decrease in stomach acid production can last up to 12 hours after you take this drug.
Some examples of this type of drug are cimetidine (Tagamet®), ranitidine (Zantac®), and famotidine
(Pepcid®).

3. Proton pump inhibitors (PPIs)

This type of proton pump inhibitors (PPI) drug has a stronger dose than the other two types and you can buy
it freely at the nearest pharmacy. PPI drugs are very effective for reducing stomach acid,
including GERD.

However, make sure you ask the pharmacist for the rules for taking this medicine. Never take
PPI medication without advice from a pharmacist. Then, if the symptoms of stomach acid don’t
improve after 2 weeks, you should immediately check with your doctor.

Examples of PPI drugs in pharmacies include omeprazole (Prilosec®, Zegerid®) and lansoprazole (Prevacid 24 HR®).

Stomach Acid Medicine with a Doctor’s
Prescription in the Pharmacy

If the stomach acid disease that you are suffering from does not improve after using over-the-counter
drugs, you should immediately consult a doctor. That way, you will get a prescription for
medicine that is more effective and according to your condition. Some examples of stomach acid
medications with a doctor’s prescription are:

1. H-2 receptor blockers on prescription

Prescription H-2 receptor blockers are usually more effective at reducing stomach acid because they
suppress acid production in the body. Especially after eating, therefore, doctors usually
recommend taking this medicine 30 minutes before eating.

Another advantage of this type of drug is that it can be well tolerated by the body. But if
consumed continuously in the long term, it can cause a deficiency of vitamin B12. Examples of
H-2 receptor blockers are famotidine, nizatidine, cimetidine, and ranitidine.

2. Prescription proton pump inhibitors (PPIs).

Unlike PPI drugs that are sold freely, PPI drugs with a doctor’s prescription generally have higher doses and are
more effective for treating stomach acid or GERD.

It works by lowering stomach acid levels and preventing acid-producing cells from producing excess acid.
This type of drug is best taken one hour before meals.

But Sinaumed’s also has to be careful because this drug can cause side effects such as headaches, diarrhea,
nausea, and a lack of vitamin B12. Therefore, always pay attention to the drinking rules and it
is even better to consume it on an empty stomach.

Examples of PPI drugs with a prescription in pharmacies include esomeprazole, lansoprazole, omeprazole,
pantoprazole, rabeprazole, and dexlansoprazole.

3. Medicine to strengthen the lower esophageal
sphincter

The lower esophageal sphincter strengthening drug that you can find in pharmacies is Baclofen.
This is an anti-spastic that can help strengthen the lower esophagus.

Because when this part relaxes, it is easier for stomach acid to rise and cause a burning sensation in the
chest (heartburn) that people with GERD often feel. However, this drug can cause tiredness
accompanied by nausea.

4. Prokinetic drugs

When you check with your doctor, you will usually be given a prescription for a prokinetic drug.
This drug can speed up the process of emptying the digestive system. In addition,
prokinetic drugs can also strengthen the muscles in the lower esophageal valve.

Medications that are often prescribed by doctors are bethanechol and metoclopramide. Both have
the potential to cause side effects such as depression, nausea, fatigue, diarrhea, weakness, anxiety, and
abnormalities in physical movements.

Therefore, you should obey the drinking rules listed and if you are taking other types of medicines, you
should first consult with your doctor. Because prokinetic drugs cannot be taken carelessly with
other types of drugs.

5. Antibiotics (stomach acid medication
due to bacterial infection)

Antibiotics are drugs that you cannot take carelessly. Therefore, to get it, you must include
a prescription from a doctor. Some examples of antibiotic drugs used to treat stomach acid are
amoxicillin, clarithromycin, metronidazole, tetracycline and levofloxacin.

6. Medication to protect the intestinal
lining and digestive system

In some cases, the doctor will also provide prescriptions that are useful to protect the lining of the
intestines and digestive system. This drug is also known as a cytoprotective agent.
Some examples are sucralfate and misoprostol.

You need to know, you cannot buy this type of medicine freely at a pharmacy and can only get it with a
recommendation from a doctor.

How to Maintain Stomach Health

1. Pay attention to meal times

When busy with various activities, Sinaumed’s may lose track of time and forget to eat. You can
even have breakfast, lunch and dinner in rappel, aka only eating one meal a day.

Habits like this have the potential to disrupt eating patterns and trigger stomach acid disease, you know,
Sinaumed’s. Therefore, no matter how busy you are, always try to have breakfast, lunch and dinner
at the same time.

If you usually eat at night, it’s best to do it 3-4 hours before going to bed so that stomach acid doesn’t rise
due to the position of the body lying down while sleeping.

Setting meal times can also be a simple way to lose weight. As explained in the book
Simple Diet for Muslimah: Anti-hassle and Budget-Saving Diet written by
Muyassaroh.

2. Consumption of organic food

Currently, a lot of the food that Sinaumed’s consumes is processed using unnatural methods, alias using a
mixture of chemicals. In fact, according to research in the journal Inflammatory Bowel Disease,
foods that are processed with chemicals have the potential to increase the risk of digestive
disorders.

Meanwhile, other studies have shown that consuming organic foods rich in nutrients can actually protect the
stomach from various kinds of digestive diseases. That is why, Sinaumed’s need to eat natural
foods every day.

3. Eat little but often

When Sinaumed’s eats large portions, the stomach muscles stretch because the amount of food that comes in is
very large. As a result, the stomach receives excess pressure and causes complaints such as
abdominal pain, full stomach, or heartburn.

Well, instead of eating in large portions, it’s better to reduce the portion. So if you
usually eat three times a day, try changing it to 4-5 times but with small portions. This
method is much better for gastric health because its performance is also lighter.

4. Manage stress as best you can

It seems that there is no human being on this earth who has never experienced stress.
Unfortunately, the majority of us often have difficulty managing stress well. Even
though this problem can trigger the emergence of GERD disease.

How did it happen? This is because when you are stressed, the production of prostaglandin
hormones – hormones that line the stomach and protect it from erosion – decreases. From now on,
try doing meditation or fun hobbies to reduce stress. If necessary, see a psychologist for
therapy.

5. Drink the right amount

Drinking water is a simple activity that can help you maintain stomach health because the acidity level of
water (pH) is relatively neutral. That way, water can neutralize stomach acid levels when acid
production is high.

Just remember, drink enough water, OK? Because if too much of it will actually disrupt the
balance of minerals in the stomach and even trigger stomach acid to rise.

6. Limit alcohol and caffeine

Alcohol and caffeine are two stimulants that can greatly affect stomach function. The coffee
that you usually drink in the morning actually inhibits the closure of the esophageal sphincter muscle
because it contains high acid.

Meanwhile, as you know, this muscle must close when you are not swallowing food. If it’s like
this, it’s easier for stomach acid to rise up into the esophagus. If this happens continuously,
then you will become a person with stomach acid or GERD.

7. Avoid smoking

Besides being bad for the lungs, smoking habits and other tobacco products are also bad for stomach health.
This is because the nicotine content in cigarettes and tobacco products can make the esophageal
sphincter muscles weak.

Like alcohol and caffeine, this condition also triggers stomach acid to rise into the esophagus and cause
inflammation of the esophagus or ulcer.

8. Reduce pressure on the stomach

When there is pressure on your stomach, the stomach becomes compressed and makes stomach acid rise up into
the esophagus. Therefore, it’s best to reduce excess pressure on the stomach by doing these
things:

• Don’t lie down immediately after eating. Wait about 2-3 hours after eating, then lie
  down.
• Loosen belts, shirt buttons, or pants after consuming large amounts of food
• If you often lift heavy things, try to bend your knees so that your stomach doesn’t bend

9. Elevate your body position while sleeping

When you sleep, you should elevate your body position by about 15-20 cm by adding a pillow under your back.
In addition, if you like piling pillows, you should replace it with a special support that is
denser.

This method is quite effective in preventing stomach acid from flowing back into the esophagus during
sleep. Also, avoid eating before going to bed and lying down after eating, okay!
Remember, you need a distance of about 2-3 hours after eating to lie down. So it’s
better to skip dinner, deh!

In order for you to understand more about gastric disorders, Doctor’s book Why Does My Stomach Pain Won’t Heal?
Tips for Overcoming Gastric Disorders written by dr. JB Suharjo B.
Cahyono, Sp.PD-KGEH can help you.

Those are some of the characteristics of stomach acid that Sinaumed’s needs to be aware of.

sinaumedia Literasi – Have you ever felt bored or lost your motivation in living life, or even at the
extreme point of feeling you have no reason to get up in the morning and do all your usual Sinaumed’s
routine? This phase is also known as the “crisis of self-existence”, a time when we seem to
have lost our way, oscillated, and isolated between life that continues to move forward. In
times like these, let alone determining the direction of the future, finding definite reasons to do
things that normally seemed impossible. Escape from this chaos, finding Ikigai can be the
answer to all forms of your despair, Sinaumed’s!

Ikigai, is the secret of the Japanese to live happily every day. The term ikigai itself comes
from Japanese philosophy with iki meaning life and gai which is also defined as value or meaning.
This principle of life has long been applied by Japanese society since the Heian period (794 –
1185). As stated by neurologist and author of The Little Book of Ikigai, Ken Mogi, ikigai is
described as the concept of seeking meaning in life through a clear purpose in life.

The term ikigai is often used to describe the idea of ​​happiness in life amidst the pressures of study and
work. Ikigai as a Japanese concept that describes life purpose or the meaning of life is often
expressed as a person’s reason to get up every day. In his book, The Blue Zones: Lessons for
Living Longer From the People Who’ve Lived the Longest, Beuttner mentions that the main reason why Okinawan
people live long is ikigai. Older people in Okinawa feel that they are important because they
have an important social role in their environment. Everything comes from the determination to
live the purpose of life to be able to continue to be useful for society.

A study from Tokyo University in 2008 examined 50,000 people with an age range of 40 to 79 years, the
result was that 95 percent of participants who had ikigai survived for another seven years.
While the group that does not have ikigai, only 83 percent are still alive. Referring
to Quartz, the latest research results published by JAMA entitled Association Between Life Purpose and
Mortality Among US Adults Older Than 50 Years also reveal the same thing.

Life goals are the strongest factor in life expectancy, compared to gender, race, and level of education.
This study also formulated the effect of having a purpose in life on the health implications of the
body. Most of the participants in the group who had no purpose in life were more susceptible to
various diseases such as depression, heart attacks and strokes.

CLOSER TO KNOW THE IKIGAI CONCEPT

When one finds ikigai, a person will be more enthusiastic and motivated to carry out his daily activities,
school, work, even entrepreneurship he considers something meaningful. This happens because
there is an understanding of why they do this, what is the purpose, and why does this give full meaning to
their life. Thus, a person will have a higher level of happiness despite facing high pressures
in life.

IKIGAI is a combination of one’s passion, mission, profession and work. What is meant by
Passion? Passion is a combination of areas that you like with expertise. What is
meant by Mission? A mission is a combination of what you are passionate about and what society
needs. What is meant by Profession? A profession is a combination of an area of
​​expertise and something you can do for pay. What is meant by Job? A job is a mix
of what society needs and something you can do for pay. The following is a more complete
explanation, Sinaumed’s, ask these four things to yourself, as early as possible:

WHAT ACTUALLY YOU REALLY LIKE

The saying goes, “Do what you love, love what you do.” Doing something we are fundamentally
passionate about is a great way to find ikigai. Therefore, as much as possible choose a job
that you like. This also applies to those who want to start a business from an early age.
Choosing a field of entrepreneurship that suits your hobbies or preferences will certainly be
easier and more fun to live with. So, start asking yourself what you really like.
Undoubtedly this will guide you in the beginning of the journey to find Sinaumed’s ikigai.

WHAT IS YOUR EXPERTISE

Preference for a field of work should ideally be balanced with efforts to sharpen expertise in that field.
For example, if you like the world of journalism, start practicing writing regularly so that your
writing skills continue to improve. Or if you like the IT world, keep updating knowledge
regarding the latest developments in the IT world. Then try to check, is your job or college
major in accordance with the expertise you have? Can you continue to hone your skills in your
field so you can produce something better in the future for Sinaumed’s?

WHAT RETURN WOULD YOU
GET BY DOING THIS

It is true that working or entrepreneurship is not solely to make money. However, don’t
neglect the importance of getting reciprocity in the form of income so that your life’s welfare is also
maintained. For example, for those of you who like the world of photography, join a community
of photo enthusiasts, take part in photography workshops, and so on. This can be a gateway to
getting a side project or job that might provide additional income now, as well as a better one in the
future for Sinaumed’s!

DOES THE WORLD REALLY NEED IT

Another question to help find ikigai is to ask if the world or environment really needs the product or
service you offer. This is what differentiates the concept of Ikigai from just passion.
The feeling of contributing to the world will add to the perfection of satisfaction in working or
entrepreneurship. After trying to answer the question, be kind to yourself. This
process can be started by accepting all the shortcomings and not placing introspective expectations.
By daring to give up all obsessions, you can see things more clearly and positively,
Sinaumed’s!

FIND YOUR IKIGAI BY DOING THIS

After understanding the IKIGAI concept above, what next effort can you make to find ikigai?
Start with these 4 things Sinaumed’s!

• First, broaden your horizons. Try as many new things as you can. So far,
  have you ever felt that we don’t know ourselves enough, satisfy other people too much or just live life
  according to an existing pattern. So you often don’t know what you like, what you don’t
  like or maybe you yourself don’t know what you are going to do next.
• Second, it’s not bad to do what you don’t like. Because in reality being outside your
  comfort zone will mature you. If we only learn what we like, what we are comfortable with,
  when will we develop? When did it get stronger, tougher, and more flexible?
  Who knows, from the things you don’t like, you will find the essence of value that you have
  been looking for, Sinaumed’s!
• Third, don’t be afraid to organize your life, take some action now! Try to get rid of
  self-doubt, such as feeling worthless, feeling inadequate, feeling weak and other self-doubts.
• Finally, everyone has their own time. There are people who at a young age have achieved a
  lot, there are those who need more time to strive harder. Stay focused on yourself and rest
  assured that you will find your ikigai Sinaumed’s!

CHANGING THE PURPOSE OF LIFE AS A SOURCE OF
INCOME

In ikigai, the things you love should also be able to feed you. For those of you who are in
college or school and want to start your own business. Here are 5 steps you can take to turn
the things you love into your source of income:

FIND PASSION

Because Ikigai is a guide to one’s life goals. Start from what you like then supported with a
mission that can move into a profession and job. After that, find a business area for that
passion, start doing research using online media. Look for trends with Google Trends, do
research on forums and social media discussions to get a unique and suitable service (unique selling
proposition) to develop your passion into something valuable and marketable. Make something
extraordinary, have meaning and be able to make other people’s lives better.

BUSINESS MODELS

Build a business model by drawing a business model canvas. The business model canvas is a
visual representation tool that can comprehensively explain a business process. With these BMC
tools, we can understand a business in general without having to make business plan documents that are too
long and wide. The Business Model Canvas consists of 9 main pillars which summarize business
processes starting from:

• Customer segments: This section will explain who are the potential customers of your product. It can also
  contain profiles of people who have problems that your business will solve
• Value Propositions: This block contains added value that will make your business look attractive and
  different from other businesses. Usually in the form of solutions or innovations that you
  offer and become the main advantage of the product. Clear reasons why people choose to use
  your product or service? What are the advantages of your business compared to other
  competitors? also What’s most interesting about your business model Sinaumed’s!
• Channel: Simply put, a channel is a business medium that you use to deliver the solutions you offer to
  reach consumers. This section is in the form of how can customers find out about the
  product or service you offer? How will the product or service reach the customer and is
  this method effective?
• Customer Relationships: How do you stay connected with customers? How do you make sure
  customers are satisfied after using a product or service? The form can also be very
  diverse, ranging from newsletters, after sales services, and the like. Also learn about
  laws and regulations related to business. If you really have to use the internet for
  marketing, know very well how to market your business via the internet.
• Revenue Streams: The financial structure of the company, also how does your business make money?
  What products or services do you offer Sinaumed’s?
• Key Activities: What activities will you do to create a value proposition, as well as the business strategy
  you will implement so that the company’s targets can be achieved?
• Key Resources: What are the main resources you must have to run a business? What assets
  do you need so that your business can compete with other businesses?
• Key Partnerships: There is no big business that runs alone, in carrying out a business activity, of
  course we need partners. This is where we enter our strategic partners. In a
  business context, partners can be suppliers, vendors, agencies, and the like.
• Cost Structure In this last part, we must determine what costs are needed to carry out all business
  activities. To make things easier, know what cost components are needed for each element of
  key activities, key resources, and channels?

With these nine blocks, we can actually validate whether a business idea is potential or not.
Therefore, creating a business model canvas is the first thing that is usually needed by a novice
entrepreneur to remain realistic in running his business.

SOURCES OF FUNDING

Finally think about business funding. Remember business funding can use your own money or
other people’s money. Talking about other people’s money, one can think of funding from banks,
financial institutions, the public (check crowdfunding websites), investors, potential buyers and/or
suppliers. A fact that is often forgotten by many prospective entrepreneurs, that big business always starts
with small steps. Determine the direction and business goals to go in that direction.
There is no guarantee that everything will be successful, what an entrepreneur has to do is Work,
Study and Pray. Working on running his business, learning from good experiences and bad
experiences and praying to the Almighty.

EDUTORE

sinaumedia developed an educational platform called Edutore. On this platform, you can access
many question practice books like those in sinaumedia by subscribing. Edutore has a slogan
“Everyone Can Be Smart” and that is also what Edutore aspires to be. So that Edutore can
participate in educating Indonesian children. On the Edutore Youtube Channel, various topics
are discussed, ranging from unique general knowledge such as “Why are the brake lights red”, learning
English with Captain J, to studying with Edutore which contains discussions of questions such as CPNS
synonyms, antonyms, and others. Check the YouTube account directly, click here.

Above are some tips on finding IKIGAI so you can see far ahead about your life vision. For
those of you who are still in school, and want to start a business as early as possible, why not?
It is important to seek IKIGAI for contribution-based and skill-based development so that you know
about yourself and live the learning process with joy. Excited to find Ikigai Sinaumed’s!
Have a great adventure finding your ikigai!

Source: from various sources

Cognitive Aspects – Human abilities can be seen in many ways, such as cognitive, emotional, and psychomotor aspects. Knowing these three certainly has a profound impact on individuals and groups in relation to the process of social learning and the lessons learned from social interaction.

Graded education in Indonesia focuses more on cognitive assessment. This rating is a description of the main assessment of a child’s achievement. Assessment of cognitive aspects related to reasoning, thinking processes and the development of children’s rational abilities.

This form of cognitive assessment is usually in the form of multiple questions of several types including multiple choice, true-false, matchmaking, essays, short answers, and others. The choice you make depends on the type of question being asked and the level of the cognitive domain you wish to measure.

The measurements taken are also adjusted to the extent to which the learning objectives are to be achieved. In some counters, maximum success is sometimes at the second level. This is usually low-level documentation, such as when starting a document discussion.

 

 

Cognitive Understanding According to Experts

The following is a cognitive definition of opinion from experts, including;

1. Margaret W. Matlin

Cognitive is an activity process that involves several types of activities related to using a person’s mentality. Related activities include seeking, obtaining, storing, and using knowledge. The use of science is needed in the right circumstances & conditions.

2. Husdarta & Nurian

Cognitive is a form of continuous process but the output obtained is not continuous using the output that has been achieved before. Cognitive abilities will continue to develop in sync with what is learned at school or the social environment.

3. Chaplin

Cognitive is a generic concept which includes all forms of identifiers, things that include observing, having prejudices, seeing, imagining, predicting, giving, guessing, & judging. If we look at things that are contained in very complex cognitive.

4. Ahmad Susanto

Cognitive is a thought process, an individual’s ability to assess, consider and relate an incident to one another. This ability is the basis based on all kinds of abilities that a person has. This is also determined by a person’s interest in showing all the ideas he has.

Cognitive Aspect

The ability of perception must be owned by all who have it in various ways. Among others;

1. Cognitive Aspects of Knowledge

Aspects related to many things will be something fundamental. Knowledge can be in the form of the ability to memorize, interpret, and others. Possessive ability involves several things, including the ability to remember a certain concept, method, structure, or process.

This level is the most basic level to see a person’s ability to understand the assigned material. Every child is unique, so sometimes children do not have good memory skills but have other extraordinary abilities.

2. Cognitive Aspects of Understanding

Higher appreciation of the knowledge aspect, not only in terms of memorizing but also in terms of understanding. Some things that must be owned at this stage are comparing, describing, organizing, categorizing, understanding meaning, understanding concepts and others. At this point, there is also a requirement for students to explore concepts that are already understood.

Not only remembering but also understanding, this level is more on how someone has their own point of view to understand a concept. This understanding can occur directly or through repeated learning.

3. Cognitive Aspects of Application

Apply what is understood to be the following step on top of the previous step. This aspect aims to apply what has been understood by using rules with principles from the studied literature in real conditions.

Good ability to apply abstract concepts to certain theories. Its application can be seen in the school environment or social environment. This application has a broad and unlimited vision. During the cognitive assessment, concepts that are often associated with everyday life are consistent with the material presented.

4. Cognitive Aspects of Analysis

One’s ability to perform tests and solve multipart information. The relationship from one department to another can be seen and conclusions can be drawn about existing documents. The analysis carried out can be in the form of factor analysis, linkage analysis and social organization analysis.

This ability, when seen in everyday life, is a person’s ability to connect events in a related event. When recording problems or events, conclusions can be drawn.

5. Cognitive Aspects Review

Evaluation can be interpreted as an appreciation of one’s attention to an event. While the latter, the conclusions drawn can be pros or cons, right or wrong, agree or disagree, and so on.

The process is carried out after going through the previous steps so that it can be concluded that something that has been done is correct or not. Is a form of awareness to improve one’s own abilities or to learn at a certain stage. This step is also important for someone to understand the material.

6. Cognitive Aspects of Creation

The form of learning development has been received from the teacher. A child is expected to be able to develop abilities and create something unique from the material under study. Creativity can be done in various ways depending on the creative abilities of each person.

Examples of this creativity will appear when he already has talent or a complete understanding of basic concepts. Creativity is the pinnacle of cognitive domain assessment.

Someone who is able to make an advantage in learning is considered to have fully understood the concepts presented. These creations add to the selling value of an item. This capability will be evaluated individually in each process.

 

 

Cognitive Example

Here are some examples of a person’s cognitive abilities in the learning process, namely;

1. Read

Readability is one of the cognitive abilities that can be seen when you first recognize letters. This ability is one that demonstrates a child’s cognitive ability on many levels. Of course, there are levels of memorization, understanding, and application in reading certain texts that your educational institution or family supports.

2. Scraps

The ability to remember what happened in the form of an event or learning material. The ability to remember is one thing that is quite important to see a person’s cognitive abilities, even if only at a low level.

3. Logical reasoning

The ability to relate events to one another is what we need to do. These are activities that demonstrate the ability to reason or think. This capability starts at the linkable analysis stage.

4. Caution

One of the processes for acquiring cognitive knowledge is to pay attention to continuous learning. When a person is paying attention, they must fully understand the concepts being conveyed to enhance their cognitive abilities.

Use of Cognitive Aspects in Life

1. Cognitive Skills for CV

A well-written and well-formed resume can reveal strong cognitive abilities. For example, mesh and space structures demonstrate visual processing power. It’s about demonstrating logic and reasoning skills that show how you can contribute to the company’s mission when you target your resume and statement of objectives in the details of your job posting. You can also include cognitive skills such as problem solving and active listening in the Skills section.

Example: “Marketing professional with 3 years of market research experience. Analyze consumer buying behavior and seasonal trends to create effective marketing campaigns for target demographics.”

2. Cognitive skills for a cover letter

Cover letters require a professional approach to the potential employer, creatively presenting themselves as a suitable candidate for the job, and explaining how they can add value to the company. Meeting these requirements in your cover letter demonstrates creative problem-solving skills and demonstrates strong logic and reasoning skills.

Example: “I value planning meetings with my team because they allow me to share ideas with others and collaborate on better product designs. I always use data from pre-tested designs to show the potential value of specific visuals that my target audience will like.”

3. Interview Cognitive Skills

The interview will provide many opportunities to demonstrate cognitive abilities. When answering questions, you can refer to the company’s research or your original job description to jog your memory. You can demonstrate your attention skills by actively listening and responding to the interviewer. You can also demonstrate your logic and reasoning skills by solving hypothetical problems an interviewer may present you.

Example: “I know that a company holds a marketing meeting every year to bring together experts from various industries. This meeting will give you valuable insight into what other companies are doing to meet their customers’ needs and the creative solutions they are looking for to increase brand loyalty.”

4. Wake up when the alarm goes off

Of course you already know how the alarm works right? So what is the connection between alarm activity and cognitive psychology? when every day you use your alarm to wake you up, especially if you live alone. You have decided or determined what is needed and what you expect.

By having an alarm, you facilitate the activity, in addition, by your decision or thought, you decide what time to set the alarm and continue or inactivate it. Even if you feel lazy or don’t want to get up, you still do what you are doing and wake up when the alarm goes off.

5. Language Selection

Everyone should be fluent in more than one language, at least although regional languages ​​and mother tongues are more than sufficient. Cognitive psychology governs how you communicate and use language when necessary. You certainly know that language is a way of communicating with other people, so that other people understand what you mean.

Now, language choice is your perception driven decision. Obviously, you are not going to use English when you are in a village in Central Java. Maybe they won’t understand what you’re saying. In the meantime, decide to use common language, especially when communicating with certain people, to avoid miscommunication. This is the importance of applying cognitive psychology.

6. In problem solving

How did you feel when the problem arose? clear how to find a solution and also a way out of the problem.

Basic Psychological Concepts in Cognitive Behavioral Problems Of course, think of results rather than regrets. Mindfulness can really help you find your way out or make decisions. Let’s go back to the definition where perception is influenced by your mental state, so everyone’s decision will be different depending on their mental state.

In terms of problem solving too, a good mind and state of mind can help you deal with problems fairly and fairly.

Meanwhile, when you are emotional, or you are not in a good state of mind, decision making often leads to problems and problems that cannot be resolved by themselves, in fact there are many other problems. It also makes someone emotional or not feeling well, they shouldn’t decide something or decide something.

7. Face your fears

Fear is one of the feelings or sensations that humans have to experience. It is natural and natural for a person to face his fears. But this fear can lead you in two directions, mental and emotional stress or it is from this feeling of stress that you can identify something.

When you are afraid, you have to find a way or solution to get rid of that fear. so as not to be enveloped in such an unpleasant feeling. Then your consciousness will work as hard as it can to release that feeling. it will affect your hormones if studied biologically.

You should know that feelings of pleasure, fear and the like can be secreted or secreted by hormones. With this decision, dopamine, the feel-good hormone, will be released and relieve your fear.

8. Facing many people

When facing many people, you will have feelings of fear, anxiety and the like. Sometimes people ask you things you probably never thought about or knew about. Decisions, thinking and cognitive thinking will play an important role in how you decide in a fast and useful application so that you are better prepared and feel at ease in front of large groups of people.

An opinion-based psychosocial theorist explains that public appearances are not something everyone can deal with. Of course this can also irritate you, who do not like to appear in front of many people. Remembering when standing in front of people is like challenging yourself in a new field or field.

It’s not easy, many people who are used to being in front of crowds are still afraid or worried if things don’t go according to plan. Your perception is at stake here.

9. Adaptation

When adapting to be the most difficult and perhaps difficult, for people who are easygoing or easy to get along with anyone. Consider adapting not just one or two people, but you’ll be involved with lots of characters and routines.

You are asked to recover, where you must be able to step into their lives and obey them without compromising your principles.

 

 

Conclusion Cognitive Aspects

From the explanation presented, it can be said that a person’s ability in this cognitive domain will influence a person’s attitude towards responsibility in behavior. We know that increasing one’s knowledge is expected to change one’s behavior. The resulting changes can be positive or negative, depending on the person.

The purpose of this cognitive activity is to identify thinking skills in the intellectual realm, from simple ones to those that require high ability and creativity. The lowest level is memorization and the highest level is generation.

Of course, in terms of research on cognitive abilities, this article is not enough, there is still much to know about this cognitive ability, because there are many other things that have not been discussed in this article. Because it is very difficult to write all sections in one article, for Sinaumed’s who want to learn more about cognitive aspects, they can search for the best reference books on sinaumedia.com. During reading!

Author: Arizal Muhammad Valevi

The goal of the State – Indonesia was owned when the proclamation and independence occurred, where it was related to a group of people or organizations that it sheltered. The application of objectives can be a guideline for all activities carried out by the state, be it compiling or controlling state equipment like the government. What’s that like? Here is an explanation.

Definition of Destination Country

1. Plato

Plato has the opinion that the purpose of the state is made to advance human decency, be it in groups or individually. These individual creatures mingle, so that they can join to become a society, state and nation.

2. Roger. H. Sultau

According to Roger, every citizen and people in the area where he lives can develop, and express creativity towards thoughts that are as free as possible.

3. Benedict Spinoza

In contrast to Benedict’s opinion which stated that the purpose of a country is to carry out peace, peace, and of course to eliminate fear. The state exists to shelter its people and create a stable atmosphere to ensure their comfortable life.

4. Aristotle

Aristotle argued that the perfection of a state takes precedence over the aspect of justice. To realize this, a country has laws and regulations that function as guarantors for society. So, every member in society can obtain human rights that are nation and state.

5.John Locke

According to John, the purpose of the state is to maintain and guarantee the fulfillment of human rights contained in community agreements. In this condition, the state must provide space for society so that they can fulfill every right and result, namely by respecting equality.

State Goals Based on the Welfare State Concept

This is managed according to the money that is in the management of the state. State finances can in fact be a major milestone in realizing the goals of the state, so that managers must be able to maximize each sector well in order to achieve common prosperity.

So, if you look further, the goals of the Indonesian state can be classified according to the concept of a welfare state or welfare state. What is the welfare state ? A welfare state that gives more role to the government in managing the country.

In the book Globalization and the Welfare State by Bo Soderten, a state with such a concept will usually maximize security and social welfare for broad groups. The state can take a direct role in realizing social justice for all Indonesian people.

What are the efforts of the state in realizing this concept? Mastery over all economic power within the national scope, both from the regulatory sector or those owned by the state over certain units. Don’t get me wrong, the units in question will get the maximum profit according to the government’s goals, that is what is meant by people’s prosperity.

Because of this, BUMN or State Owned Enterprises were created as we know them today. The business activities they carry out even cover all sectors such as fisheries, plantations, agriculture, manufacturing, postal and telecommunications, and construction.

1. Programs funded by the government, employers, or employees with benefits to compensate for losses or overcome loss of income due to various reasons such as retirement, illness, widowhood, even employment.
2. There are so-called categorical or universal benefits or general tax funding with benefits for households with children or people with disabilities.
3. Tax based benefits or programs intended for those with income below the income threshold, without being taxed.
4. Programs that are paid for by employers and managed by the government are called occupational benefits . The benefits are for people looking to give birth, get sick, or retire.
5. Programs funded by public taxes or known as social assistance , means-tested benefits for low-income people by looking at the conditions of their households. People who don’t have enough income, even no income at all.

As for the social security system that covers all Indonesian citizens, in fact there is no such thing as yet, so there are only four systems that are based on compulsory contributions and only cover workers in the formal sector and their families. The government can organize insurance-based social security to meet the needs of all Indonesian people.

Indonesia’s Goals According to the 1945 Constitution of the Republic of Indonesia

With these guidelines, the Indonesian state can develop and not be far from civilization. Understanding the purpose and direction of our own country’s development is important so that the intention to prosper and advance it is not only carried out by certain parties, but the entire population and society.

A simple example is the rights and obligations of the state that is held. The rights that must be obtained by all Indonesian citizens and every person are in the form of Human Rights or HAM in the sense that they have the right to live, to obtain equal legal protection, and to education.

Who will take the role? Of course, the Indonesian people themselves where they have to protect and support their nation. However, it is not only protection because it is an effort to educate and provide a school like a university or any building as a place for learning.

Actually, peace is easily achieved or realized with one person as the leader. The government makes the rules and guides the community to carry out a number of programs with good intentions.

State Goals in Pancasila

If you follow Pancasila as the main principle or guideline for realizing the country’s goals, then you have to look at the following points.

1. The implementation carried out by the government must guarantee that all Indonesian residents can embrace and worship according to their respective beliefs.
2. Citizens are not forced to follow or adhere to a certain religion, but they are obliged to embrace a religion according to the law in force in Indonesia
3. Deviations committed by the government can support inter-religious tolerance. One another can be involved in conflict or get scolded.
4. Government administration is also intended for all citizens and residents who are very happy.
5. Understand every human being from creativity, taste, and intention with other humans.
6. Uphold that independence is the right of all nations and colonialism must be abolished from the world, including Indonesia.
7. Administration of government can form or create peace in a strong civilization, as well as eliminate the existence of self-assertion or certain groups based on race, skin color, descent, to racism.
8. Understanding what Indonesian unity is is the first step to growing values ​​and a sense of shared destiny among the people.
9. The essence that we know in the fourth precept is democracy as a form of state that has guidelines from the people, by the people, and for the people.
10. Leaders for government administrators who handle their fields from low to high levels must be someone with careful planning and based on common sense, no longer a leader who doesn’t want to listen to the point of rejecting the opinions of the population.
11. Leaders can hold deliberations to make decisions and reach consensus. At the highest level, these activities are created or carried out by high-ranking officials, people’s representatives who sit in state institutions such as the DPR.
12. Talking about the country’s resources, wealth and assets, they belong to the state which can be utilized or used as well as possible to achieve common interests. Its implementation is regulated according to government decisions from the potential and capabilities of each region.
13. Government administrators are obliged to protect every Indonesian nation which will later influence the country’s development according to their respective fields. In this way, the ideals of a prosperous and just society can be realized, where these ideals are not only physical or material, but also have a spiritual aspect.
14. Government administrators use principles that love and care about development. With the realization of these aspects, there will be no such thing as fraud in the implementation of work.

The government can seek and organize a national education system that is useful for increasing piety and faith, as well as good morals in educating the nation’s life in accordance with the mandate of the law.

The state can make education a budget priority of at least 20% of state spending and budget acquisitions to support implementation.

Science and technology are advanced with religious values ​​and national unity for their civilization and well-being. That is why the goals of the country can still be carried out and become embodied by the government.

Description of Indonesia’s Country Goals

The elaboration of the country’s goals is divided into four parts, namely the goals of protection, welfare, intelligence, and also peace. The purpose of protection is in accordance with what is stated in the constitution, which is to protect the entire Indonesian nation.

This elaboration is also in accordance with the direction of the goals of the Indonesian nation nationally and internationally. In Sukadi’s Citizenship Education book, it is stated that the true purpose of the state is to maintain peace and achieve justice.

The last goal of civilization is actually a noble goal, in which civilization and progress of the country are the priority. It is different with welfare goals which are intended to fulfill general welfare.

Welfare parameters in Indonesia can be met with three elements, such as clothing (clothing), food (food), and shelter as a place to live. If all three can be fulfilled, society can be said to be prosperous.

Respecting the State Fundamentals to Realize the State’s Goals Nationally

Pancasila as the basis of the Indonesian state is the life view of the nation’s own personality, whose values ​​are intended for the realization of aspirations and ideals. The division of the Indonesian nation will be easier to avoid with this basis.

Feelings of fairness and injustice can also be minimized, so that all Indonesian people will consider themselves equal and equal to other people. Pancasila does contain several values ​​that can be used as a basis for realizing the goals of the state.

The first is the divine values ​​of religiosity which are used as guidelines for the ethical fundamentals of national and state life. Second, human values ​​are more universal.

Furthermore, there are ethical values ​​of humanity that are deeply rooted in association and the environment. Basically, Indonesia has a strong vision and mission, so it doesn’t only care about the plurality of society.

You can think of the four as human values, along with divine values ​​to achieve your goals. Who doesn’t want their dreams to come true? The government also wants it so that the country’s goals succeed in proving that Indonesia can become a prosperous and prosperous country.

In the vision of social justice through the foundation of Pancasila, what is desired is balance. Something that is balanced and not one-sided is the best thing to lead to a better life.

His position is also highly respected because he has several things, such as covering the atmosphere of mysticism, so that he can realize the ideals of law. The existence of this spirit is very important to realize the construction and development of facilities in Indonesia.

Of course, the formulation of Pancasila must be implemented by all citizens, not just one person. You, as part of the citizens of the country, also know, understand, and maintain it so that you can still protect the country.

So, you can break down the goals of the state in general into several points, namely implementing order (1), prosperity and welfare (2), justice (3), and defense (4).

In order to realize the goals of the state, Indonesia does not play a role alone because the people have the right to express opinions and practice what they can. Hopefully, this can be a motivation to pursue a career.

Guitar part – In the world of music, the guitar is the most important element that can create beauty and interest for listeners. In this part of the world there are already many people who like and even proficient in playing the guitar. From various guitar fans and those who are proficient at playing the guitar, the quality of their playing is certainly different. This is due to differences in technique, ability, and even their flying hours.

In order to achieve maximum proficiency and quality in playing the guitar, training and understanding of the guitar is required. Before training yourself to play the guitar, we need to first understand the parts contained in the guitar.

Guitar Parts

1.Headstocks

On a guitar instrument, the headstock is at the very end of the guitar, which is on the neck farthest from the body of the guitar. The headstock functions as a place for the machine to wind the guitar strings which will be attached to the head. In installing the strings, it is necessary to adjust the tension of the strings or strings because it will later affect the pattern of the pitch on the guitar playing.

In general, each side of a symmetrical headstock has 3 players with the position of the players having a composition of 3 3. There are 3 players on the right and there are 3 players on the left. However, there are actually many other variations of the pattern for placing the string rollers on the guitar.

The position of the headstock is not only related to variations in the appearance of the guitar but also affects the sound production as well. If the headstock tilts backwards, the strings will automatically be pressed tighter against the nut, so that the vibrations of the strings will be channeled perfectly from the neck to the body and guitar pick-up. Meanwhile, the position of the headstock which is parallel to the neck can help suppress the guitar strings contained in the nut by ensuring that the binding post is also attached.

Playing the guitar will definitely be a lot of fun. For those of you beginners who want to play the guitar, then you can read the book Advanced Playing Guitar For Beginners.

 

2. Machine Heads

Machines Heads on guitar musical instruments are commonly called peg heads or tuning keys. Machines Heads is a panel in the scrolling of the strings and where the strings are set on the guitar. Machines Heads or peg heads or tuning keys also function to adjust the tension of the guitar strings. In setting the tension of the guitar strings, it will affect the high or low tone of each of the guitar strings.

The peg has a function to adjust the tension of the strings or as a tool to rotate the strings. In addition, the lever hook is used as a place to attach the strings, which when the peg is rotated, the lever will rotate. The peg consists of a roller, teeth or gear, a rod to lock the strings, and a rod to roll the guitar strings.

3.Nut

The nut on a guitar instrument is a small object with an elongated shape that is placed between the head handle or headstock and the fret board on the guitar. The nut is used as a bearing which has a function as a support for the guitar strings so that later the sound that comes out of the guitar will sound loud. Without the nut on the guitar, the sound that comes out will not sound loud. Almost all guitars that are created have a nut.

In general, the Nut is in the form of small strips made of bone, plastic, brass, corian, graphite, stainless steel, and paper-based media. The nut is placed together with the headstock to fill the fretboard.

4. Necks

In a guitar instrument, the neck functions as a guitar neck or is called a guitar handlebar. The neck is used as a place to attach the frets, fretboard, tuners, headstock and guitar stick clusters.

Most of the use of wood in making the fretboard usually uses a different wood from the wood used in the neck of the guitar. Making the neck on a guitar instrument needs to be considered, especially in terms of neck tension which greatly affects the pattern of pitch points. Good tension is able to make the tone produced in guitar playing will remain constant over a long period of time.

In rolling the strings that remain upright when the guitar is not played it can affect the neck of the guitar to become easily bent. In making it, you need to consider several things, including: the width of the fretboard, the scale or distance between the frets, the wooden neck, the type of neck construction, and the shape of the back of the neck. The types of materials used in the manufacture of guitar necks, namely: aluminum (Kramer guitar, Travis Bean, and Veleno Guitars), or with carbon fiber (Modulus Guitar and Three Guitars).

5. Fingerboards

The fingerboard or fretboard on a guitar instrument is also commonly called piano keys. As the name suggests, Fingerboard or fretboard is defined as a finger board. Fingerboard which is a board pressed on a guitar musical instrument. In this section, players will place their fingers to press the strings at a certain fret, which is where the fingerboard is placed on the neck of the guitar.

The fingerboard or fretboard is made of wood embedded with metal frets and comprises the neck of the guitar. In general, the fingerboard or fretboard is made of ebony, maple, or is made of a composite material (such as HPL or resin). The fingerboard or fretboard is used as a place to rest when playing while pressing the guitar strings.

6. Frets

Frets are lines that originate from metal bars made from nickel alloy or stainless steel. Frets are placed along the fretboard and placed at the points that divide the scale. Frets on guitar instruments are used to limit the tone area on the guitar fingerboard or fingerboard on the surface of the guitar neck or neck.

Additionally, the frets can be used as cushions for the guitar strings when pressed. From this function, if a player uses his guitar frequently, it is possible that the surface of the frets on the guitar can be eroded or damaged as a result of friction when the guitar is played.

The placement of the frets determines the sound quality of the guitar when played by a player. If the frets function is maximized, the sound produced from the guitar will be even clearer. In general, the shape, size, and number of frets will vary according to the type of guitar.

7. Strap pins

Strap Pins on guitar musical instruments are usually made of metal material which is placed in place to attach a strap or strap. In general, especially electric guitars, there are two strap pins. Meanwhile, on an acoustic guitar, which only has one strap pin at the end or back of the guitar, then the other end of the strap will be tied around the headstock.

8. Body Side

Body Side on a guitar instrument can also be called a side-board. Body side is a board that is on the side of the guitar. In general, the body side is curved or looks like wavy. However, there are also straight or bulging guitar body sides .

On an acoustic guitar, the body of the guitar is used as a sound chamber that can amplify the sound produced by plucking the guitar strings. Which is where, on the body of the guitar, the pickups and volume control are attached.

9. Pickups

The pickup on a keyboard instrument is usually called a spool. The spool is specially designed for guitars. The pickup has the task of recording waves of sound sonar signals through the vibrations of metal guitar strings when they are being plucked.

The pickups in electric guitars are capable of converting sound vibrations from the strings into electrical signals. The resulting signal will be forwarded to the amplifier. In principle, the work function of the pickups on this guitar instrument is almost the same as the work function of the microphone.

The level of sensitivity of the pickup in recording these waves depends on the type and material, the number of windings, where the pickup is installed, and other supporting elements.

10.Bridge Base 

In guitar musical instruments, the bridge base is the part of the stem that has a nut-like shape. In general, the bridge base on a white guitar instrument is made of ivory, metal, or fiber.

The Bridge Base is used for the holder and support of the guitar strings so that it can maintain the distance between the strings and the guitar press board. In addition, the bridge itself serves to connect the guitar strings with the guitar body. The bridge on the guitar instrument varies greatly depending on the type of guitar.

11.Position Mark 

Position mark or Fret Board Inlay on a guitar musical instrument is a point that is placed on the neck of the guitar or neck. Position mark has a function to mark a certain fret position on the neck of the guitar or the guitar’s pressure board. It aims to make it easier in terms of determining the position on one of the frets.

12. Heels

The heel on the guitar is under the fretboard. The heel is firmly affixed to the side of the body of the guitar. The heel is commonly referred to as a guitar heel because it is seen from its shape which is like the heel of a shoe. The heel is the part that connects the neck of the guitar with the body of the guitar.

In a guitar instrument, the heel functions as a support and can pull the neck of the guitar so that it remains in position so that it does not bend when there is tension from pulling the guitar strings.

13. Rosettes

Rosette is a decoration or as an ornament that is shaped like a rose design. The designs range from simple to complex. The shape of the rosette is a circle and is placed on the edge of the sound hole or sound hole.

14. Soundhole

The sound hole or resonance hole on a guitar is a circular sound hole. In general, the sound hole is in the body of an acoustic guitar. The sound hole has a function, namely to transmit sound from the guitar to the body of the guitar which is produced due to the plucking of the guitar strings.

In addition, the sound hole functions as a loudspeaker which is generated from the vibration of the guitar strings that enter the body cavity of the guitar. At this time, sound holes or resonance holes were not only circular in shape, but some were oval in shape.

15.Soundboard

The sound board, also known as the face-board, is the soundboard found on a guitar instrument. The sound board is at the front of the guitar as a resonance box for the sound produced by the guitar. The sound board has a function to cover the cavity of the guitar so that the sound vibrations produced by the guitar strings will not be separated or lost or function to resonate the sound produced by the guitar so that the sound coming from the plucking of the guitar strings becomes louder and louder.

The soundboard has a tube-like shape in which there is room. If there is a leak on the sound board it will affect the clarity of the sound produced.

16. Saddles

The saddle on a guitar instrument is the support or bearing of the bridge base which is attached to the body of the guitar or is in the bridge slot. The saddle is used to attach the ends of the guitar strings, where the strings are above the saddle and then pressed and tied before the strings pass through the bridge hole.

If the saddle is weak and cannot hold the pull when the strings are rolled, it will reduce the tone quality when the guitar is played. The solution is to provide a lock that will later be attached to the inside of the guitar faceboard. In addition, the saddle has a function that is almost the same as the nut, which is used so that the sound produced from the plucking of the guitar strings will sound loud.

17. Strings

Strings are commonly called strings. The strings on guitars are made of metals, polymers, animals and plant-based products. In this modern era, electric guitars are usually made of steel or nickel phosphor bronze as the main material.

Basically, the strings contained in a guitar instrument consist of 6 (six) strings. Each of these strings will produce a different sound. However, there are also guitars that have more than 6 (six) strings, that is, like there are 7 (seven) or 12 (twelve) strings.

There are 2 (two) types of strings that are generally used, including strings or nylon strings. The two are different, in that the strings have a clearer and sharper sound than the nylon strings. Even though the strings will produce a clearer and sharper sound, they will be more comfortable to play and really help guitar players who are still at the beginner stage.

18. Pickup Selector switches

The pickup selector switch is a switch found on an acoustic guitar instrument. This section has a function to determine which pickups will be activated.

19.Output jacks

On a guitar instrument, the output jack is a part that is installed in front of or under the body of the guitar. The output jack has a function as a jack in and out hole or jack plug. The output jack is a jack plug that feeds from the amp or sound processor pedal, so that the resulting sound will flow and can be amplified by power through the speakers.

An easy explanation, the output jack is an output signal device that needs to be connected to an amplifier device. It is intended that the sound of the electric guitar will be heard clearly. There are 2 (two) types of output jacks on guitars, namely stereo and mono.

Of the several parts contained in the guitar musical instrument and its functions described above, it is necessary to understand it first. If you already understand it, Sinaumed’s will be easier to learn later. You can really learn to play guitar musical instruments on your own until you are proficient, of course there are lots of techniques and ways that you can find through books at sinaumedia.com

Well, that’s an explanation of guitar parts that will make it easier for you to play the guitar. After reading this article to the end, I hope you will be more enthusiastic about playing the guitar. If you want to find books about songs and musical instruments, you can get them at sinaumedia.com .

To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Nabila Frithania

Reference source

Sambu, GR (2008). Smart Playing Guitar in 7 Days . Yogyakarta: Medpres.

Renaldi, A., and Erizawa, E. (2009). Good at Playing Guitar: Choosing a Guitar, Effects, Sound System According to the Musical Genre. South Jakarta: Publisher PT Kawan Pustaka.

Kautsar, AFA (2016). Good at Playing Guitar. Yogyakarta: Genesis Learning.

Firmansyah, L. (2018). Only 1 Week Already Good at Playing Guitar . Media Pressindo

Pamungkas, AJ (2020). Master Guitar Without a Teacher . Pustaka Hikam.

Asriadi, D. (2004). Guide to Accompanying Songs with Guitar . Library Friend.

Wasisto. (2021). Collection of Good Songs for Playing Guitar . 3TAN.

Setiono, GA (2010). Techniques, Tips & Tricks Good at Guitar . Jakarta: PT Buku Kita.

Function of Stamens – Many people think that flowers are just decorations or sweeteners from plants. In fact, flowers actually have a very important and vital function for the plant itself. Flowers can be said to be very important organs because flowers are one of the generative organs which have the main function for the process of plant reproduction.

A flower can be said to be a perfect flower if the organs of the flower are complete. The organs that are usually present in perfect flowers are the crown, petals, pistils, and also the stamens. While flowers are not perfect, they usually do not have any of these four organs.

If a flower does not have one of these organs, it can disrupt the breeding process of the plant itself. This is because each organ of the flower has its own function. Check out a complete explanation regarding the function of stamens and various other organs in flowers!

Flower Function

Simply put, flowers have the function of attracting pollinators in plants in order to help fertilization occur which is useful for making new seeds.

Flowers rely on bright colors, strong scents, and sweet nectar to attract animals such as birds, butterflies, and other insects to transfer pollen from one flower to another.

In detail, the functions of interest can be divided as follows:

1. The most vital and most important function of flowers is as a tool for plants to carry out generative reproduction.
2. The second function of the flower is to attract birds, butterflies and other insects to land and pollinate.
3. The third flower function is as a place or container for the union of male gametes and female gametes.
4. The function of the fourth flower is to produce seeds.

Of course, besides the four functions of flowers that have been mentioned, flowers also have a function of beauty or aesthetics. Flowers can be used as decoration and enjoy their beauty. Flowers are also suitable as objects used to calm down or relax.

This is because several types of flowers, apart from being beautiful to look at, also smell good, such as lavender, tuberose, and jasmine.

Humans in general also like the beauty of flowers. But the most important thing is that we as humans must always preserve it, not destroy it, and make it extinct.

Flower Parts

To understand the function of flowers in more detail, you also need to know about the complete parts of a flower, which are as follows:

1. Flower stalks

The first part of the flower is the flower stalk. Flower stalks are located at the bottom of the flower. The flower stalk has a function as a link between the flower and the branch. Apart from being a link, flower stalks also have a function as a means of supporting flowers.

2. Flower Base

The second part of the flower is the base of the flower. The base of the flower is located at the bottom of the flower, right above the flower stalk. The base of the flower has a function as a place for attaching the flower crown.

3. Flower Petals

The third part of the flower is the flower petals. The flower petals are located on the outermost part of the flower. The flower petals have a function, which is to protect the flower crown when it is still a bud and will open when the crown has bloomed.

Flower petals usually have a color and shape that resembles a leaf. Each strand of flower petals is called a sepal. In some types of flowers, in addition to the petals, additional petals or commonly known as epicalyx grow.

4. Flower Crown

The fourth part of the flower is the flower crown. The flower crown is located in the second layer and is adjacent to the flower petals. The flower crown serves to attract insects and or other animals to perch which will later help the pollination process.

Apart from its main function to attract the attention of insects and or other animals that will help pollinate, the flower crown also has another function, namely to protect the genitals of the flower before the pollination process takes place.

The flower crown is the most beautiful part of the flower and usually has a bright and striking color. Flower crowns are also often dubbed as flower jewelry. Each strand of flower crown also has its own name, namely petal.

5. Stamens (Male Genitals)

The fifth part of the flower is the stamen. The stamens are usually in the center of the flower corolla. The main function of the stamens is as a breeding tool (male genitalia) of plants.

The stamens are divided into three parts, namely the stamen, the anther, and the connecting chamber of the Sari. The stamen is the thread-shaped part with a cross-section which is generally round in shape, while the anther is the part of the stamen that is found at the end of the stamen.

The function of the stamens can be divided into three parts, namely:

1. Sari stalks

The stamens are part of the stamens which have the function of making the anthers position high enough from the flower crown. The stamens are thread-like in cross section and generally round in shape.

2. Anthers

The anther is the part of the stamen that functions as a place to contain pollen. The position of the anther is above the stalk of the anther. The anthers inside have two sari chambers. Inside the pollen chamber there is pollen.

Pollen is a tool for the generative spread of male cells. This powder is attached to the anthers. This powder will also be carried by insects and other animals and stick to other flowers.

 

3. Liaison of the sari room

The connecting rod for the sari chamber is the stem or tank for the sari gang which has a function as a link between the two parts of the anther which are on the right and the left.

6. Pistil (Female Genital Nature)

The sixth part of the flower is the pistil. The pistil is usually located in the very center of the flower. Pistils have the main function, namely as a means of reproduction (female sex) of plants.

The pistil also has its own parts, namely:

1. Stylized head

The stigma is the part that is at the very top of the pistil. The main function of the stigma is as a place to receive pollen during the pollination process.

2. Pistil stalk

The pistil is the passageway connecting the stigma with the ovary. Aside from being a link, the stigma also has a function to support the stigma so that it can stand straight, sturdy, and stay in its position.

The pistil stalk has a pollen tube which has the function of assisting the fertilization process by delivering pollen to the ovary.

3. Will fruit

Will fruit or can also be referred to as the ovary / ovary is one part of the pistil that rests on the base of the flower. The fruit will enlarge when the pollination process is complete. In the ovary, there is also a carpell/carpellum .

Carpell/carpellum is a fruit leaf where each fruit leaf contains an ovule or what can also be called an ovule/ovulum .

4. Will seeds

The ovule or what is commonly called the ovulum is part of the structure in seed plants that functions to protect as well as being a place for the egg cell to be located. The seeds will later develop into seeds after the fertilization process is complete.

The ovule will be easily seen in groups of plants with open seeds and those covered by ovaries in groups of flowering plants.

Flowers are also one of the organs of plants that need nutrients for their survival. Therefore, in each flower you can find various transport vessels that have the function of providing a food supply for the flower.

Generative Propagation of Plants

Generative reproduction is the process of plant reproduction that takes place by means of pollination and fertilization. This generative type of reproduction can only occur in plants that have reproductive organs such as pistils and stamens.

The Process of Pollination, Generative Breeding

Generative reproduction usually occurs in plants that have seeds. The initial step of generative reproduction must begin with the pollination process. Pollination is the process of dropping or attaching pollen from the stamens to the stigma of a plant.

If the pollination process is successful, then the pollen grains will enter the ovule and fertilization will occur in the ovule. Fertilization is the process of fusion of pollen or male cells with the stigma or female cells. After the pollination process is complete, it will produce new fruit.

In addition, there are several ways in the pollination process. Here’s how to pollinate generative reproduction in plants.

1. Self Pollination

Self-pollination is a pollination process that can only occur if the pollen and stigma are located on the same flower or in other words, the flower pollinates or marries itself.

2. Neighbor Pollination

Neighbor pollination is the pollination process that occurs when the pollen and stigma come from the same tree. Neighbor pollination is almost the same as self pollination, the only difference is that the pollen that lands on the stigma comes from a different flower but still from the same tree.

3. Cross Pollination

Cross pollination is the process of pollination that occurs when pollen grains and anthers come from other flowers and trees. But the tree is always of the same kind. Usually, this pollination can make the characteristics of plants stronger than before.

4. Pollination of the Bastar

The last type of pollination is hybridization or also known as hybridization. Crossbreed pollination is pollination that occurs when the pollination process occurs but the pollen and pistils come from two different types of plant species.

This pollination process if successful can improve the characteristics of plants or can also damage them. This is because the combination of two different types of plant species also has a considerable risk.

Things That Help the Generative Pollination Process

There are several things that can affect the pollination process in plants. These factors can arise from natural activities or from other living things. Here are things that can help the success of the pollination process of plants.

1. Generative Reproduction with the Help of the Wind

The process of pollination or the way in which plants propagate with the help of the wind is known as anemogamy. The characteristics of this generative reproduction process are that it usually occurs in plants that live in areas where there is not too much water and tends to be dry. In addition, the pollen produced is usually dry and the size of the flower crown is relatively smaller.

In this pollination process, the wind will move the plant body so that the stamens can fall to the pistil and the process of pollination occurs in plants. Examples of plants that reproduce or pollinate are usually assisted by the wind, namely grass and corn.

2. Generative reproduction with the help of animals

Breeding or the process of pollination with the help of animals, can also be called zoidiogamy. The main characteristics of plants that reproduce in this way are plants that usually produce nectar, are brightly colored, and have an odor or aroma that animals like.

In this pollination process, plants will bring out their characteristics, whether it’s a bright color or an attractive smell to attract animals. After that, the animals will land which causes the pollen to stick to the animal. Then, the animals will stick to other flowers and spread the pollen that sticks to their bodies so that the pollination process runs smoothly.

An example of a plant that relies on breeding or pollination in this way is the rafflesia arnoldi flower. The Raflesia arnoldi flower will give off an odor that flies really like so it will lure the flies to land. After that, the flies will go to other Rafflesia Arnoldi flowers and attach pollen from the previous flower which results in the pollination process on the Rafflesia Arnoldi flower going faster.

3. Generative propagation with the help of water

The process of generative reproduction can also occur with the help of water or can also be called hydrogamy. Tang plants reproduce in this way, usually have special characteristics, namely; the entire body of the plant is covered by water, the habitat of the plant is also in the water, and the plant has a role as a producer for the animals around it.

This breeding process is common in plants such as algae or sea algae. The process of pollination in algae plants occurs when water washes away the stamens and accidentally attaches them to the pistils of other algae.

4. Generative Reproduction with Human Assistance

In addition to pollination with the help of wind, animals, and also water, there are also plants that can only reproduce generatively with human assistance. This process of reproduction with the help of humans is also commonly referred to as anthropogamy.

Examples of plants that propagate by anthropogamy include vanilla, salak, and also orchids. In orchids, pollination with human assistance is needed because these plants only have one genital organ in one flower. Therefore, to bring together the stamens with pistils requires help from humans.

Benefits of Generative Breeding

Generative reproduction provides several benefits, including:

1. Plants have stronger roots than vegetative propagation.
2. The range of distribution of plants becomes relatively farther.
3. The resulting new individuals have the possibility to have new variations.
4. New plants will have a relatively high adaptability.
5. The plant will have a stronger stem.

Enough of the summary regarding the understanding of the function of the flower stamens, parts, and the method of reproduction. Thank you for visiting, I hope this article on the function of the stamens is useful and can help you.

Character and personality make us unique individuals, but they are not necessarily one and the same aspect of who we are.

Personality represents who we are. It is the whole set of traits, natural tendencies, and beliefs that make us who we are.

When someone uses the word “character”, Sinaumed’s may assume that they mean personality, but that is not always the case.

So, what makes character different from personality, and which one has more of an impact on our overall well-being?

Definition of Character

Quoting the book “Character Matters”, it is said that a Greek philosopher, Heraclitus said, “Character is destiny. Character is said to shape one’s destiny and ultimately the fate of the whole society. “In the character of citizens,” said Cicero, “lies the welfare of the nation.”

Meanwhile, Lance Morrow as an essayist said that character spreads values ​​and is a work of civilization.

On the other hand, Ralph Waldo Emerson emphasized that character is higher than intelligence. Then, psychiatrist Frank Pittman said that the stability of life depends on our character. It is not lust, but character, that makes a marriage long enough to raise children to be mature, responsible, and productive citizens.

It is also said that it is character that enables people to survive, survive, and overcome their misfortunes in a perfect world. Steven Covey said that to do well, we have to do good and to do good, we have to be good first.

Such is character.

Character determines how we act when we think others don’t see us. As the old saying goes, “Character is what you do when no one is looking.”

What if the contents of the character? Kindness is the content of good character. Kindness: honesty, courage, justice, to compassion, becomes a disposition for us to behave morally. For human qualities, character is good objectivity.

Two Sides of Character

The character of life has two sides, namely right behavior in relation to others and right behavior in relation to oneself. A life full of virtues, the contents of which are oriented virtues, be it towards others such as fairness, honesty, gratitude, to love, as well as self-oriented such as humility, self-control, fortitude, and trying your best instead of giving in to laziness.

We need to control ourselves to do the right thing for others.

Positive & Negative Characteristics, and Examples

Mentioned in the book “Understanding People: Communication Tactics Strategies Based on Personality”, in fact there is no such thing as a positive or negative character in general. Character is our innate form when we were children.

Usually, every individual has two contradictory characters, namely positive and negative characters. The reason is, positive character can help us succeed in life, while negative character is a character that hinders the success of our life.

Behaviors that lead to mental strength are identified below (Morin, 2013):

• Mentally strong people don’t feel sorry for themselves; instead, they are in charge of their own lives.
• They do not give their power to others and thus maintain control over their emotions.
• Individuals with mental toughness accept change and are open to being flexible.
• Control is placed over things under the person’s influence, such as their attitudes.
• Pleasing everyone is not a priority. While being kind and fair is important, making everyone happy is not.
• There is a motivation to take calculated risks.
• Mentally strong people focus on the present and make plans for the future.
• Mentally strong people try to make better decisions in the future and try not to repeat previous missteps.
• They show an ability to appreciate and celebrate the success of others.
• They don’t give up after failing; instead, they keep trying until they get it right.
• Mentally strong people tolerate being alone and remaining silent.
• They don’t feel that the world owes them anything; instead, they create opportunities for themselves by capitalizing on their own talents and strengths.
• Real change takes time, and mentally strong individuals understand this, so they are patient.

The opposite of the characteristics of being open-minded, calm, conscientious, and agreeable are those defined by judgment, neuroticism, and an external locus of control. Some of the behaviors that fall into this category are:

• Inability to accept setbacks
• Lack of clarity and decision making
• Low capacity for critical thinking
• Failing to build strong interpersonal relationships
• Always be in the comfort zone
• Helplessness and lack of persistence
• Tendency to lean towards pessimism
• Weak imagination and inability to visualize the desired results (Cardone, 2011)

Definition of Personality

Human personality is a complex thing and difficult to define. However, we can easily see that personality is an invisible structure that can affect the way a person interacts with other people and the environment, when he sees it.

A continuous and consistent process throughout life forms personality. It can also influence the way decisions are made.

Before considering work ability, we tend to consider a person’s personality first. This is often seen in the business world, when many leaders place a person based on their likes and dislikes, not their abilities.

Personality Formula

Our basic character has begun to be formed from the age of under five years. Robert Driscoll in the book “Life Style Assessment” as quoted from “Understanding People: Communication Tactics Strategies Based on Personality” states that character reactions which are characteristic of each person ( life styles ) are formulated before the age of 5 years.

Once the framework is chosen, all experiences will be subjectively interpreted within that framework. This shows that education and upbringing in the family form the basic character that will carry over into adulthood.

Furthermore, the basic character will usually start to get external influences from various sources after we pass the age of 5 years. For example, from experience, education, values, to beliefs.

Even so, the basic character will still exist and cannot be lost, no matter how big the influence of our environment is. Even if you don’t see it anymore, it’s because the basic character is only covered by environmental influences, it doesn’t really disappear.

Differences in Character and Personality

In the world of psychology, when we think about the Self, our personality is everything. It is “us” from top to bottom: all the behaviors, interests, thoughts, beliefs, experiences, and traits that make us unique in this world.

Most modern personality models agree that the foundation of personality is our biology. Experience and environment helped us to develop other aspects of personality since then.

In other words, we are not born with a particular personality. It changes and adapts constantly, especially during the first 2 decades of life. After that, changes are unlikely or not that significant.

But if we weren’t born with our personality, how would our behavior and reactions as a baby develop?

Modern personality theory suggests personality begins with innate temperament. Over time, we develop character as we engage in everyday experiences, and this is how our personality develops.

Character and temperament mix and contribute to our personality traits, but not all of them.

More Important Character or Personality?

Character is one aspect of personality. It can affect major areas of life, such as work, social circles, activism, and crime. It may determine many of our life choices.

It is also important in determining the outcome of personal goals and relationships.

Character can be seen as the essence, while personality is how we express that essence. In this sense, they are interdependent.

Launching Psychcentral, research shows that personality, especially certain temperament features, may be important for mental and physical health.

In 2014, research found that people with the core personality trait of conscientiousness were more likely to be in better physical health at age 38 than people without the personality trait.

A population-based Swedish study from 2017 noted a high score of the personality trait neuroticism was associated with an increased risk of cardiovascular death.

Dispositional optimism was shown to positively influence mental health in a 2020 cross-sectional study with adolescents, whereas neuroticism was associated with adverse mental health effects in the same study.

In this sense, Sinaumed’s’ personality traits may have a stronger influence on overall health, but character traits can influence everyday and important life decisions.

Character Traits and Personality

While character and personality are both used to describe the behavior of a person, they examine different aspects of the individual. A person’s personality is more visible, while a person’s character is revealed from time to time, through various situations, as quoted from Positivepsychology .

While personality is easier to identify, it is largely static and slow to develop. In contrast, characters take longer to view but are easier to transform. That’s because character is shaped by belief, and with enough effort and motivation, changing one’s outlook and view of the world can lead to changes in one’s character.

Character flexibility makes sense when we look at human evolution. In order for our ancestors to survive, they had to adapt to new environments and change over time, and this is still true in the modern era.

If a person perceives changes in their environment as significant, then their beliefs will change to accommodate those changes.

For example, someone who may have a shy personality could learn to change their attitude toward public speaking while acting as a teacher. New social and external demands cause internal shifts that change their attitudes.

In this way, even though an individual’s innate preference is to stay away from the public, the beliefs and values ​​that shape their behavior can evolve to reflect the values ​​of their immediate group and community. Such awareness and adaptability help survival (Kurtus, 2011).

The point is that, despite the importance of innate personality traits, we can deal with them as personal or cultural demands require.

Personality Test Models

Nowadays, there is a widespread use of psychological test models that are used personally and simply, such as the MBTI, for us to try to identify ourselves. Here are two other personality test models that you must know!

• The Big Five, OCEAN

Perhaps the most comprehensive and science-backed personality test is the Big Five.

Goldberg’s Five Personality Factors (OCEAN)

Unlike the popular (but debated) Myers-Briggs Type Indicator (MBTI), this assessment does not divide people into personality profiles, instead analyzing individuals based on the most common traits found in the global community. The traits are easy to remember, as they can be spelled with the acronym OCEAN.

OCEAN stands for:

• openness:

It describes the individual’s love for new experiences. Those who score high in this aspect tend to be more creative. Meanwhile, individuals with lower scores tend to be more conservative and prefer routine.

• Conscientiousness:

It shows a person’s tendency to organize. Those with high scores are seen as motivated, disciplined, and trustworthy. A lower score indicates someone who is less responsible and more likely to be distracted.

• Extroversion:

This factor shows how cheerful and communicative a person is. If someone scores high on extroversion , they tend to be social and more likely to achieve their goals. A low score indicates someone who is introverted and more subject to authority.

• Agreeableness:

This trait describes the way a person interacts with the people around him. A high score indicates that a person is warm and friendly. Those who tend to be more egocentric and suspicious (or even shy) generally score lower.

• Neuroticism:

Emotional stability can say a lot about a person’s likelihood of developing moodiness and anxiety. A high score on neuroticism indicates someone who lacks confidence, and a low score describes someone who is calm and confident (Westerhoff, 2008).

• PEN models

Developed by Hans and Sybil Eysenck in 1975, this model looks at the biological factors that trigger or influence personality. The three main characteristics examined by this model are psychoticism, extroversion, and neuroticism (Waude, 2017).

The origins of this model date back to the 1960s, but it did not originally measure psychoticism (which is related to measures of compassion, morality, and creativity). The older model uses the Eysenck Personality Inventory to collect and analyze results.

With the addition of psychoticism, the questions were updated and the tool for collecting these results was renamed the Eysenck Personality Questionnaire.

Each trait category explores the following human behaviors:

• Psychoticism:

People who score high on this measure often participate in hostile, reckless, inconsiderate, inappropriate, tough-minded, and impulsive behavior. Higher testosterone levels are associated with higher scores in this area.

• Extroversion:

Individuals with high levels of extroversion are more outgoing and talkative, and they crave external stimulation. Higher stimulation usually occurs as a result of increased cortical arousal and can be measured through skin conductance, brain waves, or perspiration.

• Neuroticism:

Those with high levels of neuroticism are more prone to depression and anxiety. These traits are activated by the sympathetic nervous system, which is also responsible for the fight-or-flight response. This can be measured through heart rate, blood pressure, cold hands, sweating and muscle tension.

This is a review regarding character and personality, which we hope can help Sinaumed’s become even more #MoreWithReading. Don’t forget to visit and read related quality books purchased through sinaumedia.com !

Author: Sevilla Nouval Evanda

Reference:

Books (via sinaumedia Digital):

• Character Matters
• Understanding-ing People: Personality Based Communication Tactics Strategies

Internet:

• https://psychcentral.com/health/character-vs-personality
• https://positivepsychology.com/character-traits/

The stomach is a muscular organ located on the left side of the upper abdomen. Food that enters through the mouth will go through the esophagus to get to the stomach. When food reaches the end of the esophagus it enters the stomach through a muscular valve known as the lower esophageal valve.

The stomach secretes acids and enzymes to digest food. The stomach muscles contract periodically to churn food and promote digestion. Launching from the Halodoc.com page, the stomach has four functions.

Among them process food with the help of acids and enzymes, the stomach breaks down food into small particles. Second, the stomach functions to store food. Not all food that enters the stomach will be processed at that time. Part of the food consumed will be stored.

Third, sorting and getting rid of harmful substances. The stomach produces an acid known as hydrochloric acid. The function of the acidic liquid is not only to help break down food, but also to sort and get rid of harmful substances or microbes in food.

Fourth, the stomach functions to absorb substances that are good for the body. The stomach also produces other substances that make it easier for the body to absorb good substances, for example vitamin B12. Stomach health must be maintained so that the body’s health is also stable. Especially the intake of food and drinks that enter the body.

Characteristics of a Stress Stomach

The stomach can experience stress, its main feature is the presence of digestive disorders that are not caused by conditions in the stomach, such as emotional changes, including stress and anxiety. Treatment is also related to the management of stress, anxiety, and tension.

In an article entitled Stress and the Gut: Pashipatology and Treatment by Peter C. Konturek, et al revealed that stress can trigger digestive disorders, especially the intestines. Not only that, stress also causes symptoms of stomach disease.

Launching from the Kumparan.com page, the following are the characteristics of stomach stress experienced by someone who has digestive disorders due to anxiety.

• Tingling in the stomach
• Tightness, turbulence, cramps in the abdomen
• Feeling nervous or anxious
• Shaking, shivering, and muscle twitching
• Stomach often feels bloated
• The onset of abdominal pain, nausea, or vomiting
• Experiencing indigestion
• It’s easy to feel full quickly
• Stomach feels bloated and warm
• Increased urination and defecation

A stressed stomach can develop into several diseases including stomach cramps, diarrhea, changes in appetite, nausea and vomiting, and constipation. Therefore, to relieve stomach stress, Sinaumed’s needs to break down stress, adjust diet and lifestyle.

 

Causes of Stomach Stress

Hormonal changes have the potential to impact the stomach. The digestive tract has a special nervous system known as the enteric nervous system. Nerve endings in the stomach will respond to stress hormones released by the brain.

In that condition, the stomach has the potential to receive stress hormones which can cause indigestion. Summarizing from the Kumparan.com page, here are some of the causes of stomach stress that are commonly felt by sufferers.

• Activities that can trigger increased stress levels, such as tests or presentations
• Financial Problem
• Personal issues, such as relationships, family, divorce, and friendships
• Changes in conditions at work or home environment
• Death of a loved one
• Chronic disease

Handling Gastric Stress

Stomach stress must be treated immediately for long-term health. Summarizing from the Kumparan.com and Orami.co.id pages, here are some ways to deal with stomach stress.

1. Therapy

If Sinaumed’s is unable to handle stress on his own, it is advisable to see an expert, either a psychologist or a psychiatrist. They will help Sinaumed’s deal with stress in a professional manner. Not only that, the therapist will help identify triggers and how to deal with stress appropriately.

2. Drug Therapy

It’s not uncommon for someone to need medication to calm down, reduce anxiety, and depression. This also affects stomach stress which will get better.

3. Regulating Diet

Regulating diet can be done by limiting what goes into the body. In particular, foods and drinks that exacerbate stomach stress, such as products that contain milk and caffeine. How to regulate the diet of one individual to another individual is different.

4. Doing Stress Relieving Activities

Various positive activities can be done to reduce stress, including sports, journaling, listening to music, reading, chatting with friends, writing, or other activities. However, some other people relieve stress by doing their daily schedule.

5. Meditation, Practicing Breathing, and Mindfulness

Meditation is a powerful way to reduce anxiety and stress by increasing focus and self-awareness. When meditating, Sinaumed’s will sit or lie down in a quiet room and focus on breathing. Some people do 10-15 minutes of meditation a day to reduce the symptoms of stomach distress.

6. Consumption of Natural Medicines

By consuming natural remedies, such as ginger mixed with tea, it can be a supplement that helps relieve symptoms of mild digestive disorders, including nausea. Not only that, drinking peppermint tea or applying eucalyptus oil can also be aromatherapy which helps reduce stomach symptoms of stress.

7. Use a Diffuser with Essential Oils

Essential oils can be used as air fresheners as well as help relieve anxiety. Sinaumed’s can use a diffuser with relaxing essential oils such as lavender, chamomile, vetiver, rose, or another type of essential oil.

8. Relax For A While

Everyone needs time and a place to relax or take a break. Various activities can be carried out, for example taking a walk alone, chatting with colleagues, family, friends, or anyone, watching movies, and other activities.

 

Stomach Acid that Makes Mouth Taste Sour and Bitter

When the pit of the stomach hurts, it does not only indicate heartburn. This could indicate stomach acid or gastroesophageal reflux disease  (GERD). GERD itself is a condition that can cause pain in the pit of the stomach,  heartburn,  and various other symptoms in the lower chest and stomach area.

A person with GERD will experience mild acid reflux, at least twice a week. Meanwhile, they also have the potential to experience severe disturbances, at least once a week. Therefore, medication and/or lifestyle changes are needed to reduce the intensity of stomach acid.

In general, a person who experiences increased stomach acid is characterized by a sour or bitter taste in the mouth, a burning or burning sensation in the chest and solar plexus. These symptoms will get worse when the patient bends over, after eating, or lying down.

Launching from the  Alodokter.com page. GERD symptoms do just that. Here are some other symptoms that can accompany GERD.

• Respiratory problems, such as coughing and shortness of breath. People who have asthma will often relapse when GERD symptoms recur.
• Hoarseness.
• Nausea and vomiting.
• Sore throat.
• Expulsion of stomach contents involuntarily.
• Difficulty swallowing or feeling like you have a lump in your throat.
• Sleep disorders.
• Bad breath.
• Tooth decay due to frequent exposure to stomach acid.

GERD is often confused with a heart attack. This is because both of them cause a burning sensation in the chest and pain in the pit of the stomach. However, the two can still be distinguished.

A heart attack is characterized by heartburn or chest pain that is so severe that it radiates to the neck, arms or jaw, and appears after physical activity.

Meanwhile, GERD is characterized by heartburn accompanied by a sour taste in the mouth. It is not exacerbated by physical activity. It also doesn’t spread to the neck or arms, and it gets worse when you lie down.

Meanwhile, how to deal with stomach acid or GERD, as published on the  Alodokter.com  page as follows.

• Lose weight, if you are overweight.
• Do not smoke.
• Elevates head while sleeping.
• Do not lie down or sleep for at least 2 to 3 hours after eating.
• Avoid foods or drinks that trigger acid reflux, spicy and fatty foods, chocolate, mint and coffee.
• Don’t wear clothes that are too tight.

Disorders of the Stomach

Stomach health must be a concern because if you are sick it will cause the body to lack nutrition and interfere with daily activities. Launching from the page Alodokter.com, here are some gastric diseases.

1. Gastritis

Gastritis or inflammation of the stomach wall is divided into two types, namely acute and chronic gastritis. There are various triggers for gastritis, such as long-term use of non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs, excessive alcohol consumption, and the presence of autoimmune diseases.

Some people who suffer from gastritis do not feel any symptoms. However, the most common symptoms that occur in people with gastritis are vomiting, nausea, hiccups, pain in the pit of the stomach, and defecation with black stools. If not taken seriously it will cause more serious diseases, such as stomach cancer, stomach bleeding, and peptic ulcers.

2. Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD)

Gastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD) or also known as gastric acid disease is a condition in which food or drink that has been mixed with stomach acid rises back up into the esophagus. Thus, a sour or bitter taste appears in the mouth and a burning sensation in the chest.

GERD sufferers can experience nausea, sore throat, vomiting, and difficulty sleeping. If left untreated in the long term, it will cause irritation and bleeding of the esophagus and even esophageal cancer.

3. Stomach Ulcers

Gastric ulcers are sores caused by erosion of the walls of the stomach or small intestine. However, in general, peptic ulcers are caused by infection with the bacterium Helicobacter pylori or excessive consumption of anti-inflammatory drugs, such as aspirin and ibuprofen.

Symptoms that arise in patients with gastric ulcers are nausea, frequent belching, flatulence, heartburn, and even vomiting blood. Some symptoms can get worse when sufferers experience stress, consume excessively spicy or sour foods, smoke, and drink alcoholic beverages.

4. Stomach Cancer

Gastric cancer rarely causes specific symptoms in its early stages. Thus, it is often only detected when entering an advanced stage. The cause of stomach cancer itself is not known with certainty. However, there are several things that can trigger it, such as obesity, consumption of unhealthy foods, smoking, rarely exercising, consuming alcohol, and so on.

5. Gastroparesis

One of the tasks of the stomach muscles is to push food or drink into the small intestine. However, in people with gastroparesis, the stomach muscles are not able to work optimally so that the process of digesting food becomes slow.

Gastroparesis is usually accompanied by several complaints including feeling full quickly when eating, flatulence, nausea, heartburn, and vomiting food that has not been completely digested.

The cause of this disease is not known with certainty, but it is strongly suspected that gastroparesis is caused by damage to the nerves that control the stomach muscles. This disease will be more at risk of occurring in people with certain health problems, such as diabetes, scleroderma, and amyloidosis.

 

Book Recommendations for Maintaining Body Health

Maintaining a healthy body is a must for everyone. The following are book recommendations and summaries that can be used as a reference or guide to maintaining a healthy body.

1. Towards a Healthy and Longevity Life

In the Blue Zones there are many people who have reached the age of 100 and over (supercentenarians), live in good health and are active and productive. They do not do a special diet, nor do they take supplements as advertised today. Then, what is the secret of their longevity? This book clearly explains the tips for supercentenarians to have a healthy and long life. This book is also equipped with health knowledge as a guide to being healthy, and about the 15 types of diseases that we most often encounter. Also presented is a list of “healthy foods”, to help you be healthy and live a long life.

2. Heal, Healthy, and Longevity

God allows humans to live to be 120 years old (Gen. 6:3). Scientific research also proves that if health. managed properly, we can live long and stay healthy. In Psalm 90:10 it even says, “Our life span is seventy years and if we are strong, eighty years.”

Longevity is a gift from God, but living a healthy life is the responsibility of every child of God because it involves the human lifestyle, including eating patterns and habits. The Bible is God’s voice, a guide for the lives of believers, instructions for us to walk in His design and enjoy this life. The author believes that disease should not occur or can at least be prevented, everything depends on the efforts of humans in managing their bodies. The success of the project “The body is in your hands, so be a good CEO or manager of a ‘body health company’.”

This book is written for everyone, human beings created by God, His beloved treasure, whether in good health or diseased. Learn the basic principles of health taught through the living word of God, so that you can not only avoid illness, but can experience healing, become healthy again, and live a long life. The writer’s longing is for everyone to be healthy, happy and productive. For God’s Kingdom in heaven to manifest in your life on earth.

3. Healthy Living, Soaring Performance

Who is not tempted to be an office person? Clear income, neat clothes, and working in air-conditioned rooms are certainly the main attraction for some people. But, make no mistake! Many diseases and health problems that always threaten office workers. However, you also don’t have to be afraid to become an office person, because this book offers many solutions for you.

4. Healthy Diet Without Hunger

“Healthy Diet Without Hunger” is a book of tips so that someone can go on a diet without feeling hungry and stay healthy. This book is one of Kurniasih’s works. When losing weight is not just a matter of making the body more pleasing to the eye. A body that is too fat or obese can increase the risk of various diseases, such as high blood pressure, diabetes, heart disease, stroke, and cancer.

How to lose weight by resisting the urge to eat is not effective. When you eat too little, the body will experience a lack of nutrients, and sometimes also a lack of fluids. This condition can make you weak, even sick. In addition, this wrong way of dieting actually makes the body store more calorie reserves in the form of fat, so you don’t lose weight. So that efforts to lose weight are more effective and don’t actually make you sick, do the right and healthy weight loss.

This book will guide you to diet in a healthy way. Follow the guidelines in this book, guaranteed you will get the ideal weight and perfect body shape without having to torture yourself. Even in this book you will find how you can still eat well while on a diet. Let’s read this book to find out how to have a healthy diet without torturing the body!

5. The Owner’s Manual Diet

Between your full-length mirror and high-school biology class, you probably think you know a lot about the human body. While it’s true that we live in an age when we’re as obsessed with our bodies as we are with celebrity hairstyles, the reality is that most of us know very little about what chugs, churns, and thumps throughout this miraculous, scientific, and artistic system of anatomy. Yes, you’ve owned your skin-covered shell for decades, but you probably know more about your cell-phone plan than you do about your own body.

When it comes to your longevity and quality of life, understanding your internal systems gives you the power, authority and ability to live a healthier, younger and better life. The flagship book of the bestsellers, has now been expanded and updated to make you understand your body even better, perhaps too well. challenges your preconceived notions about how the human body works and ages, then takes you on a tour through all of the highways, back roads, and landmarks inside of you.

In this update, the doctors have included a new chapter on the liver and pancreas, which will finally demystify the most exotic parts of our bodies; a new workout chapter that will finally get you moving; and nearly one hundred Q&As asked by you, the reader. It has also been updated throughout to give you up-to-the-minute know-how to not only understand what to do to keep fit, but also why and how.

The book opens with a quiz, How Well Do You Know Your Body? which sets the stage for the following chapters. After taking the quiz, you’ll learn about all of your blood-pumping, food-digesting, and key-remembering systems and organs, including the heart, brain, lungs, immune system, bones, and sensory organs. Each chapter also contains common myths of the particular body part that the authors will debunk. Just as important, you’ll get the facts and advice you need to keep your body running long and strong. You’ll find out how diseases start and how they affect your body as well as advice on how to prevent and beat conditions that threaten your quality of life.

Complete with exercise tips, nutritional guidelines, simple lifestyle changes, and alternative approaches, gives you an easy, comprehensive, and life-changing how-to plan for fending off the gremlins of aging. To top it off, this new edition includes even more great-tasting and calorie-saving recipes as part of the Owner’s Manual Diet an eating plan that is designed with only one goal in mind: to help you live a younger life. Welcome to your body. Why don’t you come on in and take a look around?

Characteristics of Rising Stomach Acid – Increased stomach acid or also known as gastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD) can be marked by the appearance of several symptoms. One of the symptoms that characterizes this condition is the appearance of a feeling of heat and discomfort in the chest. This condition can occur to anyone, both children and adults. It is important to understand what characterizes stomach acid rising .

Stomach acid that rises into the esophagus can cause a burning sensation in the area inside the chest or what is also known as heartburn . This condition is commonly referred to as GERD. There are various symptoms or factors that can be a sign of this condition.

Although this disease does not cause death, it does not mean it can be underestimated. If not handled properly, this condition will cause various health complications. Therefore, it is very important to immediately take action to treat GERD. So, what are the characteristics of increased stomach acid? Check out the following article!

Recognize the Characteristics of Rising Stomach Acid

It’s best for Sinaumed’s not to underestimate the condition of chest pain which can cause a burning feeling or heartburn that appears after consuming food or drink with a high caffeine content. It could be that this condition is a factor that causes stomach acid to rise. In fact, acid reflux disease is often misinterpreted as a heart disease because the main symptoms of the two conditions are almost the same, namely pain in the chest.

This condition can occur because acidic substances from the stomach rise up to the esophagus. This will cause the walls of the esophagus to the mouth to experience irritation. When this happens, there will be a burning and burning sensation in the chest or heartburn and discomfort in the abdomen. This condition will be increasingly felt when the sufferer consumes food and or lies down.

Quoted from the American Academy of Allergy Asthma and Immunology, apart from heartburn and a sour taste in the mouth, there are other signs that are characteristic of increased stomach acid, such as feeling full more easily, burping more often, sore throat, vomiting, nausea, excessive saliva production, bad breath, and experiencing a dry cough.

However, this condition is still considered normal if it does not occur for several days, only occurs 1–2 times in a period of one month, after consuming spicy and fatty foods, and symptoms appear after consuming large amounts of food.

GERD can be a sign of a health problem. This causes symptoms to occur over a long period of time, cramps appear, causing vomiting mixed with blood, pain up to the jaw, and accompanied by shortness of breath. Sinaumed’s can immediately do an examination at the nearest hospital to handle the complaint he is experiencing.

Weakening of the muscles in the esophagus is in fact one of the reasons why a person can experience GERD. In people with gastric acid, the muscles cannot close tightly, causing stomach acid to rise back up and into the esophagus.

Not only lifestyle and diet, in fact increased stomach acid can also be caused by several diseases such as gastroparesis, scleroderma, and hiatal hernia.

To prevent the risk of this disease, try to adopt a healthy lifestyle every day, eat foods that don’t trigger a sore throat, and complete your nutritional intake with the help of additional supplements.

Habits That Can Trigger Stomach Acid

There are many things that people with stomach acid must know about their disease. The reason is, there are various habits that can trigger the appearance of stomach acid and even make it worse, making the stomach feel sore and painful. Acid reflux disease or  gastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD) can make sufferers experience pain in the solar plexus. A person who has GERD can also experience pain, heat, and a burning sensation in the chest that can radiate up to the neck.

So, what are the habits that can trigger the emergence of gastric acid?

1. Often eat sour fruits and vegetables

The fruits and vegetables in question are the types that cause stomach acid. Therefore, try to avoid oranges, lemons, grapes, and any fruit that is acidic in nature. Also, avoid tomatoes and salads that are added with vinegar. Remember, this type of fruit and vegetables can trigger stomach acid, especially when consumed on an empty stomach.

2. Like Food and Beverages Containing Gas

Simply put, Sinaumed’s needs to avoid foods that can cause or exacerbate heartburn symptoms. One of them, avoid consuming various foods and drinks that contain gas and too much fiber. For example, mustard greens, jackfruit, Ambon banana, cabbage, kedondong, and dried fruit.

3. Excessive portions

For Sinaumed’s who often eat excessive portions, it feels like they need to be more vigilant. Because when the stomach is filled to the brim, it is possible that the food in the stomach will press on the diaphragm. This condition can eventually make the person experience shallow breathing or shortness of breath. Not only that, a fully filled stomach can also trigger food to rise back up into the esophagus.

Besides being able to make the stomach full and work extra, eating in excess amounts can trigger problems in the digestive system. Well, this condition can cause symptoms of bloating, feeling full, nausea, and even abdominal pain.

4. Coffee Habits

Drinking coffee is a common habit that is often done by many people, but you have to be careful because this drink can stimulate gastric acid production. Actually, it’s not only coffee that people with ulcers should avoid, drinks, such as fruit juices and full cream milk , also need to be avoided.

5. Vinegar and Spicy

There are also spicy or vinegary foods that are also included in the food group that can trigger stomach acid. People with gastritis should be wary of this spicy food because it can irritate the inner lining of the esophagus and cause pain in the pit of the stomach.

Besides that, there are also foods that are a source of carbohydrates and should be avoided by ulcer sufferers, namely noodles, vermicelli, glutinous rice, corn, sweet potatoes, taro, and dodol.

6. Lie down after eating

Have a habit of lying down after eating? Watch out for this habit can make stomach acid rise to the esophagus. When lying down the body no longer has gravity to help keep stomach contents in the stomach. When lying down, the food consumed will actually be at risk of leaking and passing through the esophageal sphincter. Therefore, avoid lying down immediately after eating to prevent stomach acid from rising.

7. Frequently Eat Fatty Foods

Foods of this type can trigger an increase in stomach acid pressure. Try to avoid fatty foods such as beef, French fries, potato chips, milk, ice cream, cheese, and other oily foods.

• Overweight (obesity).
• Experiencing a hiatus hernia, which is a condition when the top of the stomach enters the chest cavity.
• Connective tissue disorders, such as scleroderma.
• Stomach emptying delay.

While the factors that can exacerbate stomach acid conditions, namely:

• Eat too late.
• Drink drinks that can trigger stomach acid such as alcohol.
• Certain drugs, such as aspirin.

Dangers of Stomach Acid Disease

If acid reflux disease is not treated immediately completely, complications in the form of inflammation of the esophagus or esophagus can occur. Over time, chronic inflammation can develop and cause the following complications:

1. Narrowing of the esophagus (esophageal stricture)

Inflammation that occurs in the esophagus can cause scar tissue to form. Then, the scar tissue will narrow the food pathways which causes sufferers to have difficulty swallowing.

2. Open sores in the esophagus (esophageal ulcers)

Stomach acid can wear away tissue in the esophagus and cause sores to open. Esophageal ulcers can bleed which will eventually cause pain, so the sufferer will find it difficult to swallow food.

3. Precancerous changes in the esophagus (Barrett’s esophagus)

Damage to the esophagus from reflux of stomach acid can cause changes in the tissue that lines the esophagus at the bottom. These changes will result in an increased risk of esophageal cancer.

Seeing the danger of stomach acid which is quite serious as previously explained, Sinaumed’s is advised to visit a doctor immediately if you experience symptoms of stomach acid, so that you can get the right treatment. Acid reflux disease can actually be overcome with lifestyle changes and over-the-counter generic drugs. However, some people with severe GERD may need stronger medications or even surgery to relieve symptoms.

Safe Foods For Stomach Acid Sufferers

There are various factors that trigger stomach acid to rise into the esophagus, one of which is food. Fruits that contain acids, foods with high fat content, spicy foods, and chocolate are examples of foods that can trigger acid reflux.

If you look around, these foods are usually liked by many people, but people with stomach acid should avoid it because it will risk a recurrence of GERD. When stomach acid rises, sufferers will experience nausea, vomiting, flatulence, the appearance of a burning sensation in the stomach, and even food can rise back up into the esophagus.

The way to avoid these various symptoms is that people with stomach acid must pay attention to the food they eat. The following are healthy foods that are safe for consumption by people with stomach acid, namely:

1. Ginger

The following spice plants not only provide warmth, but can also reduce the risk of stomach acid symptoms. Reporting from Healthline, ginger has anti-inflammatory properties to treat various digestive problems and is a natural remedy for stomach acid and ulcers. Sinaumed’s can consume ginger by grating or cutting it, then processing it into a warm drink. This drink is useful for relieving symptoms of stomach acid disease.

2. Aloe Vera

If you hear the sentence aloe vera, Sinaumed’s surely imagines its use in the field of facial beauty. Apparently, the benefits of aloe vera also have properties as a natural healer, one of which is for stomach acid. Aloe vera can be consumed in the form of a drink or converted into a thickening liquid or clot.

3. Oatmeals

Other types of food that are also recommended for people with stomach acid are foods that are rich in fiber, such as oatmeal. Oatmeal is often consumed by people who are on a diet because it gives a longer feeling of fullness. For people with stomach acid, oatmeal can overcome the symptoms of the disease by absorbing stomach acid, so the symptoms can subside.

4. Bananas

Sinaumed’s who has stomach acid disease is also recommended to eat bananas regularly. Bananas have a pH content of around 5.6 and are good for neutralizing stomach acid. Apart from bananas, other fruits that are recommended for consumption are apples, pears and melons.

5. Green Vegetables

Talking about healthy food is certainly not far from vegetables. Examples of vegetables that are recommended for people with stomach acid are broccoli, cauliflower, potatoes, cucumbers, lettuce, beans, and asparagus. These vegetables have a high fiber content and contain ingredients that are able to reduce stomach acid.

6. Lean Meat

Meat that has a high fat content is often a trigger for stomach acid to rise. That is why, people with stomach acid should choose meat that is low in fat or fish which is easy for the stomach to digest properly. For Sinaumed’s who suffer from stomach acid, choose low-fat meat without skin or meat that is prepared by boiling, steaming, baking or baking.

7. Bread

According to a study from the Cleveland Clinic, people with stomach acid are still allowed to eat bread. However, the recommended type of bread is bread made from wheat or made with various kinds of grains in it. This is because this type of bread is rich in vitamins, fiber, and nutrients that are good for stomach health.

How to Lower Stomach Acid Without Medication

Quoted from WebMD, the following are simple tips that can help relieve stomach acid:

• Avoid eating foods that can trigger reflux. Avoid certain foods that trigger heartburn, such as soda, caffeine, chocolate, oranges, tomatoes, onions, mint, and foods with a high fat content.
• Eat more fiber. Fiber can help the digestive tract work healthily and smoothly.
• Set meal portions. Avoid eating large portions at once. Try to eat five or six small meals a day.
• Don’t eat before bed. The habit of eating before bed is often the cause of increased stomach acid. Stop eating at least two or three hours before going to bed so your stomach has a chance to empty before Sinaumed’s
• Eat slowly. Don’t eat in a hurry.
• Do not smoke. Smoking can reduce the effectiveness of the muscles that are used to keep acid in the stomach. So, stop smoking if you don’t want stomach acid to recur.
• Wear loose clothing. Tight clothing generally puts additional pressure on the stomach.
• Raise your head. Stack a few pillows under the bed so that your head is about 6 inches higher.

• What is Tipsy? and How to Get Rid of Tipsy
• Understanding what is a dilep and how to get rid of it for women!
• What is Fungal Acne? Check out the Causes, and How to Prevent It!
• Causes of Sudden Vertigo and How to Handle it
• 8+ Benefits of Oatmeal for Body Health

Reasons Why We Have to Save Water – As we know that water is a necessity for all living things. Even though the stock or supply of water looks abundant and you can get water easily from PAM water, gallon water, or well water, that doesn’t mean you can use that water as you please. The water on Earth has its own cycle which is commonly called the water cycle. This water cycle is a cycle that continuously occurs in water and in short the water cycle will start from evaporation, condensation, then precipitation.

Evaporation or vaporization will usually occur in the sea, because as quoted from the United States Geological Survey Institute through the official website of LPPM IPB that as much as 72 percent of the Earth’s surface is covered by water, 97 percent of that water is salty and is in the form of water in the sea. Hence, the reason why we have to save water.

Why Should We Save Water?

Below are some reasons why we should save water, including:

1. Fresh Water on Earth Only Amounts to 3 percent of the Total Existing Water

On this Earth, there is only about 3 percent left which is fresh water, which is not all suitable for us to consume, to eat, drink, bathe, and so on. In fact, of the total 3 percent of fresh water on Earth, most of it, namely 77.3 percent, is in the form of ice at the top of mountains and the other 22.4 percent is in the form of infiltration land that humans cannot reach because it is too deep underground.

2. Most Freshwater Is Polluted

Of the many fresh waters that we can reach, it turns out that not all of them are fit for our consumption. The higher the level of pollution from humans on the availability of water they need, it actually makes the supply of water suitable for consumption dwindling. According to the Directorate General of Pollution Control and Environmental Damage of the Ministry of Environment and Forestry (KLHK), quoted from National Geographic Indonesia, in 2015, almost 68 percent or most of the quality of river water in 33 provinces in Indonesia is in the status of heavily polluted.

3. Indonesia is predicted to have a water crisis in 2025

Have you ever heard that several areas in Indonesia lack clean water? During the dry season, generally these conditions will get worse. There are many factors that cause clean water to not be available in Indonesia apart from the dry season. In some areas even water is scarce and expensive. The poor water distribution system, especially in remote villages, makes this happen.

Given these conditions, it is not an exaggeration if the World Water Forum II (World Water Forum) in The Hague in March 2000 predicted that Indonesia would be one of the countries that would experience a water crisis in 2025.

4. Mindset of Water Use

Because we all already know how rare and also expensive clean water is, we can make it the mindset that the drops of water we use are money. Clean water is not a free material and requires sacrifice to get it. If you have to value money, then you also need to value clean water.

5. The Uses Are Unlimited

We will certainly use water every day in life and in almost all activities such as bathing, drinking, washing, cooking, and countless other activities. In essence, we need water for the various activities and habits that we do regularly. If we want to continue to keep our bodies healthy and clean, we must conserve water.

6. Water Can Grow Food

Vegetables and fruits and other products certainly need water to grow. However, if the land experiences drought and drought, how will the food grow? This can make living sustainably a difficult challenge as drought-stricken sectors will be rendered useless as any crop will not be able to grow. Without water, the inhabitants of Earth will also die of thirst and hunger.

7. Water Protects Ecosystems and Wildlife

Not only us who need water, almost all species on Earth need water to survive. Without water, life in the water such as fish that live in the river will not have a chance to survive. It is very important for us to save water for the sake of the sustainability of future generations.

8. Saving water equals saving expenses

By saving water, it will allow us to save more expenses. Especially in terms of water bills that use tap water. For users of water pump machines, saving water is one way to save on electricity bills. By practicing these basic water conservation tips, we can save more than hundreds and thousands of water every year.

9. Water Supply Is Limited

Currently, the availability of fresh water is limited. Of the 70 percent of available water, only 0.03 percent consists of fresh water. Every day, the population of living things increases, this makes the limited amount of water less and less. To be able to save the future of water conservation, we must learn to conserve the limited resources we have.

10. Saving Water Equals Saving Energy

Pumping water from a central facility would require a large amount of energy to run the equipment used. Saving water will lead to energy savings and reduce our carbon footprint. We can start to save water by making smart choices at home. Where we have to use the most water and energy efficient equipment.

The Importance of Water for Life Needs

Lots of daily activities that require water, from drinking, cooking, bathing, washing, watering plants, defecating, and so on. For those of you who live in urban areas with adequate infrastructure, you may still feel that water is available in abundance, due to easy access to clean water. However, in several villages in the mountains or in African countries which often experience drought, clean water is a very valuable and scarce commodity. Without clean water, human health will be disrupted, it can even cause various kinds of problems, ranging from dehydration to various other diseases.

Facts about Water Supply in the World

Even though we feel that the availability of water on Earth is very abundant, the supply of clean water that can be used by humans is only about 3 percent of the total existing water. For more details, let’s look at the following facts about water supply in the world:

1. According to The United States Geological Survey Water Science School, about 71 percent of the earth’s surface is covered by water.
2. The world’s water supply is equivalent to 332.5 million cubic miles.
3. The oceans are about 97 percent of all the water on Earth, which means that only 3 percent of the water is not salty.
4. Of the total fresh water in the world, only 69 percent is frozen in ice and glaciers. The other 30 percent is in the ground.
5. Only 0.26 percent of the world’s water is in freshwater lakes.
6. Only 0.001 percent of all water is in the atmosphere.
7. More than 80 percent of the community’s dirty waste flows back into the environment without any treatment or reuse.
8. As much as 71 percent of the world’s natural wetlands have been lost since the 1900s and this is human error.
9. According to the UN, there are approximately 2.1 billion people who do not have safe drinking water at home. Of this number, 844 million people do not have access to basic drinking water services, including 263 million people who travel for approximately 30 minutes per trip to collect water.
10. As many as 159 million people still drink untreated water and face serious health risks from surface water sources, such as lakes and rivers.
11. There are 663 million people who live without a clean water supply close to their homes.

How to Save Water at Home

Can you imagine how valuable every drop of clean water that we have been using? Therefore, avoid wasting clean water. We can start this step in saving clean water from ourselves at home, by doing the following:

1. Washing Clothes in Large Amounts

To save water, we need to avoid washing clothes a little, especially if you use a washing machine. The reason is because the washing machine will produce a lot of waste water that is simply wasted. Therefore, give time intervals for washing clothes, for example, every two to three days. That way, water waste from the washing machine can be reduced. Not only saving water, this method can also make you save electricity.

2. Set a Schedule for Watering Plants and Washing Vehicles

For water use that is not too routine, such as watering plants and washing vehicles, you can set a schedule so that the water used is more effective. For example, watering plants during the dry season and washing vehicles when they are really dirty.

When watering plants, use a hose spray that can be turned off so that the water doesn’t run out all the time. When washing vehicles, you can also add a pressurized spraying machine. Even though it appears that more water is coming out, the pressure from the machine can allow water to wet an entire larger surface and save water expenditure than a regular hose.

3. Benefits of Aerator Faucets

The way to save water that you can do is to use an aerator faucet. With this one tool, you can limit the flow of water from the faucet. So that the water will be more efficient.

4. Avoid Leaving Faucets Dripping

When brushing your teeth or washing your face at the sink, sometimes we just let the tap water run. In fact, this habit will waste water in vain. Therefore, try to get used to turning off the faucet while washing your face or brushing your teeth. Then turn it on again when you are going to use the water.

5. Cook Sufficient Water

Always take into account the need for water when you are cooking, be it for making coffee, brewing tea, or just cooking noodles. Sometimes, the water you cook is often excess and the rest will just be thrown into the sink. So, you can fill a pot or kettle enough so that you not only save water, but also save gas or electricity.

6. Avoid prolonged bathing

Bathing for a long time seems fun, but this one activity is a source of water wastage at home. The solution is to try to replace the bathtub with a shower to limit the use of water when bathing. However, also avoid leaving the shower on when you are using soap or shampoo.

7. Accommodate Rain Water

In the rainy season, you can make a rainwater reservoir which you can later use to water plants or mop the floor of your house. However, pay attention to the rainwater reservoir that you make and make sure you close it tightly because it risks becoming a breeding ground for mosquitoes that cause dengue fever.

8. Don’t Ignore Leaking Pipes

Leaking pipes or damaged faucets should be repaired immediately. You will never know how much water is wasted from the leaky pipe. If collected, the amount can meet water needs for a week or even a month. If you haven’t had time to fix it, then just catch the leaking water in a bucket and then use it on another occasion.

9. Use a Water Filter

If you often buy water in gallons, then you can make savings by using a water filter. By using this water filter, you no longer need to buy bottled water or gallons of water because you can use tap water at home for consumption by filtering it using this tool. The price alone may be quite expensive, but in the long run, you will be able to save more water.

10. Use Point of Use Water Heaters

The next component that you can use to save water is the point of use water heater. By using this small heater, you can immediately get the hot water and use it without wasting water while waiting for it to warm up. Due to the current high demand for hot water, this one water heater can be a solution to save money. Not only that, a water heater will be quite profitable because you don’t need to need a large space for storage.

11. Reuse Water

Reusing water or reusing water can also be a way to save water. Of course, what is used is not dirty water, but water used to wash fruit or vegetables or water used to soak rice. You can use it again to water the plants.

12. Use enough soap

Whether it’s dish soap, laundry soap, or body soap, using too much of it will only create more lather and require more water to rinse. So, it’s better for you to use enough soap.

This is an explanation of the reasons why we have to save water and several ways we can do to save water at home. Remember, don’t overuse water, because it will have a negative impact on the availability of clean water in the future. Hopefully the explanation above can make us all aware of the importance of saving clean water.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Reuse is one of the best ways to manage and deal with waste with its various problems. Where the process of reuse or reuse is different from the recycling process which destroys used goods into raw materials used to make new products. Reuse or reuse includes the conventional reuse of an item where the item is reused with the same function. In addition, reuse can also be interpreted as reuse in which the same item is used with a different function.

By taking useful products or items and exchanging them without going through the process. This will save time, energy, money, and resources. A simple example of a conventional reuse process is a refillable milk bottle. For more details, in this article we will discuss in more detail what reuse is and also examples and purposes. Watch the article until it’s finished.

Waste Management Using the 3R Method

The application of the ER (Reduce, Reuse, and Recycle) method is one of the solutions in managing waste besides processing waste into compost or using waste as a source of electricity, namely PLTSa: Waste Power Generator. In fact, waste management with the 3R method can be carried out by everyone in their daily activities.

The 3Rs, which consist of reduce, reuse, and recycle, have different meanings. Reuse is the process of reusing waste that can still be used for the same function or use or a different function. Meanwhile, reduce is reducing everything that can result in waste. Then to recycle is to process or recycle waste into new goods or products that are more useful. Managing waste with this method can be done by anyone, anywhere, and anytime. You only need a little time and concern for waste management.

Reuse Concept Example

The following are some examples of the reuse concept that anyone can do, including:

1. Used Goods Exchange Center

These services or services will usually facilitate and redistribute goods that are no longer wanted and still have use from one party to another. The parties involved in it can come from various parties and can act as donors, sellers, buyers, or recipients. These used goods exchange centers will usually utilize household appliances or food packaging that are still suitable for use. Then they will make it available for sale again.

2. Reassembly

One process that is quite profitable is the reassembly of goods that still have value and function. Like machines, CRTs, printer cartridges, and so on. Once collected, these items will be sent to the assembly center and the hope is that the product specifications are the same as the new product. For example, Rolls Royce has an aircraft reassembly factory located in Singapore. Then, Caterpillar has also recently announced the installation of a tractor reassembly in China.

3. Recharge Program

There are already various types of markets that provide refill processes for various types of commodities. Usually the products offered to be refilled are cleaning agents and printer cartridges. Later, the packaging will be sent to a refill center, then reused by the consumer who sent it. Packaging that can be refilled usually has features that make it easier for users, for example the top of the package that can be closed again, a comfortable shape, and so on.

4. Change of Function

Reuse does not always take advantage of products or items that have the same function. For example, the ash from the combustion process and also the power plant is used as a mixture for concrete which is useful for strengthening the concrete. Another example that is easiest for us to find is the use of used clothes for rags.

Reasons Why We Should Do the 3R Method (Reduce, Reuse, and Recycle)

All the goods we use or the products we consume will have an impact on the planet we live in. Most of the natural resources and energy are spent during the production process and the waste from the rest of our consumption must somehow be absorbed. The principles of reduce, reuse and recycle are simple strategies that we can apply independently to help limit their impact on the Earth.

The following are 10 reasons why we must apply the 3R principle, including:

1. Preserving Natural Resources

Recycling 1 ton of paper saves 17 trees and 7,000 gallons of water. As we understand that the natural resources on this Earth are very limited. By implementing the 3R principles, we can contribute to drastically reducing the use of natural resources. According to the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), recycling 1 ton of paper is the same as saving 17 trees and also 7,000 gallons of water.

2. Preserving Natural Space

Mining of natural resources as well as large-scale agriculture often harms natural space. Where by reducing the demand for these resources, it can help preserve natural space. The expanse of oil palm plantations that surround the Kampar River in Riau Province, every year land clearing and burning is carried out to become a plantation area, which has created many new disasters for the surrounding community. Starting from the smoke haze due to land burning, it becomes a real health threat to the community.

3. Save Energy

Mining as well as the refining of minerals and other natural resources for the manufacture of consumer goods is a process that requires a great deal of energy. By limiting the amount of energy used for the production process, it can help save most of the energy resources that exist on Earth. According to the Ohio Department of Natural Resources, making aluminum from bauxite ore requires 20 times more energy than using recycled materials.

4. Reducing Greenhouse Gas Emissions

Most of the energy used during the mining, refining, and manufacturing processes comes from burning fossil fuels. By recycling half of our household waste that can be recycled, it saves 2,400 pounds of carbon dioxide being released into the atmosphere. Carbon dioxide is the greenhouse gas that is most influential in climate change.

5. Reducing Pollution

Most of the waste related to human consumption will certainly cause air, water and soil pollution. For example, used oil should not be thrown away, because it can contaminate soil and fresh water. The EPA alone estimates that around 200 million gallons of used oil are improperly disposed of each year.

6. Reducing Final Disposal Sites or TPA

Most of the waste we generate ends up in landfills. Often these wastes cannot be decomposed naturally and take up to centuries to finally decompose. For example, plastic, where plastic takes up to 500 years to decompose. Landfills take up precious space on Earth and are a major source of air, water and soil pollution.

7. Creating Jobs

Industries developed with the aim of recycling waste can become jobs. In Ohio alone, nearly 100,000 jobs are created in 2000 because of the waste recycling industry. According to Ohio DNR data, recycling creates five times more jobs than landfill management.

8. Stimulating the Creation of New Technology

With increasing social pressure to adopt more environmentally friendly practices, companies will be forced to find more innovative technologies to incorporate recycled materials into the products they make. The new technology will ultimately have a good impact on Earth.

9. Save Money

Buy things you really need and reuse things that can still be used to save money. In many states in America, the fees charged for disposing of waste can be more expensive than recycling it.

10. Creating a Sustainable Future

Our earth has a limited amount of natural resources and waste processing capacity. With the 3R method, we not only help reduce short-term impacts on the Earth, but we also implement sustainable practices for future generations.

5 Benefits of Reuse: Reusing Used Goods

As previously explained, reuse is a non-organic waste management method in which the method is to reuse used items that are no longer used. Repair the function or transfer its function to other benefits. The reuse method or reusing used goods also has many advantages, including:

1. Make Money

Who doesn’t want to get money from using used goods? Of course everyone wants it. Because the truth is, everyone needs money to eat and have a decent place to live. So, to be able to earn additional income, you can apply this reuse method to manage and utilize the used goods that you have. You can sell used goods that have been converted into better goods. The results themselves are not bad.

2. The house becomes more tenuous

Because the used items that have accumulated in the house have been sold, the house will feel more tenuous. For those of you who feel that the house is small and cramped, maybe one of the reasons is that there are too many used items that are already being used again. If so, you can use your free time to process used goods at home to make money.

3. Reducing Expenses

In addition to the benefits above, you can also control your expenses. You can make the items you want to buy yourself with used items at home. For example, like a bicycle that has been converted into a pot container. That way, you no longer need to spend money just to decorate your home.

4.Decorate Home or Yard

Do you feel that your home page is not very impressive? So, to make your home more memorable, you can use used items at home to serve as decoration. There are many used items that you can use to make decorative products that can make your home look more attractive. One of them is a light bulb that is used as a fish holder, boots that are reused as ornamental plant pots, and so on.

5. Practicing Creativity

With this reuse method, you can also practice creativity. Occasionally you can take a peek at various references and tutorials on the internet. Try to experiment with what’s in the house. Make the final touch by applying a variety of colors to make it look more colorful.

This is an explanation of what reuse is, for example, to its benefits for the environment and ourselves. From the explanation above, we can conclude that reuse is a waste management method by reusing items that are no longer used with the same function or used with a different function.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Anthropology is – Talking about anthropology, maybe what comes to your mind is the science in lectures. Until now this science has become one of the college majors that has a lot of devotees.

But maybe you are also curious about anthropology itself. Relax, you don’t need to be confused, because in this article there is already a complete explanation related to anthropology itself.

So that you are not so confused anymore, here is a complete explanation about anthropology.

Definition of Anthropology

Before discussing further about anthropology. It would be better if we also know about the meaning itself.

Etymologically, anthropology comes from the Greek, namely Anthropos which means human and logos which means discourse, reason, reason which can also be called science. Simply put, anthropology is a science that studies human beings.

Meanwhile, according to the Big Indonesian Dictionary or KBBI, is a science which discusses human beings, especially about their origins, various physical forms and colors, customs and beliefs in the past.

Quoted from the Encyclopedia Britannica, is a humanitarian science that studies humans in various aspects. Starting from biology, the history of Homo sapiens, so that the characteristics of society and culture can distinguish humans from other animal species.

Quoted from Cambridge, it is a study that studies human beings, culture and society as well as their physical development.

Definition of Anthropology According to Some Experts

After knowing the meaning etymologically. So the next explanation is still an understanding based on the opinions of several experts. For more details, here are some opinions of experts on anthropology.

1. William A. Haviland

William A. Haviland explained that anthropology is a study of humans that seeks to make generalizations that can provide benefits related to humans and their behavior. This is also meant to be able to get a very complete understanding related to human diversity itself.

2. Koentjaraningrat

Koentjaraningrat, who is also the Father of Indonesian Anthropology, explained that anthropology is a science that studies human beings in general, various colors, human physical forms and the resulting culture.

3. David E. Hunter

David E. Hunter explained that Anthropology is a science that was born from a broader and unlimited curiosity related to human life itself.

4. Frank Robert Vivelo

Frank Robert Vivelo has an explanation about anthropology is a science that studies humans based on culture, biology (human origins, evolution to human existence today).

Those are some definitions of anthropology from several expert opinions. When viewed from every opinion that exists, anthropology has a meaning as a science that studies humans.

 

 

Scope of Anthropology

As explained, anthropology is a science that studies humans. There are several scopes of anthropology in terms of learning. Now for a more detailed explanation, the following is a review of the scope of anthropology.

1. Physical Anthropology

Physical anthropology is the first scope of anthropology. This scope has a scope that is focused on humans as biological organisms. Where later this concept will track or look for human development based on evolution while simultaneously investigating its biological variants in various types or species.

Therefore, within the scope of physical anthropology, you can also study fossils and observe various kinds of primates that have lived on earth. Anthropologists will try to find human ancestors so they know when, how and why humans could become the creatures that exist today.

2. Cultural Anthropology

Next is the scope of cultural anthropology, where the emphasis of cultural anthropology on learning is about human culture or the way of human life in society. According to the anthropologist Haviland, cultural anthropology still has several branches within it, namely archeology, anthropology, linguistics and ethnology.

Cultural anthropology can be a study of social practices, expressive forms as well as language use. From the various kinds of findings that exist, it will be continued with creating meaning and testing before being used by the community.

Anthropological Functions

The existence of anthropology also has several important functions in it. If you don’t know what functions anthropology can provide, here is a complete explanation.

1. Anthropology has a function as a method to be able to see humans as individuals and groups of people.
2. Examine human life in society. Besides that, anthropology also has a function to see the world and other cultures that we have never seen before.
3. Anthropology also has a function to make it easier to understand the norms, beliefs, traditions and values ​​adopted by certain communities.
4. Anthropology also has a function so that humans can be more critical, responsive and think rationally in dealing with every social phenomenon in a society that is so complex.
5. Helping to compile ethnography that can create theories related to the origins of beliefs, family, marriage, state behavior and so on.

The Benefits of Anthropology

Not only has a function in it, but anthropology also has several important benefits. Below are some of the benefits of anthropology.

1. Anthropology helps a person to be able to study patterns of human behavior in social life. Individuals can better understand human behavior, both universally and within an ethnic group.
2. Anthropology can help a person to better understand the position and role he has to play.
3. The science of anthropology can help a person to be able to have more broad insight into human association so that it can increase a high sense of tolerance.
4. Anthropology can make someone to know the problems that are happening in society.

Those are some of the functions and goals of anthropology. In conclusion, the existence of anthropology can make it easier for you to be able to learn the ins and outs of human life, including the problems that are happening right now.

 

 

Anthropological Science Approach

In anthropology to the five methods of approach. Each approach in anthropology will be interconnected with one another. The following are some of the approaches in anthropology.

1. Holistic Approach

You could say that a holistic approach in anthropology has a comprehensive meaning. The overall intention here is an anthropological approach that can examine a socio-cultural problem in human life as a whole.

This anthropological approach can be developed for small rural communities which will facilitate the coverage process. In addition, this method is also used in a field research for a fairly long span of time.

2. Micro Approach

Next is the micro approach in anthropology. Where this micro approach is a consequence of the previous anthropological approach. Where later an anthropologist must carry out a more detailed or more detailed learning process about the problem to get a set of data that is so detailed and concrete related to certain socio-cultural problems.

Later the concrete data can be used as a guide or guide to analyze if similar problems occur in other cases. Because of the micro approach, an anthropologist can get a general understanding to be able to be more detailed about the social problems that are interrelated.

According to a British anthropologist named R. Firth, the micro-anthropological approach to socio-cultural problems has a distinctive characteristic of anthropology itself. He also explained that anthropology is a micro sociology or micro sociology.

3. Semiotic Approach

Next is the semiotic anthropological approach. Where this approach emphasizes understanding of crocodiles in accordance with the interactions carried out by researchers based on the basic views of the research subjects or what can be called the native’s point of view.

In this approach there is also an analysis that is thick description which is so emphasized. Although the approach in anthropology is different. However, anthropologists conduct research using qualitative methods and participatory observation.

4. Comparative Approach

The comparative approach also exists in anthropology. Where the comparative approach has become a method often used in anthropology since the beginning of history. This is because anthropology always faces the diversity of colors and forms of society and culture that exist within it.

Currently, many approaches to comparative science have been developed. One of them is the cross-cultural comparison method or the cross-cultural method.

Where the workings of this comparison method can use one or more socio-cultural issues that are considered similar in a sizable sample of ethnic cultures that are already widespread.

5. Behavioristic Approach

Finally, there is the behavioristic approach in anthropology. Where later this approach can also be said to be similar to the comparative method. The workings of the behavioristic approach are using a combination of psychoanalysis, learning theory and crocodile anthropology.

The five points above are approaches in anthropology. As explained at the beginning if each of these approaches will be connected between one approach and another.

Objects of Anthropology

In anthropology there are several objects to be studied. Some of them are human beings, be it individuals or groups, citizens, ethnic groups, cultures and also the perpetrators.

The existence of anthropology can also answer every question about oneself and the nature of human life.

 

 

Anthropology Branch

In anthropology, it can be further dissected into two branches. The two branches of anthropology are biological anthropology and cultural anthropology. Both biological anthropology and cultural anthropology also have several types in them. So, for more details, you can read the explanation below.

1. Biological Anthropology

Biological anthropology is a branch of anthropology which studies matters relating to the biological side of humans. Some people say that the branch of cultural anthropology is also commonly called physical anthropology.

In physical anthropology more emphasis on knowledge related to comparative anatomy.

In this comparison or comparison will include the relationship between human species and also higher primates. An example is the chimpanzee with the gorilla. Then the relationship between humans and their ancestors such as Homo Erectus with Australopithecus Africanus. But for now the comparative anatomy of races is decreasing because the field of human genetics is getting more modern.

• Paleoanthropology: is a science that seeks to find out about the origins of the evolutionary process in humans. The process will be carried out by examining the remains of human bodies that have helped.
• Physical anthropology: part of anthropology that seeks to resolve an understanding that will relate to the history of human existence on this earth.

2. Cultural Anthropology

Humans are the only creatures that have culture. So that it can be interpreted that there are no humans who do not have culture. The existence of reason possessed by humans can help control nature.

This can happen because humans do not rely on their instincts. The success of humans in controlling nature is the cause of a culture. The culture that has been learned by humans and not inherited biologically. Cultural anthropology has the task of being able to examine human culture that exists throughout the world.

• Prehistory: In anthropology, prehistory is the period before the presence of historical heritage in the form of language or writing. So that it can be concluded that the boundary between history and pre-history is when there are historical relics in the form of writing. Then for people who lived in the past and did not know the name of writing, it could be called the pre-literacy era.
• Ethnolinguistics: In anthropology, ethnolinguistics explains that humans who have culture are those who have the ability to speak and also speak.
  However, an archaeologist named Prof. Teuku Jacob doubts that pithecanthropus erectus is a creature that already has culture. This is not without reason, there is evidence of fossil discoveries of pithecanthropus erectus that do not have articulation areas.
  The area of ​​articulation in the mouth is an area capable of forming a language. So that pithecanthropus erectus cannot be interpreted as a human who already has culture.
  Ethnolinguistic and linguistic anthropology is a study of human language. Linguistics is also referred to as the description of a language and the history of language. Linguistic studies can know better about the opinions of other people related to humans and about the world around them.
• Ethnology: in anthropology, ecology studies about understanding the basis of human culture. The method used is by studying the culture that exists in human life from so many ethnic groups. These ethnic groups can be spread all over the world, both from the past and from the present.
  In ethology there are two languages, namely diachronic or technological and synchronic anthropology or social anthropology.
  Diachronic is a flow that emphasizes more on diachronic fields. Then the diachronic field is a flow that has a continuous nature according to the passage of time. Diachronic goal is to seek understanding of the history of the development of a country.
  Meanwhile, synchronic is a flow that emphasizes the synchronic field. Synchronic has eels concurrent at one time. The purpose of this synchronic existence is to find a principle of equality in a society that is so diverse.

That is a review of anthropology, starting from the definition of anthropology, benefits, goals to the scope and branches of anthropology. 

Chair verse reading and its 12 virtues in life – Not many people know the virtues of reading chair verses. This makes the awareness and interest in reading verses of the chair relatively low. Even though the chair verse is known as a verse that has many features, you know, Sinaumed’s.

Among other letters or prayers, verse chair is considered as one of the prayers that has the highest degree. In the Qur’an, the chair verse is part of the 255th verse of surah Albaqarah.

The verse of the chair has its place even though all the verses of all the surahs in the Qur’an are noble. The virtue of reading verses of the chair is closely related to getting protection from Allah SWT.

Ayat Kursi as one of the prayers that has the highest degree contains the oneness of Allah SWT and the absolute power of Allah. There are so many meanings and meanings contained in the verse of the chair.

Reading the verse of the chair is believed to affect one’s soul and faith in one’s life. The verse was revealed one night after the migration event in Medina.

When he was sent down, thousands of angels accompanied him because of the glory and greatness of the word of Allah SWT. When the verse of the chair was revealed, Muhammad bin Al-Hanafiyah narrated that all the idols on earth fell, the crowns of the princes fell to each other, the rulers dropped their faces to the earth, the devils ran, and the angels prostrated themselves.

Sinaumed’s must be wondering why the verse is named the ayat chair? Scholars interpret the name of the verse chair differently. However, these differences reinforce each other.

The name verse chair can be interpreted as a room with a very large capacity beyond heaven and earth. Then as a government, power, and kingdom that belongs to Allah is one of the reasons for giving the name ayat Kursi.

In addition, the name “chair” can be said as one of the attributes of Allah SWT to govern all of His creation. Meanwhile, some scholars argue that the naming of ayat Kursi is interpreted as a symbol of the majesty and greatness of Allah SWT.

From the description above, it can be concluded that the naming of verses of the chair is a law of Allah SWT or the foundation of policy and a symbol of the power that He has. Absolutely, the revelation of the verse can provide guidance on the attributes of Allah SWT. In accordance with the words of Rasulullah SAW from HR. Tirmidhi which reads:

لِكُلِّ شَىْpoٍ سَنَامٌ وَإِنَّ سَنَامَ الْقُرْآنِ سُورَةُ الْبَقَرَةِ وَفِيهَا آيَةٌ هِىَ سَيِّدَةُ

Meaning: “Everything has a peak and the peak of the Koran is surah al-Baqarah, in which there is a leading verse of all the verses of the Koran, namely the verse of the chair.” (Narrated by Tirmidhi)

As the most important verse in the Koran, a hadith narrated by Ubay bin Ka’ab says that the oneness and power of God is contained in it. The meaning and meaning of the virtues and benefits of the verse of the chair are in every sentence.

Reading the Verse of the Chair and its meaning

Although it can be read at any time, there are three main times that are highly recommended for reading this verse according to the hadith of the Prophet Muhammad. Every morning and evening, after the five daily prayers, and before going to bed are the three main times which are highly recommended.

The following reads the verse of the chair in Arabic, Latin, and the Indonesian translation.

بِسۡمِ ٱللهِ ٱلرَّحۡمَـٰنِ ٱلرَّحِيمِ

ٱللَّهُ لَآ إِلَـٰهَ إِلَّا هُوَ ٱلۡحَىُّ ٱلۡقَيُّومُ‌ۚ

لَا تَأۡخُذُهُ ۥ سِنَةٌ۬ وَلَا نَوۡمٌ۬‌ۚ لَّهُ ۥ مَا فِى ٱلسَّمَـٰوَٲتِ وَمَا فِى ٱلۡأَرۡض

مَن ذَا ٱلَّذِى يَشۡفَعُ عِندَهُ ۥۤ إِلَّا بِإِذۡنِهِۦ‌ۚ يَعۡلَمُ مَا بَيۡنَ أَيۡدِيهِمۡ وَمَا خَلۡفَهُمۡ‌ۖ وَلَا يُحِيطُونَ بِشَىۡءٍ۬ مِّنۡ عِلۡمِهِۦۤ إِلَّا بِمَا شَآءَ‌ۚ

وَسِعَ كُرۡسِيُّهُ ٱلسَّمَـٰوَٲتِ وَٱلۡأَرۡضَ‌ۖ

وَلَا يَـُٔودُهُ ۥ حِفۡظُهُمَا‌ۚ وَهُوَ ٱلۡعَلِىُّ ٱلۡعَظِيمُ

Bismillahirrahmanirrahim

Allahu laa ilaaha illaa huwal hayyul qayyum. Laa ta’khudzuhuu sinatuw wa laa naum. Lahuu maa fis samaawaati wa maa fil ardh. Man dzal ladzii yasyfa’u ‘ indahuu illaa bi idznih. Ya’lamu maa baina aidiihim wa maa khalfahum. Wa laa yuhiithuuna bi syai-im min ‘ilmihii illaa bi maa syaa-a. Wasi’a chairyyuhus samaawaati wal ardha wa laa ya-uuduhuu hifzhuhumaa Wahuwal ‘aliyyul ‘azhiim.

Meaning: “In the name of Allah, the Most Gracious, the Most Merciful. Allah, there is no God (who has the right to be worshiped) but He who lives eternally and continuously takes care of (His creatures). Not sleepy and not sleeping. To Him belongs what is in the heavens and on earth. No one can intercede with Allah without His permission. Allah knows what is before them and what is behind them. And they know nothing from Allah’s knowledge except what He wills. Allah’s chair covers the heavens and the earth and Allah does not find it hard to maintain both. And Allah is Most High, Most Great.”

The virtue of reading verses of the chair

As a Muslim, we should remember and pray only to Allah SWT. The virtue of reading and practicing the verse of the chair is truly extraordinary, starting from the position of this verse as the leader of the verses of the Koran, as the most glorious verse, to get heaven’s reward, the reward of martyrdom, asking for protection, to sustenance. Here are the virtues of reading chair verses in life.

1. The Most Great Verse in the Koran

In accordance with the words of Rasulullah SAW from HR. Muslim which reads:

عن أُبي هو ابن كعب أن النبي – صلى الله عليه وسلم – سأله أي آية في كتاب الله أعظم قال: الله ورسوله أعلم فرددها مرارا ثم قال: آية الكرسي قال” ليهنك العلم أبا المنذر والذي نفسي بيده إن لها لسانا وشفتين تقدس الملك عند ساق العرش (وقد رواه مسلم .. وليس عنده زيادة والذي نفسي بيده إلخ

Meaning: “From Ubay bin Ka’ab, in fact the Prophet sallallahu’alaihi wa sallam asked him about what verse is the most glorious in the Book of Allah, he replied, “Allah and His Messenger know better.” He repeated the question several times. Then he replied, “Seat verse.” So he said, “Congratulations to you O Abu Mundzir with your knowledge. By the one in whose hand my soul is. Indeed (verse Chair) has a mouth and two lips which the Angels sanctify at the foot of the Throne.” (HR. Muslim).

Muslims will get extraordinary benefits by reading and practicing verse chairs. Because it contains the most glorious name of Allah, namely in the verses of Alhayyu and Alqayyum, the chair verse is called the most glorious verse and becomes the king of several verses in the Koran.

2. Opening the Door of Wisdom and Fortune

Muslims who read the Koran will be guaranteed sustenance by Allah SWT. Then Allah will open the door of wisdom for anyone who reads the verse of the chair 18 times a day.

In addition, whoever reads it will be raised in rank and will be facilitated by Allah in this world and the hereafter. By reading verses of the chair 18 times a day, Allah will give you a big influence so that people will always respect you. Allah will also protect that person from all the disasters that will befall him on that day.

3. Most Blessed Verse

By reading and practicing the verse of the chair, Muslims will be blessed, kept away from difficulties, removed from disasters and sadness quickly.

In accordance with the words of Rasulullah SAW from HR. Imam Abu Hamid bin Muhammad Al-Ghozali which means:

Meaning: “Aya Kursi is a verse that is blessed, nothing opens up difficulties, removes calamities and dispels grief faster than ayat Kursi.” (Narrated by Imam Abu Hamid Bin Muhammad Al-Gozhali).

4. Ayat Kursi as the head of the Koran

The virtue of the chair verse is that it is the most superior, the most high, and the head of the verses of the Koran. By reading and practicing verses of the chair, Allah SWT will protect Muslims from the devil’s disturbances.

As the words of Rasulullah SAW:

Meaning: “Everything must be superior and higher. Indeed, what is superior and higher than the Al-Quran is Surah Al-Baqarah. And in Surah Al-Baqarah there is a verse that is the Leader of the Verses of the Al-Quran, he is the Verse of the Chair.”

5. The Opening Verse for All Troubles

For Muslims who never stop reciting the verses of the chair, they will gain many victories and open doors of ease. Allah will make it easier for all his desires so that all his affairs are facilitated.

According to the words of Rasulullah SAW:

Meaning: “Whoever learns Ayat Kursi and knows his rights Allah will open 8 doors of heaven for him, enter whichever door he is welcome.”

6. As Help for Muslims

The virtue of the chair verse is as a help for Muslims. Allah SWT will bring help to someone who is in trouble. By practicing or reading verses of the chair after the obligatory prayers or sunnah prayers, all difficulties will disappear. Allah will also protect and free them from all things that are not desirable by reading the verses of the chair.

As Rasulullah SAW said:

“If you go to bed (at night) then read the verse of the chair, surely Allah SWT will always protect you, and Satan will not approach you until morning.” (Narrated by Bukhari).

7. Facilitate the Sakaratul Maut

Allah SWT will bring something that is wanted and that did not exist before by practicing the verse of the chair. For Muslims who recite the verse of the chair, Allah will make it easy for him to die.

8. There is Izmul Azham

Seat verse as the most glorious verse in the Koran contains izmul azham. If you practice it, Allah will grant all the prayers that are asked. In fulfilling other needs and desires, verse chair is the most powerful weapon without equal.

9. Removing the Ugliness

Another advantage of the verse of the chair is to remove all the bad things. Allah will send angels to record all the good deeds and erase all the bad things of Muslims who practice verse chairs.

10. The Reward of Martyrdom

In accordance with the words of Rasulullah SAW from HR. The judge reads:

من قرأ آية الكرسى دبر كل صلاة كان الذى يلى قبض روحه ذو الجلال والإكرام وكان كمن قاتل عن أنبياء الله ورسله حتى يستشهد

Meaning: “Whoever reads Ayat Kursi after every prayer, then what will take his life is Allah himself and he is like a person who fought with the prophets until he got martyrdom.” (HR. Hakim).

Muslims who regularly read and practice the verse of the chair after the fardu prayer will get the reward of martyrdom.

11. The dating case was launched

Obtaining fluency in matters of finding a mate for those who are not yet married is one of the virtues of the seat verse. Allah will make it easy for them to get a good and pious partner because they read and practice the verse of the chair.

12. Eliminated Disbelief

For people who read chair verses regularly, Allah will bring the privilege or priority of chair verses as a way to eliminate disbelief. By reading the verse of the chair, Allah will always eliminate all disbelief that is in sight.

Sinaumed’s, that is an explanation regarding the reading of verses of the chair and their virtues in life. For those of you who want to deepen your knowledge of Islam, you can read books from sinaumedia. Come on Sinaumed’s, buy the book now!

• Procedure for Ablution
• Procedure for Dhuha Prayer
• Procedure for Midnight Prayer
• Procedure for the Prayer of the Corpse
• Mandatory Bathing Procedures
• Definition of Al-Quran and Hadith
• Definition of Morals
• Noble Qualities
• Honest Behavior in Islam
• Definition of Zakat
• Pillars of Hajj
• Understanding Faith In Angels
• Understanding Aurat
• List of 99 Asmaul Husna
• Zakat Fitrah and Zakat Mal

Reading the Intentions of Fasting Qadha Ramadhan – Fasting in the month of Ramadan is a fast that must be done by all Muslims. However, there are some people who may be unable or unable to fast during Ramadan at that time.

Therefore, people who are unable to carry out fasting in the month of Ramadan must make up for fasting. Fasting debt can be replaced by making up the fast. What is the correct way to carry out qada fasting? And what is the intention for fasting qadha? Find out more by reading this article to the end!

Reading the Intentions of Fasting Qadha Ramadan

When changing the fast or making up the fast, it is better if you also say the intention of making up the fast. According to the Syafi’i school of thought, it is also obligatory for people who are going to make up the fast to make up their fasts to recite the intention of fasting, this is also stated in an authentic hadith.

Syekh Sulaiman Al Bujairimi in his Hasyiyatul Iqna said that, ‘It is required to pronounce intentions at night, for someone who is going to carry out obligatory fasts such as Ramadan fasts, qadha fasts and vows fasts. These conditions are based on the hadith of Rasulullah SAW;

‘Whoever does not make his intention before dawn, then there is no fasting for him. ‘Because there is no other way except to say the intention of fasting every day based on the editorial zahir hadith.” (Syekh Sulaiman Al Bujairimi, Hasyiyatul Iqna’, Juz II).

The reading of the intention of fasting, which is a substitute for fasting during Ramadan, is as follows.

Nawaitu sauma ghadin ‘an qadhā’I fardhi syahri Ramadhāna lillâhi ta’âlâ.

This means that I intend to make up for fasting in the month of Ramadan tomorrow because of Allah SWT.

When reading the intention to make up the fast of Ramadan, it is enough to say the intention in the heart and not verbally, because there is no requirement for talaffuz or to mention the intention verbally.

There is also an intention that is said in the heart, it must be in accordance with the purpose of carrying out the fast, namely carrying out the fast of making up qadha and intending to fast to replace the Ramadan fast that is said at night before sunrise.

About Fasting Ramadan and Qadha Fasting

Fasting in the month of Ramadan is one of the pillars of Islam that every Muslim must believe in and carry out. The law of fasting for Ramadan has also been stated in the Qur’an, Surah Al Baqarah verse 183 which reads as follows.

‘O you who believe, it is obligatory upon you to fast as you were previously obligated to fast so that you may be pious.’

When going to fast in the holy month of Ramadan, a Muslim must fulfill the legal requirements and the pillars of fasting, namely having a sound mind, reaching puberty or having experienced wet dreams for men and experiencing menstruation or menstruation for women, being able to carry out fasting in the month of Ramadan. Ramadan and know when the implementation of fasting in the month of Ramadan.

Apart from being legally obligated to fast in the month of Ramadan, this obligatory fast also has the virtues listed in authentic hadiths.

Among the virtues of fasting in Ramadan are the opening of the gates of heaven and the closing of the doors of hell and the shackled devils. The Prophet said, that ‘If the night arrives early in the month of Ramadan, then all the devils and rebellious jinn will be bound. All the doors of hell are closed and they do not open even one door and the doors of heaven are opened and they will not be closed even if one door.

The callers also shouted, ‘O people who expect good! Then accept it. O you who wish evil! So stop and those who are sincere for the sake of Allah, will be freed from the fires of hell and then the caller will call out every night in the month of Ramadan.’ (HR At-Tirmidhi and Ibn Majah).

Although fasting in the month of Ramadan is obligatory, but there is also someone who is given waivers and is allowed not to fast in the month of Ramadan. This is because the Muslim is absent for reasons that are Shari’a. Then, because they do not carry out the obligatory fasting in the month of Ramadan, the Muslim is obliged to replace or make up the obligatory fasting in another month.

Categories of Persons Allowed to Leave Fasting in the Month of Ramadan

There are several categories of people who are allowed to break their fast in Ramadan. Here are some of the categories.

1. A sick person

If a Muslim is sick, so that the illness makes a Muslim feel weak and unable to carry out the fast of Ramadan, then that person is allowed to leave the fast of Ramadan. However, if the illness experienced is mild and it is felt that they are still capable of fasting, then the Muslim must continue to fast in the month of Ramadan and if he leaves the fast of Ramadan then the law is sinful.

2. Muslims who are traveling or travelers

A traveler who is on a long journey and has good intentions and does not cause trouble or harm himself, it is permissible not to fast in Ramadan. According to the Imam Syafii school of thought, a person can be said to be a traveler if he has traveled 83 km.

3. Women who are experiencing menstruation or childbirth

A woman who is experiencing menstruation or childbirth, it is permissible to leave fasting in the month of Ramadan. This is because menstrual blood or childbirth cancels the Ramadan fast that he is running.

4. Women who are pregnant or breastfeeding

When a woman is pregnant or breastfeeding, it is permissible not to fast. This is because when fasting, it is feared that the condition of women who are pregnant or breastfeeding can interfere with the health of both the mother and the fetus. Some scholars are of the opinion that when a woman becomes pregnant, it is like her parents who cannot afford to fast, so it is permissible to pay fidyah as a substitute for fasting in Ramadan.

The four groups of people who are allowed not to fast during the month of Ramadan must make up their fast by making up the fast. Replacing fasting can be done continuously, randomly or intermittently according to ability. This is also stated in the hadith as follows.

‘When he wants to make up the fasts of Ramadan, he can do it separately and if he doesn’t want to, then he can do it sequentially.’ (HR. Daruquthni from Ibn Umar).

It should be noted, that the time to replace Ramadan fasting or make up for fasting is for one full year. That is, until the month of Ramadan returns, that is the time to make up the fast or make up the fast.

This is also stated in a hadith from Muslim and Bukhari, here is the hadith.

‘I used to have an obligation to fast. I can not afford to pay the debt of fasting, except in the month of Sha’ban.’ (HR Bukhari no 1950 and Muslim no 1146)

According to the hadith, it is permissible to make up the fast on any day. However, it cannot be done on certain days and certain months, such as during Ramadan, Eid al-Fitr, Eid al-Adha and tasyrik days.

Procedure for Fasting Qadha

Apart from being obliged to pronounce the intention in the heart and at night before fasting, there are also several procedures for carrying out the qadha fast. Here are some procedures for doing qada fasting.

• When fasting for qadha, it is recommended to fast sequentially, if the fasts left during Ramadan are also sequential. Although it is permissible to pay intermittent fasting debts.
• Doing qadha fasts, as much as the missed Ramadan fasts. This means that if you leave the fast of Ramadan 7 times, then you have to do the qadha fast 7 times.
• Say the intention to carry out the qadha fast sincerely and correctly in the heart, at night before carrying out the qadha fast the next day or before dawn.
• If the number of days of missed Ramadan fasts is not known or forgotten, then it is obligatory to make up the missed fasts by taking the largest number of days left out. The goal is that the qadha fast that is carried out can provide peace and leave no worries if it is lacking when making up the fast.
• It’s good when doing qada fasting, to fill the empty time in a good way, such as worship.
• Read the correct qadha iftar prayer. The following is the prayer for breaking the fast.
  Allaahumma lakasumtu wabika aamantu wa’alaa rizqika afthortu birohmatika yaa rhamar roohimin.
  Meaning: O Allah, because of You I fast and with You I believe, only in You do I believe and with Your sustenance, then I break my fast, with grace from You, O Allah, the Most Merciful God.

That is the correct procedure for fasting qadha as a substitute for fasting in Ramadan.

Tips for Fasting Qadha Runs Smoothly

In order for Sinaumed’s to be able to carry out qada fasting and sunnah fasting smoothly, there are a number of tips that Sinaumed’s can do as tips so that the qada fasting continues smoothly.

Even though fasting does have a myriad of good benefits for the body, up to the growth of hormones, when fasting you still have to pay attention to a number of things. Because if it is done carelessly, it is feared that fasting can actually worsen Sinaumed’s’ health! Therefore, here are some tips or tips to make qada fasting smooth.

1. Eat not too much and little by little

Generally, fasting will eliminate the time to eat or drink that is usually done. Even so, some fasting patterns such as the 5:2 diet will allow a person to consume up to about 25 percent of their calorie needs in a day.

If you want to try or learn to fast regularly, then limit your incoming calorie intake. So that Sinaumed’s will still eat in small amounts even though he is fasting. How to reduce portions or calories during fasting can also help reduce the risks associated with fasting, such as being unfocused, hungry and weak.

Also, when breaking your fast, don’t eat too much. Limit and set a reasonable portion when breaking the fast. It is sunnah to drink sweet drinks, takjil or a little snack, then continue with prayer and then have a big meal.

2. Keep the body well hydrated

When experiencing mild dehydration, there are several symptoms that can be felt. Among them are feeling tired, thirsty, dry mouth to headaches. Therefore, it is important to keep the body well hydrated.

When fasting, it is better to drink lots of fluids immediately after breaking the fast. Generally when not fasting, a person will drink eight to 13 glasses per day. However, because the time to get fluids or drink is reduced, Sinaumed’s who is fasting must be able to replace the need to drink while not fasting, namely when breaking the fast until dawn. Also know the signs of dehydration and don’t drink too much, because the effect is just as bad, Sinaumed’s!

3. Consume enough protein

When fasting, one must not forget to pay attention to balanced nutritional intake that will enter the body. When fasting, the body will lack calories which can cause the body to lose muscle.

Therefore, one way to deal with losing a number of muscles when fasting, is to consume foods with sufficient protein content. In addition, consuming adequate amounts of protein will provide other benefits for the body. One of them is being able to manage hunger well when fasting.

4. Do light exercise

Don’t use fasting as an excuse for Sinaumed’s to stop doing activities or be lazy! There is no need to do strenuous exercise, just light things like walking, light stretching, light yoga are enough, so that household chores such as sweeping and mopping can also be light sports activities.

By doing light exercise, the body will become fresher even though it is fasting. However, if you feel that you are not strong enough to exercise, then you should just rest!

5. Don’t overeat when breaking your fast

These six tips are very important for maintaining stomach and digestive health when fasting. Most people will be hungry for their eyes, so they tend to buy many types of food and eat large portions until they are out of control.

If you overeat when breaking your fast, it is feared that it can cause bloating and fatigue. Besides that, bungee eating when fasting can also make it difficult to lose weight, you know, Sinaumed’s!

This is because the excess calories that enter the body after fasting can reduce the calorie deficit when fasting. Thus, the best way to break the fast is to eat in sufficient portions and maintain nutritional and fluid intake for the body.

6. Carry out the routine as usual or add sunnah worship

Often, when fasting is actually an excuse for someone to be lazy. However, because you don’t move much and you are lazy, it becomes difficult for your body to move and makes your body weak.

Therefore, do the routine when fasting as usual and try to add sunnah worship when fasting. Examples include Duha prayer, reading the Koran, or giving alms. That way, fasting will be more blessed and can run smoothly.

That is an explanation of the intentions and procedures for fasting qada which are good and right. Fasting can indeed bring many benefits to the body. However, when fasting, you still have to remember a number of points as explained earlier so that the body remains healthy and stable.

If Sinaumed’s wants to find out more about fasting, the virtues of fasting, or what activities can be done while fasting while waiting for the maghrib adzan bedug, Sinaumed’s can look for inspiration and related material at sinaumedia.com, OK!

As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides a variety of useful and original books for Sinaumed’s to add information and knowledge. So what are you waiting for? Buy and own the book right now!

Read the funeral prayer – Islam regulates adab in almost every aspect of human life, even in treating dead bodies. The Islamic religion regulates how to properly bury, clean and pray the body. In Islam, it is obligatory to wash the body and pray for the body. Therefore, it is important for all Muslims to know the correct procedure for praying the funeral.

As with washing the corpse, the law in carrying out the funeral prayer is fardhu kifayah and this has been agreed upon by the scholars. Fardhu kifayah is an obligation which means that if it is not carried out, then all Muslims will suffer sins, but this obligation can be represented by only a few people. In order to better understand the procedure for praying the funeral, here is an explanation of reading the prayer for the funeral, complete with the method.

The Law of the Corpse Prayer

The law of the funeral prayer is fardhu kifayah based on the general order of the Prophet Muhammad to pray over the body of a Muslim. This law is in accordance with the hadith of Abu Hurairah ra which was narrated by Muslim. Here’s the hadith.

أنَّ رسولَ اللهِ صلَّى Allah, عليه وسلَّمَ كان يُؤتى بالرجلِ الميتِ ، عليه الدين فيسأل ( هل ترك لدَينه من قضاءٍ ؟ ) فإن حدث أنه ترك وفاءً صلَّى عليه . وإلا قال ( صلُّوا على صاحبِكم)

Meaning: Rasulullah Shallallahu’alaihi Wasallam once brought to him the body of a man. The man still has debts. So the Apostle asked: ‘Does he have any inheritance to pay off his debts?’ if someone said that the man had wealth to pay off his debt, then the Prophet would pray for him. But if there is none, then he then said, ‘Pray your brother. (HR. Muslim No 1619)

From this hadith, it can be interpreted that the legal funeral prayer is fardhu kifayah which means it is obligatory to do it and if it is not done, then all Muslims will sin. However, if there are several people who have carried it out, then the obligation is dropped.

Even though the obligation to offer the funeral prayer will fall after some people perform it, it is still recommended that as many Muslims as possible perform the funeral prayer, so that they receive intercession. This is in accordance with the following hadith of the Prophet.

مَا مِنْ مَيِّتٍ تُصَلِّي عَلَيْهِ أُمَّةٌ مِنْ الْمُسْلِمِينَ يَبْلُغُونَ مِائَةً كُلُّهُمْ يَشْفَعُونَ لَهُ إِلَّا شُفِّعُوا فِيهِ

Meaning: It is not a Muslim who dies, then the Muslims who number up to one hundred pray for him, all of them will pray for him, surely they can give intercession for the deceased. (HR. Muslim no. 947)

مَا مِنْ رَجُلٍ مُسْلِمٍ يَمُوتُ فَيَقُومُ عَلَى جَنَازَتِهِ أرْبَعُونَ رَجُلا ، لا يُشْرِكُونَ بِالله

Meaning: It is not a Muslim who dies, then is prayed for by forty people who have not committed shirk in the slightest against Allah, unless Allah will intercede for the corpse with their cause. (HR. Muslim No. 948)

Legal Requirements and Pillars of the Funeral Prayer

When going to perform the funeral prayer, a Muslim must know the legal requirements and pillars of the funeral prayer. The goal is that the prayers performed are valid and acceptable to God. Here’s an explanation.

Requirements for Legitimacy of the Funeral Prayer

There are three legal conditions in carrying out the funeral prayer which are as follows:

• The funeral prayer is the same as other prayers, namely that the first legal requirement is covering the private parts, being clean from large and small hadas, being clean in body, clothing and place and facing the Qibla.
• The body is clean, meaning it has been washed and shrouded.
• The location of the corpse must be on the Qibla side of the person who lit it, except when the prayer is performed near the altar or performing the occult prayer.

In addition to these three legal requirements, there are several people who have the right to take care of the body, including the following:

• The person who is bequeathed with conditions, the person who is bequeathed is neither a wicked person nor a heretic.
• Scholars and religious leaders.
• The parents of the corpse.
• The children of the corpse.
• Closest family and relatives.
• Muslims.

 

The pillars of the funeral prayer

In addition to the legal requirements for the funeral prayer, here are some pillars of the funeral prayer that must be known. Because if someone who performs the funeral prayer does not know the pillars of the prayer, then the status of the prayer being performed becomes invalid or cancelled. This is the pillar of the funeral prayer.

• Intention
• Stand up if you can
• Do takbir four times
• Raise your hand at the first takbir
• Read Surah Al Fatihah
• Read blessings
• Pray for the corpse
• Say greetings

The intention of the funeral prayer, the time and place for it

In addition to the legal and harmonious requirements, Muslims also need to know the reading of the intention for the funeral prayer, the time for its implementation and the place for performing the funeral prayer. Here’s an explanation.

The intention of the funeral prayer 

Actually, the intention of this funeral prayer is enough just to say it in the heart. According to the scholars, there is no obligation to recite the prayer intention before carrying it out.

However, some scholars are of the opinion that reciting intentions is a sunnah, especially for scholars from the Shafi’i school of thought. Besides that, to add solemnity when performing prayers, it is permissible to say it.

The following is the reading of the intention of the funeral prayer for the bodies of women and men.

The intention of the funeral prayer for a woman’s corpse 

???

Usholii ‘alaa haadzihill mayyitati arba’a takbirootin fardhol kifaayati ma’muuman liillaahia ta’aalaa.

Meaning: I intend to pray over this deceased four times takbir fardhu kifayah, as a makmum because of Allah Ta’ala.

The intention of the funeral prayer for a male body 

???

Ushollii ‘alaa haadzal mayyiti arba’a takbirootin fardhol kifaayati ma’muuman lillaahi ta’aalaa,

Meaning: “I intend to pray over this deceased four times takbir fardhu kifayah, as a makmum because of Allah Ta’ala.”

Time and Place of Implementation of the Funeral Prayer

The Time of the Funeral Prayer

In contrast to the five daily obligatory prayers which have a specific time for their implementation, this funeral prayer can be performed at any time and the time is not specifically determined.

The funeral prayer can be performed at any time, except for the following three times:

1. When the sun rises until the sun rises slightly
2. The sun is right in the middle of the sky
3. When the sun is almost setting

The exception to the funeral prayer time is based on the following histories:

“There are three times, where the Prophet Muhammad gave us a prohibition to pray or to bury the body, namely at these times.

(first), when the sun rises until it rises slightly, (second) when the sun is right in the middle of the sky (noon until the sun is leaning to the west, (third) when the sun is almost setting until the sun has completely set.” (HR. , Muslims).

Place of Implementation of the Funeral Prayer 

In addition to the time of carrying out the funeral prayer, a Muslim must also know the place or location for carrying out the funeral prayer.

Although actually, this funeral prayer can be done anywhere, as long as the place is proper and clean. However, it is better if the funeral prayer is held in the mosque.

This is in accordance with a hadith narrated by Muslim, as follows:

“That when Sa’ad bin Abu Waqash died, Aisyah said: Put him in the mosque so that I can pray for him.

However, they did not agree with this, so he said: By Allah, the Prophet Muhammad really prayed for the bodies of two of Baidla’s sons in the mosque, namely Suhail and his brother.

Muslim then said: Suhail bin Da’d is Ibnul Baidla’ and his mother is Baidla’” (HR. Muslim).

Procedures and readings of the funeral prayer 

The funeral prayer is a prayer that is fardhu kifayah and must be carried out in congregation. Therefore, a Muslim must know the procedures and readings of the funeral prayer whether as an imam or as a congregation. The following is the procedure for praying the body and its reading.

Standing position 

The priest must stand parallel to the head of the male corpse, but if the corpse is female then the priest can stand in the middle. Then the congregation stands behind the priest. This is explained in a hadith narrated by Abu Daud, along with the contents of the hadith.

قال العلاءُ بن زياد: يا أبا حمزةَ، هكذا كانَ يفعَلُ رسولُ اللهِ صلَّى الله عليه وسلَّم؛ God bless you قال: نعم

Meaning: Al ‘Ala bin Ziyad said: O Abu Hamzah (Anas bin Malik), did the Prophet SAW practice in carrying out the funeral prayers like you did? Takbir three times, standing at the head of the man and in the middle of the woman? Anas bin Malik replied: Yes. (Narrated by Abu Daud no. 3194 At Tirmidhi no 1034, authenticated by Al Albani in Sahih Sunan Abi Daud)

Number of shaf 

In addition to the position of the imam when carrying out the funeral prayer, Sinaumed’s also needs to know the number of rows when carrying out the funeral prayer. Some scholars recommend making three rows or rows, even though the first row is still loose. This suggestion is in accordance with the following hadith:

مَنْ صَلَّى عَلَيْهِ ثَلَاثَةُ صُفُوفٍ فَقَدْ أَوْجَبَ

Meaning: Whoever prays the corpse by making three rows, it is obligatory for him (to get forgiveness) (HR. Tirmidhi no. 1028)

The number of takbir and raised hands 

The takbir of the funeral prayer is performed four times. The scholars of ijma on this one thing. According to the following hadith.

أنَّ رسولَ الله صلَّى الله عليه وسلَّم صلَّى على أَصْحمَةَ النجاشيِّ، فكبَّر عليه أربعًا

Meaning: Rasulullah SAW prayed for Ash-hamah An Najasyi, he recited the takbir four times.

The scholars of ijma regarding its shari’ah raised their hands to read the first takbir. Ibn Munzir stated:

God bless you

Meaning: Ulama ijma that people who pray the corpse are prescribed by raising their hands at the first takbir (Al Ijma, 44)

However, according to another hadith it is sunnah to raise your hands at each takbir in the funeral prayer. This is in accordance with the history of Nafi’ about Ibn Umar ra, Nafi’ said:

“Ibn Umar ra raised his hand every time takbir in the funeral prayer.” (Reported by Ibn Abi Syaibah in Al Mushannaf (11498), stated by Shaykh Ibn Baz in his Ta’liq on Fathul Baari (3/227).

Another narration, from Ibn Abbas:

“That he used to raise both hands at every takbir at the funeral prayer.” (authenticated by Ibn Hajar in Talkhis Al-Habis, 2/291)

The first takbir 

As with other prayers, after reading the intention for the funeral prayer, immediately perform the first takbir, namely takbiratul ihram, by placing your hand above the navel. Then read Surah Al Fatihah.

Second Takbeer 

After the first takbir, while raising your hands to ear level and shoulder level, then place your hands again above the navel. After that, recite the Prophet’s blessings, Sinaumed’s can have the following Abrahamic blessings.

“Allohumma sholli ‘alaa Muhammad wa ‘alaa aali Muhammad kamaa shollaita ‘alaa Ibroohiima wa ‘alaa aali Ibroohim, innaka hamiidum majiid.

Allohumma baarik ‘alaa Muhammad wa ‘alaa aali Muhammad kamaa baarokta ‘alaa Ibroohiima wa ‘alaa aali Ibroohim, innaka hamiidum majiid.”

third takbeer 

Read the takbir while raising your hands to ear level and shoulder level. Then place your hand again above the navel. After that, Sinaumed’s can read the following prayer for the body:

Funeral prayers in general 

“Allohummaghfirlahu warhamhu wa’aafihi wa’fu ‘anhu wa akrim nuzulahu wawassi’

Mudkholahu waghsilhu bil maa-i wats tsalji wal barod,

Wa naqqihi minal khothooyaa kamaa naqqoitats tsaubal abyadho minad danas,

Wa abdilhu daaron khoiron min daarihi, wa ahlan khoiron min,

Wa adkhilhul jannata wa a’idzhu min ‘adzaabin qobri au min ‘adzaabin naar.”

Women’s funeral prayer 

“Allohummaghfirlahaa warhamhaa wa’aafihaa wa’fu ‘anhaa wa akrim nuzulahaa

Wawassi’ mudkholahaa waghsilhaa bil maa-i wats tsalji wal barod,

Wa naqqihaa minal khothooyaa kamaa naqqoitats tsaubal abyadho minad danas,

Wa abdilhaa daaron khoiron min daarihaa wa ahlan khoiron min akhoiron,

Wa zaujan khoiron min zaujihaa wa adkhilhal jannata wa a’idzhaa min ‘adzaabin qobri au min ‘adzaabin naar.”

Fourth takbeer 

Raise your hands to earlobe level and in line with your shoulders, then place your hands above your navel again. Then pray by reciting prayers for the bodies and those left behind. The following is the reading of the funeral prayer from the hadith narrated by Abu Daud:

“Allohumma laa tahrimnaa ajrohu wa laa taftinnaa ba’dahu waghfirlanaa walahu.

Meaning: “O Allah, do not forbid us from the reward and do not tempt us after his death. Forgive us and forgive him.”

If the corpse is a woman, then the prayer for the funeral prayer after the fourth takbir will be:

“Allohumma laa tahrimnaa ajrohaa wa laa taftinnaa ba’dahaa waghfirlanaa walahaa),”.

Regards 

The last stage of carrying out the funeral prayer is saying greetings to end the funeral prayer, namely by saying greetings while turning your head to the right and left, as when carrying out other prayers.

That is the procedure for praying the corpse and reading the prayer from the first takbir to the greeting. It should be noted that when going to carry out the funeral prayer, the condition of the body must be clean, that is, it has been washed and properly shrouded.

For Sinaumed’s who are interested in knowing the procedures for praying a funeral or how to take care of a corpse in accordance with Islamic law, Sinaumed’s can find information by reading books.

As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia.com provides various kinds of books such as books about corpses in the teachings of Islam. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Don’t hesitate to buy books at sinaumedia because they are guaranteed to be quality and original!

Author: Khansa 

Readings of Tahmid, Takbir, Tahlil and Their Virtue – In addition to the obligatory practices carried out by Muslims, there are additional practices or sunnahs that can be carried out by Muslims. These practices also have no less benefits than obligatory practices.

These practices are reciting dhikr in the form of tahmid, takbir, and tahlil. There are many benefits to be gained if you read it often. This article will discuss the readings of tahmid, takbir, tahlil, and the virtues of these readings.

Tahmid reading

The reading that is usually done by Muslims and has many benefits is reading tahmid. This reading is pronounced with the pronunciation “Alhamdulillah” ( اَلْحَمْدُ لِلَّهِ رَبِّ الْعَالَمِينَ) which means “All Praise be to Allah SWT” . Usually this reading is recited when finished praying, or in recitation activities. However, actually this reading is not only used at times like that. There are so many reasons to pronounce the tahmid reading.

One of them is when you are getting a favor from Allah SWT. The favors also vary, such as getting sustenance, health, luck, and others. The tahmid reading is used to indicate that we are grateful and grateful to Allah SWT.

However, what needs to be remembered is that gratitude or gratitude to Allah SWT is not only when you are getting happiness. Even though we are experiencing a disaster, we also still have to be grateful by reciting the phrase tahmid or “Alhamdulillah”.

The Virtue of Reading Tahmid

There are many virtues in reading tahmid, including the following:

1. The key to achieving the love of Allah SWT

Tahmid reading is a sentence to be grateful or thank Allah SWT. In addition, this reading which means “All Praise be to Allah SWT” is reading to praise Allah SWT. When this sentence is often uttered, it means that it often means praising and giving thanks to Allah SWT. Therefore we can reach the love of Allah SWT through reading this tahmid.

2. Closing when praying for believers

One of the other virtues for people who read tahmid is the closing prayer of a believer. In the Qur’an, Allah SWT explains that when you finish reading a prayer or it is a closing prayer, you should read the Tahmid sentence.

This is stated in the letter Yunus verse 10 which means “Their prayer in it is, “Subhanakallahumma” (Glory be to You, O our Lord), and their salutation is, “Salam” (peace be upon you). And the closing of their prayer is, “Al-hamdu lillahi Rabbil ‘alamin” (all praise be to Allah, Lord of all the worlds)”. So for a Muslim when finished praying should read tahmid or “Alhamdulillah”

3. The main prayer or dhikr

There are sentences that are loved by Allah SWT. One of them is the sentence tahmid or “Alhamdulillah”. Then the reading of tahmid is the main prayer or dhikr. There is one hadith which contains the words of Rasulullah SAW regarding the favorite reading of Allah SWT.

The hadith reads “Narrated by Samuroh bin Jundub, he said that Rasulullah SAW said, “There are 4 sayings that are most liked by Allah, namely: Subhanallah, Alhamdulillah, Laa ilaaha illallah (tahlil), and Allahu Akbar. No sin on you where ever you start.”.” (HR. Muslim, No. 2137).

4. Removing sins

The next virtue when reciting tahmid is being able to erase sins that have been committed before. Tahmid reading can help to erase sins followed by other readings. Other readings are tahlil and takbir. This is also in the hadith No. 158 narrated by Ahmad.

The present reads “From ‘Abdullah bin ‘Amr, Rasulullah Shallallahu ‘Alaihi Wa Sallam said, “No one on this earth says: Laa ilaha illallah, wallahu akbar, subhanallah, wal hamdulillah, wa laa hawla wa laa quwwata illa billah, but his sins will be erased even as much as the foam in the ocean.”.”

5. Increase fortune

In the Qur’an, precisely in the letter of Abraham verse 7, Allah says “And (remember) when your Lord announced, “If you are grateful, I will surely add (favors) to you, but if you deny (My favors) , then surely My punishment will be very severe.”

The letter explains that when we are grateful for the favors given by Allah SWT, then Allah SWT will continue to increase His blessings for us. One of the uses of reading tahmid is to show our gratitude. Therefore, Sinaumed’s, no matter how many favors Allah SWT gives, we must always be grateful by saying the sentence tahmid or pronouncing “Alhamdulillah”.

6. Relieve the problem

When you get a problem or a difficulty, the way to relieve it is to read tahmid. One of the tahmid readings is when we are receiving a favor from Allah SWT. However, Sinaumed’s needs to remember that the favors from Allah SWT do not always feel good for us. Because what is good for Allah SWT is definitely good for us, even though sometimes it doesn’t feel like it.

Therefore, when we have a problem, we should continue to read tahmid. When we read “Alhamdulillah” when things are not good, then it will alleviate the problems we are experiencing. Reading “Alhamdulillah” will make us feel more relieved and calm.

Takbir reading

The takbir is recited by reciting the phrase “Allahu Akbar” (ٱللَّٰهُ أَكْبَرُ). This takbir pronunciation means “God is Greatest”. The meaning of this sentence is one of the characteristics possessed by Allah SWT, namely the Greatest. A trait that none of his creatures have. This takbir is often recited during dhikr.

The Virtue of Reading Takbir

There are several virtues of reading takbir, including the following:

1. Give goodness to life

Hadith no 2072 narrated by Muslim explains that there was a Bedouin Arab who came to Rasulullah SAW, then said: “Teach me dhikr for me to read!” Rasulullah SAW said: “Say: There is no God who has the right to be worshiped except Allah, the One and Only, for Him there is no partner. Allah is the Greatest. Praise be to Allah a lot. Glory be to Allah, Lord of the worlds and there is no power except with the help of Allah, the Most Honorable, the Most Wise.” The Bedouin said: “That sentence is for my Lord, which one is for me?” The Prophet said: “Say: O Allah! Forgive me, have mercy on me, guide me and give me sustenance.”

The virtue of takbir based on this hadith is for the good of life. Often reading takbir and coupled with other dhikr readings will make it easier to get close to Allah SWT. So that life becomes easier.

2. Can help erase sins

Referring back to hadith no. 158 narrated by Ahmad. Reading takbir readings will help erase the sins committed before. Takbir readings are also added to other dhikr readings.

3. Get peace of mind

Getting peace of mind is also a virtue of reciting takbir. Takbir reading which means “God is Greatest” can give you peace of mind. When reading takbir it will remind us that Allah SWT is the Greatest, everything can happen according to His will. Nothing is impossible for Allah SWT.

4. Strengthen piety

One of the virtues of reading other takbir readings is strengthening piety. When we often read takbir or dhikr, we will be closer to Allah SWT. Then over time our piety will become stronger.

5. Complete Ramadan fasting

After fasting Ramadan for one month, it is closed by celebrating Eid al-Fitr. To perfect Ramadan fasting, ahead of Eid al-Fitr it is recommended to read takbir. Reading or reciting the takbir is also combined with reciting tahlil, or reciting “Laa ilaha illallah”.

Tahlil reading

The priority of reading tahlil

There are several virtues of reading tahlil, including the following:

1. Freed from hellfire

The virtue of reciting tahlil is that you will be free from the fires of hell. Hadith no 873 narrated by Muslim explains, once Rasulullah SAW heard the muezzin saying ‘Asyhadu alla ilaha illallah’. Then he said to the muezzin, “You are free from hell.”

2. Improving faith

Reading tahlil can also improve faith to become stronger. If you always read the tahlil sentence, then the longer the faith becomes even better.

The hadith narrated by Ahmad and Thabrani from Abu Hurairah RA explains that Rasulullah SAW said, “Always renew your faith.” A friend asked, “O Messenger of Allah, how do we renew our faith?” Rasulullah SAW said, “Increase your words Laa Ilaaha illallah (there is no god but Allah).”

3. The key to open the 8 doors of heaven.

From Ubadah bin Shamit radhiyallahu ‘anhu, Rasulullah SAW said, “Whoever says, ‘I testify that there is no god who has the right to be worshiped properly except Allah alone, there is no partner for Him, Muhammad is His servant and His messenger, and (testify) that Jesus is a servant of Allah and the son of His servants, and His words were conveyed to Maryam and the Spirit from Him, and (also testify) that heaven is true and hell is true, so Allah will surely enter him into heaven from any of the eight gates of heaven he wishes.” (HR. Muslim no. 149)”

If you often read the tahlil sentence every day, then he can enter through one of the 8 doors. He can choose whichever door he wants to enter.

4. Brings Good Luck

In one of the hadiths narrated by Bukhari, Rasulullah SAW answered a question from Abu Hurairah RA who asked who the luckiest person would be to get intercession later. Then the Messenger of Allah replied that he was the one who uttered the phrase Laa ilaha illallah with a sincere and sincere heart.

That’s some information about reading tahmid, takbir and tahlil and the virtues of reading it. There is a lot of other information about prayers or readings that Sinaumed’s can practice. Find many other interesting books at www.sinaumedia.com. sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits will display the recommended books that Sinaumed’s is looking for.

Also read articles related to  “Reading Tahmid, Takbir, Tahlil and Their Virtue”  :

• Anger in Islam
• Procedure for Dhuha Prayer
• Characteristics of a Hypocrite
• Procedure for Ablution
• Understanding the Qur’an and Hadith
• Honest Behavior in Islam
• Definition of Zakat
• Pillars of Hajj
• Understanding Aurat
• List of 99 Asmaul Husna and their Meanings – Interpreting the Good Name of Allah SWT
• Noble Qualities
• Procedure for Ablution
• Definition of Al-Quran and Hadith
• Definition of Morals

Source: from various sources

Author: Wida Kurniasih

Qunut Prayer – The qunut prayer at dawn must be familiar to Sinaumed’s’ ears , especially those who are Muslim, because they always read and practice it every day. This is because the majority of Muslim communities in Indonesia follow the Shafi’i school of thought by including this qunut prayer in their morning prayers. But even so, there are still some ordinary people who feel confused about what the qunut prayer is. In fact, not infrequently, some other people consider the qunut prayer to be heresy in the process of the morning prayer service.

In fact, what is the qunut prayer? What kinds of qunut prayers are applied in this morning prayer? What are the procedures for carrying out as well as the application of the qunut prayer in the morning prayer? Let’s look at the following reviews so that Sinaumed’s understands these things!

What Is Qunut Prayer?

Basically, the qunut prayer is a prayer that is read in a sunnah manner when carrying out prayer services, especially at the dawn and witr prayers which are held at the end of the month of Ramadan. The existence of this qunut prayer besides being a complement to prayer, can also be considered as a prayer to ask for blessings, forgiveness, and protection from Allah SWT. The reading of this qunut prayer will later be said while standing upright and the law is sunnah, although some Indonesian people have carried it out so that it looks as if it is obligatory.

If based on the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), the word “qunut” has the meaning of a special prayer which is usually recited after the i’tidal in the last cycle of certain prayers, such as in the dawn prayer. This Qunut can also be read because there is a danger, calamity, or calamity that is befalling the community.

In Language

If you trace the meaning of qunut in Arabic, it turns out that the term has many meanings, including:

a) Stand up

As with the words of Rasulullah SAW which reads,

Meaning: “The most important prayer is the one that lasts a long time” (HR. Muslim)

b) Submit

As with the words of Allah SWT which reads,

Meaning: “Even to Him belongs what is in the heavens and on earth, all are subject to Him.” (Al-Baqarah 116)

c) Obey

As with the words of Allah SWT which reads,

Meaning: O Maryam, obey your Lord, prostrate and bow down with those who bow down . (QS. Ali ‘Imran: 43)

d) Silence

As in the history by Zaid bin Arqam, which reads.

Meaning: “From Zaid bin Arqam he said: you used to talk to each other when you prayed until the verse came down: then we were ordered to be silent.” HR. Bukhari and Muslim, Bukhari’s editorial

e) Prayer

As narrated by Imam Nawawi (676 H) who said that,

Meaning: “Qunut has many meanings in Arabic, among them is prayer, both prayer for good or prayer for evil.”

In Terms

Meanwhile, according to the terms of the scholars consider that the word “Qunut” can be interpreted as follows.

Meaning: “According to shari’at expert scholars qunut is the name for prayer in prayer at a certain moment when standing up”

Qunut Prayer Reading

Allah hummah dinii fiiman hadait.

Wa’afini fiman ‘afait.

Watawallani fiman tawal-laiit.

Wabaariklii fiimaa a’thait.

Waqinii syarramaa qadhait.

Fainnaka taqdhii walaa yuqdha ‘alaik.

 Wainnahu laayadzilu man walait. 

Walaa ya’izzu man ‘aadait.

Tabaarakta rabbana wa ta’ala.

Falakalhamdu ‘alaa maa qodhoit.

Astaghfiruka wa atuubu ilaik.

Washallallahu ‘ala Sayyidina Muhammadin Nabiyyil ummiyyi. Wa Alaa aalihi wa shahbihi Wa Sallam.

It means:

“O Allah, give us guidance as the people you have guided, give us health like the people you have given health, Give us power like the people you have given power, Give blessings to the things you have given us, Take care of us from the bad things that you have ensured.

Indeed, you are the one who determines and no one determines you, in fact there is no humiliation for those whom you give power, and those who you oppose will not be honored.

You, O our God, you are holy and you are sublime.

May Allah give mercy, blessings and peace be upon our Prophet Muhammad SAW, his family and companions.”

Kinds of Qunut Prayers

The existence of this qunut prayer has three kinds, namely the Qunut Nazilah prayer, the Qunut Witir prayer, and the Qunut prayer which is read during the second cycle of the dawn prayer. Well, here is the description.

1. Qunut Nazilah prayer

Namely the qunut prayer which is recited after performing the bowing or i’tidal movement in the last cycle of prayer. The law is sunnah hai’ah alias if you forget to be left behind, then it is not sunnah to prostrate sahwi. This qunut Nazilah prayer is usually done because there is an event or disaster that befalls the community, such as natural disasters, epidemics, and others.

The qunut Nazilah prayer is modeled on the worship of Rasulullah SAW, who at that time recited the qunut Nazilah prayer for a full month over the occurrence of a disaster in the form of the killing of Qurra (the companions of the Prophet who memorized the Koran) at the Ma’unah well. In addition, it is also based on the history of Abi Hurairah ra. who revealed that: “Rasulullah SAW if you want to pray for someone’s good or pray for someone’s evil, then he prays qunut after bowing ‘” (HR Bukhari and Ahmad)

The following is the qunut Nazilah prayer:

Allahummahdini fiman hadait, wa afini fiman ‘afait watawallani fiman tawallait, wa barikli fima a’thaita, wa qini syarra ma qadhait, fainnaka taqdhi wa la yuqdha alaik, wa innahu la yadzillu man walait, wa la yaizzu man adait, tabarakta rabbana wa ta ‘alait, fa lakalhamdu ‘ala ma qadhait, astgahfiruka wa atubu ilaik.

Allahummadfa’ annal ghala’a wal waba’a wal fakhsya’a wal munkar was syuyufal mukhtalfata was syadaidal mihan, ma dzhara minha wa ma bathana, min baladina hadza Khassah, wa min buldanil muslimina aammah, innaka ala kulli syai’in qadir, wa shallallahu ala sayyidina muhammadin wal hamdulillahi rabbil ‘alamin.

Meaning: “O Allah, guide me like those whom You have guided. Give me health like the people you have given health to. Lead me along with those whom You have led.

Bless all that You have led. Bless all that You have given me. And protect me from evil. For verily it is You who determines and no one judges (decides) for You. Verily, those whom You have given authority will not disgrace.

And it will not be glorious those whom You are against. Blessed are You and Most High are You. Praise be to You for what You have ensured. I beg forgiveness and repentance to You. May Allah give mercy and greetings to our lord Prophet Muhammad SAW and all his family and friends.”

2. Qunut Witr prayer

According to the followers of Imam Abu Hanifah (Hanafiyah), this qunut witr prayer is performed in the third cycle before bowing in every sunnah prayer. Meanwhile, according to followers of Imam Ahmad bin Hambal (Hanabilah), this qunut witir prayer is performed after bowing. Then according to followers of Imam Syafi’i (Syafi’iyah), this qunut witr prayer is performed at the end of the witr prayer, namely after bowing in the second half of Ramadan. However, according to followers of Imam Malik, the existence of the qunut witr prayer is not sunnah.

The following is the qunut witir prayer and its meaning.

Meaning: “O Allah, show me as to those You have guided, and grant me forgiveness as to those You have forgiven, and take care of me as to those You have nurtured, and give me blessings as You have bestowed on them, and save me from the dangers that You have appointed.”

3. Qunut Prayer in the Second Rakaat of Fajr Prayer

According to the followers of Imam Abu Hanifah and Imam Ahmad, the existence of the qunut prayer at dawn is not sanctioned because the hadith of the Prophet SAW revealed that he once performed the qunut prayer during the Fajr prayer for a month which has been removed (mansukh) by ijma’. As narrated by Ibn Mas’ud:

Meaning: “Narrated by Ibn Mas’ud: That the Prophet SAW had done the qunut prayer for one month to pray for the Arabs who were still alive, then the Prophet SAW left him.” (Muslim HR)

Even so, until now this morning qunut prayer is still carried out by the majority of Muslims, especially in Indonesia. According to the followers of Imam Malik (Malikiyyah), this dawn qunut prayer is legally sunnah but is required to be slow. Likewise according to Syafa’iyyah who revealed that the law for the qunut prayer at dawn is sunnah ab’ad (if you forget to miss it, you are circumcised in prostration for sahwi) to be performed in the second cycle of the dawn prayer. This is because when Rasulullah SAW raised his head from bowing in the second cycle of the dawn prayer, he also recited qunut.

The following is the morning qunut prayer:

Allahummah dinii fii man hadait, wa ‘aafiinii fii man ‘aafait, wa tawallanii fii man tawallait, wa baarik lii fii maa a’thait, wa qi nii sharra maa qadlait, fa innaka taqdli wa laa yuqdlaa ‘alaik, wa innahuu laa yadzillu want waalait, wa laa ya’izzu man ‘aadait, tabaarakta rabbanaa wa ta’aalait, falakal hamdu ‘ala maa qadait, astaghfiruka wa atubu ilaik. Washallallahu ‘ala sayyidina muhammadin nabiyyil ummiyi wa ‘alaalihi wa shohbihi wa sallama.

It means:

“O Allah, show me as those whom You have shown, and grant me health as those whom You have given health. And take care of me as the person You have cared for, and bless me in what You have given, and save me from the dangers of evil that You have ordained.

So in fact it is You who punishes and is not subject to punishment. So verily those whom You lead are not dishonorable. And it is not glorious those whom You are hostile to. Glory be to You, O our Lord, and Exalted to You. Glory to You is all praise above that which You punish. I ask forgiveness from You and I repent to You. (And may Allah) bestow mercy and peace on our lord the Prophet Muhammad, his family and companions.”

The Qunut Prayer Procedure

1. Raising Both Hands

The procedure for performing the qunut prayer in prayer is that it is recommended to raise both hands when reading the qunut prayer, this is the opinion chosen by Imam Nawawi:

It means:

“Is it advisable to raise both hands when qunut? There are two popular opinions (among the Syafi’iyyah scholars); the first is not recommended, the second is recommended, the second is authentic according to the Syafi’iyyah scholars.”

2. It is not Sunnah to wipe the face

After finishing reading the qunut prayer, both the priest, makmum or munfarid immediately go down to prostrate and it is not recommended to wipe the face with both hands. In this regard, after mentioning several opinions among the Syafi’iyyah scholars regarding this matter, Imam Nawawi said:

Meaning: “What is authentic is that it is recommended to raise both hands without wiping the face”

Then, it is better for us to be silent when reading tsana (praise). When the priest reads qunut, there are several moments as if the priest is silent and does not read something, even though the priest is actually reading tsana (praise) to Allah. Therefore, as a community, we should participate in reciting tsana (praise) or silence.

3. It is prescribed to turn the palm of the hand

In this procedure, in several places, we often find that when the priest reads certain editorials in the qunut prayer, the palms of the hands that were facing upwards are turned back, so that the backs of the hands are facing upwards. Indeed, what is the point of all this? Shaykhul Islam Zakaria al-Ansari (w 926 H) said in his book:

Meaning: “The scholars say: it is sunnah to turn the palms of the hands to the sky in every prayer to repel reinforcements, and to face the palms to the sky in every prayer that contains a request, that is because the Prophet Muhammad SAW, when praying istisqa, turned the backs of his hands to the sky. sky according to the history of the Muslim priest, then qiyaskanlah on istisqo which is equivalent to it “

Therefore, turning the hands when praying is done when asking to reject reinforcements. Meanwhile, if you want to beg or ask for a request from Allah SWT, then what is right is to raise your hand with your palm facing upwards.

So, that’s an overview of what a qunut prayer is and the types of qunut prayers that Sinaumed’s can apply in prayer. Has Sinaumed’s practiced this qunut prayer when he is about to pray the dawn or witr prayers?

Source:

Maulana, Galih. (2018). Peel Complete Qunut Dawn. Jakarta: Fiqh Publishing House.

Zatnika, H. Analysis of the fatwa of the Muhammadiyah HPT (Association of Tarjih Decisions) 1971 and of the 1972 Association of Tarjih Rules concerning the prayer of qunut for the dawn prayer (Bachelor’s thesis, Jakarta: Faculty of Syari’ah and Law of UIN Syarif Hidayatullah).

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

https://iqra.id/

Also Read!

• Definition and Procedures for Idain Prayer
• The Correct Procedure for Prostrating Gratitude
• Arabic, Latin and Translation of Ayat Kursi
• The Meaning of Azan and Its History in Islam
• When is the Time for the Midnight Prayer?
• Short Surahs To Read During Prayer
• Dhikr and Prayer After the Five Daily Prayers
• The Law and Virtue of Congregational Prayer
• The Virtue of Surah Al-Insyirah and How to Practice It
• Best Hours for Tahajjud Prayers and Their Virtue
• Arabic, Latin Readings, Translations and Stories From Surah Al-Fil

We often hear the term Quantum Physics through various films. For Sinaumed’s, who is a fan of science-fiction films, especially the MCU or Marvel Cinematic Universe, such as Ant-Man in 2015, and also Avengers: Endgame in 2019, they often hear the term quantum physics. But what exactly is meant by quantum physics?

Quantum Physics is a science that is also often referred to as modern physics. Where, in general, the type of physics that we learn in school is classical physics or also often called Newtonian Physics which is based on the name of Isaac Newton who became a pioneer in Physics.

Meanwhile, quantum physics itself was first introduced by Albert Einstein which opened many people’s views regarding the universe, just like how Isaac Newton succeeded in changing people’s views regarding the laws of the universe in his day.

If you take it as an example, classical physics is a science that discusses the laws of solid objects that we encounter every day, but quantum physics itself is a science that discusses objects that are very small and cannot be seen with the naked eye. Check out the following information.

Understanding Quantum Physics

Quantum physics itself is a science or study that studies the behavior of matter and energy at the molecular, atomic, nuclear, and microscopic levels, as well as smaller matter and energy as well.

The word quantum itself is taken from a direct translation from Latin, namely quantum which means how much. This refers to the discrete units of matter and energy that are observed and also predicted in quantum physics.

In various studies related to physics on this one, the researcher cannot directly see the object he is studying, but can only feel its presence through a certain detectable size.

For this reason, quantum physics is a study that is difficult to study and is not discussed in detail in school subjects because it generally focuses more on mathematical concepts and formulations without using direct observations, because this is difficult for most people to understand.

Quantum physics is also sometimes called quantum mechanics or also known as quantum field theory. Quantum physics itself is a science that examines the various very small objects that make up the universe.

Quantum physics also studies the behavior and properties of these various quantum bodies and their resulting impact on the universe.

From the point of view of quantum physics, everything we see is not what we see. For example, a solid object that we generally see and feel has a solid shape and is hard, is actually a collection of various constituent molecules.

The existing molecule itself is a collection of atoms. The atom, which is often said to be the smallest building block, also consists of various subatomic particles which have no density at all.

In reality, subatomic particles themselves are both bundles and waves of information and concentrations of energy. Based on this, it can be said that 99.9% of the atomic particles are empty space.

Based on the explanation above, it can be concluded that all parts of the world and the physical objects in it, including us as humans, consist of emptiness. So, what distinguishes an object from other existing objects is the frequency and vibration of the energy that exists.

Pioneers of Quantum Physics

Prior to Albert Einstein, a German physicist had contributed earlier to the development of quantum physics through his scientific papers on the topic of black body radiation which were published in 1900.

In addition to the two figures, there is also a scientist named Niels Bohr who also proposed the shape of the real atomic particles that we know to this day. There are also other names such as Erwin Schrodinger, Werner Heisenberg, and various other scientists.

As discussed above, the various concepts of quantum law stated by these scientists themselves have different views from existing classical physics.

The concept of the laws of quantum physics cannot be observed directly, but the truth can be known through the behavior of other objects and mathematical formulations that can be validated.

Theory of Quantum Physics

The theory of quantum physics itself arises because of various phenomena that are not in accordance with the ideas that exist in classical physics. Through this, quantum physicists draw conclusions regarding this theory, as follows.

• All objects in the universe are a collection of molecules consisting of a collection of atoms. All these physically visible objects are nothing but vibrational energy. This phenomenon causes these objects to appear real, whereas in reality this is not true.
• Matter that exists in the universe comes from empty space and is an energy that appears and also vibrates.
• Quantum physics scientists also say that a real reality is just an illusion.
• Quantum physics scientists have also proven that an object can be in 2 different dimensions at the same time.
• When the spirit in the body completely dominates the body, then the laws of quantum physics apply within it.
• A person can become immortal or immortal if he can travel at the speed of light. At that speed of light, both past, present, and future can exist at the same time.
• Quantum consciousness is a theory of consciousness in which all existing people and everything in the universe are related to one another or have a connection. This is stated based on the fact that the quantum field can reach everything.
• Lazan expressed his opinion that several universes could simultaneously exist. This means that people who have died and also people who travel using the same tunnel, will end up in the same world they lived in before, this can also be called reincarnation. Lazan also added his opinion, that the world does not end when a person’s body dies.
• The existing biocentrism theory states that the human body can die, but the existing consciousness will always exist or be eternal. This means that the death of consciousness does not exist.
• Interactions carried out between fellow living things can affect everything in the universe.

Applications of Quantum Physics

The application of quantum physics in Indonesia itself is still rarely done because this science focuses on a concept. Therefore, until now there is still no special quantum physics department in Indonesia.

However, in various developed countries the field of quantum physics is in great demand because in these countries they have developed a technology that uses various concepts of quantum physics in it.

One of the technologies is a quantum computer that uses the principles of quantum physics in its processor calculations and a fusion reactor to create a small artificial shell that is used as an energy source.

Apart from quantum computers, there are also the results of observations of black holes or black holes which were carried out for the first time and at that time went viral. A black hole or black hole itself is a singularity that cannot be explained through classical physics. With the help of quantum physics, the phenomena that occur can be further explained.

Interesting Facts Regarding Quantum Physics

1. The world of quantum physics is not smooth

The first fact regarding quantum physics is that the world of quantum physics is not smooth. By parable, for example, if Sinaumed’s is going to a shoe store to choose a pair of shoes with the right size.

However, in this quantum subatomic world it uses this analogy, which has also been proven by Albert Einstein when he won the Nobel Prize in 1921.

In his research in 1905 entitled “On a Heuristic Point of View Concerning the Production and Transformation of Light”, Albert Einstein again proved the concept of quantization of energy, which stated that energy is present in multiples of quanta. For this reason, this field of science is called quantum physics.

Quanta itself is the Planck constant derived from Max Planck and is the father of quantum physics. In 1900, Max Planck tried to solve the mystery related to black body radiation by using the celestial object of the Sun, based on this research Max Planck succeeded in producing Planck’s Law.

Based on these results, the theory issued by Max Planck is also in line with the experiments conducted by Albert Einstein.

2. Waves and particles are commonplace in the world of quantum physics

A fact related to the second quantum physics is that waves and particles are commonplace in the world of quantum physics. Where, in 1906, a British physicist named Sir JJ Thomson won his Nobel prize thanks to his discovery of the electron as a particle.

However, in 1937 the son of JJ Thomson, whose name was Sir George P. Thomson also won the Nobel prize for successfully demonstrating the nature of electrons as waves. Of the two findings, which one is correct according to Sinaumed’s?

Both statements turned out to be equally true. Where the duality between waves and particles is a foundation of quantum physics that applies to electrons as well as light.

Sometimes pua, we also need to see a light as an electromagnetic wave. However, light can also be described by means of articles known as photons.

For example, a telescope can focus light waves from a distant star and act as a vessel for that light to collect photons. This means that light can also exert pressure when photon particles hit an object.

This principle itself is not something new. Where, this principle is also applied to move spacecraft through the sun sails, and change the path of dangerous asteroids so they don’t crash into planet Earth.

3. One object in two places at the same time is not impossible

The fact related to the third quantum physics is that an object in two places at the same time is not impossible. Where apart from being the foundation of quantum physics, the duality between waves and particles is also a concept of superposition.

Where this happens when a quantum object exists in several states at the same time. For example, an electron can be in several locations at the same time. Based on this, then physics on this one discusses matters related to probability.

The existence of the object itself can best be interpreted after we see it. Based on these various opportunities, it is then formulated into a wave function.

However, making these observations can cause the wave function to collapse and destroy the superposition, which forces an object to enter one of the many possible states.

This is what Erwin Schrodinger wanted to prove, who was an Austrian-Irish physicist in 1935, also known as Schrodinger’s cat. By having a conversation with Albert Einstein, Erwin Schrodinger conducted this imaginary experiment by providing a paradox about superposition from quantum physics.

For example, a cat is placed in a chamber with a radioactive substance and a Geiger counter. Since the device is in two states until the measurement is taken, the cat is in an on and off state until we intervene.

However, if we only want to make observations, then the superposition will collapse.

4. The multiverse becomes possible in quantum physics

The fact regarding the fourth quantum physics is that the multiverse becomes possible in quantum physics. This statement itself arises from the idea that an observation can destroy the wave function and force the quantum choice which is also known as the Copenhagen interpretation by Niels Bohr and Werner Heisenberg of quantum physics.

It is this statement that creates an understanding of the multiverse or different universes. However, proponents of the idea of ​​a multiverse also say that there is no choice at all.

Where when measurements are made, reality is split into two copies of itself, where one copy produces A, and the other copy produces B.

However, in the theory of quantum particles so far, there is only one reality which is extremely complicated and consists of so many tangled layers. When the reality is scaled down, the various layers unravel into the multiverse. This process is also referred to as decoherence by physicists.

5. Physics helps in understanding the stars

Facts related to the fifth quantum physics is that this physics helps in understanding stars. Where in 1913, Niel Bohr who was a Danish physicist and also Ernest Rutherford who was a New Zealand physicist drew a model which stated that electrons orbiting in an atom also experience quantization.

Electrons become based on a predetermined size, and this concept itself is called energy levels. When an electron drops from a higher energy state to a lower one, photons with the same energy level and gap size are emitted.

An electron can also absorb light particles and use this energy to jump to a higher energy level. This concept is often used by astronomers.

So, that’s a brief explanation regarding quantum physics which has a different perspective from the classical physics that we learn in school. Based on the information we found above, we can also find out various interesting facts about this science regarding the truth of the multiverse and the contents of this universe.

For Sinaumed’s who want to study this science further, they can read books available at sinaumedia related to quantum physics. sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits will always try to provide all your needs! Hope it is useful!

Qualitative Research – In general, in scientific research activities, there are two approaches that are commonly used, namely the quantitative and qualitative approaches. In quantitative studies, studies use raw data in numerical form, which are processed statistically to draw conclusions from hypotheses.

An example of a data collection method for quantitative research is a questionnaire. While the qualitative approach emphasizes the quality aspects of the entity under study. Quoting information on the Ministry of National Education’s website, the qualitative approach has an emic perspective.

The meaning from the emic point of view is a form of qualitative research approach that uses data in the form of narratives, story details, expressions, and construction results from respondents or informants. Data can be obtained from data collection techniques in the form of in-depth interviews and observations.

Definition of Qualitative Research

Qualitative research can be understood as a research method that uses descriptive data in the form of written or spoken language from observable people and actors. This qualitative approach is used to explain and analyze individual or group phenomena, events, social dynamics, attitudes, beliefs, and perceptions.

Therefore, the research process with a qualitative approach begins with the development of basic assumptions. Then associated with the principles of thought used in research. The data collected in the survey is then interpreted.

For example research with a qualitative approach in the field of sociology, it will reveal the social meaning of the phenomenon obtained by the research subject. This topic is usually received from participants or respondents. In this way, researchers with this approach then try to answer how human socio-cultural experience is formed and then given meaning.

Research subjects with a qualitative approach include all aspects or areas of human life, namely humans and all who are influenced by them. Qualitative methods are not as fast in analyzing data as quantitative research.

In a quantitative study, raw data can be processed immediately. However, data in qualitative studies requires a deeper systematic process. Examples of quantitative studies such as answering the question why some people who live on the slopes of a volcano are willing to evacuate if a volcano erupts.

Meanwhile, qualitative research will answer questions that investigate meaning. Such as discussing the meaning of the mountains , disasters, life, and other aspects of those populations who choose not to flee.

Definition of Qualitative Research According to Experts

Based on the description of the definition of a qualitative approach above, based on the theoretical basis, the following is the definition of qualitative research according to experts.

1. Lexy J Moleong

Lexy J. Moleong (2005:6) reveals that qualitative methods aim to understand the phenomena experienced by research subjects. This includes explaining behavior, perceptions, motivations, behavior, etc. as a whole, in terms of language and in a particular natural context, using various natural methods.

2. Sugiyono

Sugiyono (2009: 15) reveals the definition of a qualitative research approach based on the post-positivist philosophy used by researchers to study the state of the main natural objects (not experiments). Means include targeted sampling of data from data sources. The survey method uses triangulation (combination), data analysis is inductive or qualitative in nature, and qualitative findings mean not generalizations.

3. Suryano

Saryono (2010) revealed that qualitative studies are designed to investigate, discover, explain, and explain the qualities or features of social impacts that cannot be explained, measured, or explained by a quantitative approach, namely research.

 

 

Characteristics or Characteristics of Qualitative Research

Based on the above understanding, research with a qualitative approach has characteristics or characteristics that are different from other approaches, as follows:

1. Data Sources from the Natural Environment

The resources used in this research usually come from the natural environment, namely various events that occur in social conditions and situations. The research process is carried out through direct interaction through observation, recording, and extracting sources related to the events studied.

2. Analytical Descriptive

The process of collecting data is done by observing, interviewing, analyzing and documenting. If these are not numeric formats, they will be placed on the survey site. Data analysis is in the form of an explanation of the situation under study while the presentation is in the form of an explanation of the story.

3. Focus on Process

This study combined the required data and information with questions to clarify the process. These questions provide an explanation of the status of activities, procedures, stages, reasons, and interactions that occur during the research process.

4. It is Inductive

In this case the investigation is inductive. That is, it uses discrete but relevant data. This study usually starts in the field. That is, starting with empirical facts that researchers must verify directly in the field.

In this process, the researcher explores the discovery process by recording, analyzing, reporting, and completing research activities. The findings in this field, which are still in the form of theories, principles and concepts, are further developed.

5. Prioritizing Meaning

In qualitative research, transmitted meaning refers to people’s perceptions of the events being studied. For example, the study of the teacher’s role in student success at school. Researchers focused on teachers’ opinions about school students. Look for data, information, and teachers’ opinions about student achievement, support issues, and why students aren’t supported. Researchers also obtained information from students as a comparison material. The accuracy of participant data and information is communicated by researchers so that research results can be interpreted correctly.

 

 

Qualitative Research Objectives

According to Rachmat Kriyantono, the purpose of research with a qualitative approach is to explain in detail the phenomena that occur in society by collecting detailed and complete data. This shows that the integrity and depth of the data investigated is very important in this study.

According to Rachmat Kriyantono, the deeper and more thorough the data obtained, the higher the quality of the survey conducted. In practice, the number of objects to be surveyed is usually small because the depth of the data is more important than the amount of data.

Types of Qualitative Research

In practice, there are several types of qualitative research, as follows:

1. Basic

This type of research aims to find something that has been proven in the form of research, without considering the benefits for society. This research was conducted without consideration of practical objectives. Therefore, this research is not intended for the general public.

The main focus of this type of research is the continuity and completeness of science and philosophy. This study did not consider whether it is related to social events. Also, the thinking of this type of researcher may not be thinking about a more specific research perspective.

2. Phenomenology

Phenomenology is a form of research in which a researcher seeks to understand how one or more people experience a phenomenon. This investigative method begins by observing and investigating the focus of the phenomenon under investigation and paying attention to the subjective aspects of the object’s behavior. The researcher then looks for meaningful information or gives meaning to the phenomenon being studied.

3. Verify

This research is a type of research that examines the truth of existing knowledge in the field of education, such as concepts, principles, procedures, discussions, and educational practices.

4. Description

Descriptive investigation is a type of investigation that explains or explains a problem. Descriptive studies aim to describe populations, situations or phenomena accurately and systematically.

5. Exploration

Exploratory research is a type of research that aims to find new or applied knowledge and new problems in the field of education.

6. Ethnography

This study seeks to clarify socio-cultural implications by examining patterns and life interactions between certain socio-cultural groups (groups with the same culture) in a certain space or context.

Ethnography uses two basic concepts as a basis for research: cultural aspects (anthropology) and language (linguistics). This study aims to determine the forms and functions of language in culture in people’s lives. Interpretation of social groups, operating systems, and interactions within them.

7. Case Studies

Case studies are based on events that have occurred. This study looks at the interaction between one variable and another. The aim of this research is to study how events occur systematically over a long period of time. A case study is a type of qualitative research that is conducted under certain circumstances using programmes, activities, events and groups. This study will help get a rough idea of ​​the background, situation, and interactions that occur.

8. Applied

In this type of research, the results tend to be new applications, pure science applications, rather than new forms of science. Researchers who use this type have the property of applying basic research type insights. Goals are practical goals in a particular area. Applied researchers usually want their research results to be useful and beneficial to the general public.

9. Historical Method

This type of historical qualitative research emphasizes historical issues. The focus is on past events and their reconstruction using existing data sources and witnesses. Sources of data from historical studies are historical records, artifacts, oral explanations, and witnesses who can be accounted for. Simply put, you’re looking at a developmental phenomenon that is based on change over time.

 

10. Narrative

Narrative This type of research is a type of research that is explained directly orally by telling or telling the contents of the research. This survey is collected through discussions, conversations, or interviews. In short, individual experiences are told to the researcher and again in the researcher’s words.

12. Action

Action research translates knowledge into real-life behavior and studies how to respond to situations on the ground. This research aims to improve processes and understand how good professional teaching practice can improve activity outcomes.

13. Evaluation

In addition, this survey was conducted after another survey and in the form of a new survey. This research is a derivative of applied research. The purpose of this type of research is to assess the success, benefits, usefulness, contribution and feasibility of a particular program, product or activity, and ultimately to improve to increase the results.

Qualitative Research Method Procedures

Data analysis in qualitative research is interpreted as an effort by researchers to systematically search for and organize notes from observations, interviews, and others in order to better understand the case under study and present it as a result. To gain this understanding, the analysis must be continued by trying to find meaning.

The article “Qualitative Data Analysis” by Ahmad Rijali published in the Al Hadharah Journal Volume 17 (2018), edited by UIN Antasari, explains that there are four interrelated phases of qualitative research.

Data analysis in qualitative research begins with the stages of data collection, data reduction and classification, data presentation and drawing conclusions. Qualitative data analysis is integrated into data collection activities, data reduction, data presentation, and drawing conclusions on research results. The description of the four stages of qualitative research is as follows:

1. Data collection

The process of collecting data in qualitative research can be done in various ways by going directly to the field. This can be done through observation or observations, questionnaires, in-depth interviews with survey subjects, documentary surveys, and focus group discussions.

2. Data reduction and data classification

This step filters the raw data. Researchers select the most relevant data to use to support their research. Qualitative data can be obtained from interviews and observations. Therefore, sorting is needed to facilitate data classification. Therefore, the filtered data is categorized as needed. For example, in a survey, data is categorized by informant or survey location category.

3. Data display

After reducing and classifying the data, move to the data view. In this phase of the process, the researcher designs the rows and columns of the qualitative data matrix and determines the type and format of the data to be entered into the metric fields. For example, data is displayed in descriptions, charts, flowcharts, charts, and so on. Data is organized for readability.

4. Draw conclusions

After going through the three processes, the final step is drawing conclusions. The content of the conclusion must include all relevant information found in the research. In addition, the language used to explain conclusions must be simple and easy to understand.

 

 

Differences between Qualitative and Quantitative Research

To help readers understand the true meaning of the explanation above, we will discuss a little about the differences between research with qualitative and quantitative approaches. The most basic difference between qualitative and quantitative methods is theory and data flow.

In the quantitative method, research begins with a theory supported by field data. In contrast, in qualitative methods, research starts from field data, and theories are generated from this data to support existing theories. According to Williams (1988), there are five basic views about the difference between a quantitative approach and a qualitative approach. Here are five basic perspectives on differences.

1. Reality: The quantitative approach regards reality as discrete, concrete, observable and fragmentary. A qualitative approach, on the other hand, reveals a multiple (complex) reality which is the result of construction from a holistic perspective. As a result, qualitative researchers become more specific, believing in generalist objects directly, suspecting real objects, and looking for phenomena.
2. Interaction: The quantitative approach between the researcher and the subject of his work considers it independent, dualistic, and even mechanistic. The qualitative approach, on the other hand, sees it as an interactive, integral and even participatory process.
3. General posibility (generalist): The quantitative approach is context and time bound (nomothetic statements), and the qualitative approach is context and time bound (ideographical statements).
4. Causal probability: Quantitative approach, always separates previous simultaneous actual temporal causes before finally producing results. With a qualitative approach, it is always impossible to separate cause and effect, but not at the same time.
5. The role of value: Quantitative approach, must be considered valueless and objective, and must remain the same. On the other hand, a qualitative approach never renders anything worthless, even to subjective researchers.

Quadrilateral Limas – Hi Friends, you must have studied the material for flat shapes and geometric shapes. Well, this article will invite you to study the surface area formulas for rectangular pyramids, pentagonal pyramids, and triangular pyramids, complete with their volumes and types. Come on, read this article to the end!

What are Limas?

Before discussing the formula for the surface area of ​​a pyramid, it’s a good idea to first understand the meaning of a pyramid. Try to imagine the historic Pyramids in Egypt to make it easier! Yes, it is true. The pyramid shape is basically a rectangular pyramid.

Apart from the pyramids, you can find these spatial shapes in everyday life, from tents, rubik’s rooms, telephone towers, to the top of the temple known as a shikhara or shikhar .

A pyramid is a spatial figure (three dimensions) which has a base in the form of polygons (many terms: triangles, rectangles and pentagons). The sides are triangular and have apex. The name of this shape is determined based on the shape of the base. A cone can be called a pyramid with a circular base, while a pyramid with a square base can be called a pyramid.

A pyramid has n + 1 sides, 2n edges and n + 1 vertices.

Limas Formula

Now you know the shape of a pyramid shape. Come on, let’s continue the discussion about the pyramid formula. Limas has two kinds of formulas, namely the formula for the surface area and the formula for the volume of a geometric figure. You can use the following formula.

The formula for the surface area of ​​a pyramid

The area of ​​the base + the sum of the areas of the perpendiculars (sheath).

Limas Volume Formula

⅓ x base area x height

Please note, you need to adjust the formula again to the base area of ​​each shape of the base.

Types of Limas

Previously, it was mentioned that the name of the type of pyramid is determined by the shape of the base. Therefore, don’t be surprised if the formula for the surface area of ​​a pyramid will be different, depending on the base.

So, what are the types of pyramids? There are triangular pyramids, rectangular pyramids (square), pentagon pyramids, to hexagon pyramids.

Formulas for Volume and Surface Area of ​​a Pyramid

1. Triangular pyramid

A triangular pyramid is a geometric shape that has a triangular base and is conical to one point, so that triangular upright sides are formed.

The characteristics of a triangular pyramid include:

• It has four triangular sides.
• Triangular pedestal.
• Has six ribs, namely AB, AC, BC, AT, BT, and CT.
• It has four vertices, namely A, B, C, and T.

Volume Formula:

Volume: ⅓ x (½ xaxt) xt

Surface Area Formula:

Surface area: (½ xaxt) + (3 x perpendicular area)

Why is the formula so long? Calm down, the surface area formula inside the brackets is the area of ​​the base. So, all you need to memorize is the area of ​​triangles, squares, pentagons and hexagons.

Example Question :

A triangular pyramid T.ABC has a triangular base of 6 cm, a height of 5 cm and a height of 15 cm. Determine the volume of the pyramid!

Discussion:

Is known:

• Triangle base 6 cm.
• Base height 5 cm.
• The height of the pyramid is 15 cm.

Asked: V

Completion:

Those are the definitions, formulas, and examples of triangular pyramid problems. So , do you understand the formula for the volume and surface area of ​​a triangular pyramid?

2. Quadrilateral (Square)

A rectangular pyramid is a geometric shape that has a rectangular base, which can be a square, rectangle, rhombus, kite, parallelogram, or trapezoid.

Because the base is rectangular, so it can be known:

• Sum of sides of a triangular pyramid = n + 1 = 4 + 1 = 5 sides.
• Number of triangular pyramid edges = 2 × n = 2 × 4 = 8 edges.
• The number of vertices of a triangular pyramid = = n + 1 = 4 + 1 = 5 vertices.

Following are the properties of a rectangular pyramid:

• Has 5 sides (1 base side and 4 upright sides).
• The sides of the base are rectangular.
• The 4 sides are perpendicular in the shape of a triangle.
• Has 5 corner points.
• Has 8 ribs.

Volume Formula:

Volume: ⅓ x (sxs) xt

Surface Area Formula:

Surface area: (sxs) + (4 x area of ​​the perpendicular)

3. Hexagonal pyramid

Volume Formula:

Volume: ⅓ x (2,598 xsxs) xt

Surface Area Formula:

Surface area: (2.598 xsxs) + (6 x area of ​​the perpendicular)

If you are still confused about how to get the area of ​​the vertical side, try to pay attention to the triangular shape of the upright side. All you have to do is find the area of ​​the triangle, then multiply the result according to its type (triangle, rectangle, pentagon, or hexagon).

4. Five-sided (Pentagonal)

Volume Formula:

Volume: ⅓ x (1.72 xsxs) xt

Surface Area Formula:

Surface area: (1.72 xsxs) + (5 x area of ​​the perpendicular)

Example Questions and Discussion

Now, let’s look at an example problem so that you can understand more and get to know more about this one geometric shape. Try again the formula that has been studied together!

Problem 1
A rectangular pyramid T.PQRS with a side length of 10 cm has a height of 12 cm. What is the surface area and volume?

Discussion:
You can read the problem if the base is rectangular. You can answer this using the surface area formula for a rectangular pyramid.

• Surface area of ​​T.PQRS = area of ​​base + total area of ​​vertical sides (sheath).
• Base area = sxs = 10 x 10 = 100 cm square.
• Total area of ​​perpendiculars = number of triangles x area of ​​triangle QRT or 4 x area of ​​triangle QRT.
• The area of ​​triangle QRT (using Pythagorean calculations), the height of BT is 13 cm.
• Area of ​​triangle QRT = ½ x QR x BT = ½ x 10 x 13 = 65 cm squared.
• The sum of the area of ​​the uprights = 4 x the area of ​​the triangle QRT = 4 x 65 = 260 cm square.

So, the surface area of ​​a rectangular pyramid is = 100 + 260 = 360 square cm.

Next, we find the volume:

• T.PQRS pyramid volume = ⅓ x base area x height.
• So, the volume of T.PQRS is = ⅓ x 100 x 12 = 400 cubic cm.

—-

That is the meaning, the formula for the surface area of ​​a pyramid, to the example problem. Do you understand about building this space? Hopefully the explanation above can be useful for you and don’t forget to keep practicing so you don’t forget the formulas quickly.

Public Speaking Method – Sinaumed’s , have you ever spoken in public? If so,
then that means you are doing public speaking . Wow, that’s really cool,
being able to communicate in front of many people.

However, what is called public speaking is not just speaking in public .
Because what is called public speaking is a good way of communicating
in public with certain systematics and rules. This is called the public
speaking method . When someone can communicate in front of many people in a good way,
then it will be a distinct advantage for him.

So, for that, let ‘s look at the further explanation below!

Definition of public speaking

In language, public speaking consists of two words in English. Public means public in front of
the public and speaking means speaking. Thus, the meaning of
public speaking in language is speaking in public.

In Indonesian, public speaking has not yet received a comprehensive understanding. As
long as public speaking is understood as an act of speaking in public.
Even though not all speaking in public can be said as public speaking
.

In practice, public speaking doesn’t mean you have to speak at official events.
Even at unscheduled informal events, you can still do public
speaking . Then what is the meaning of the definition of
public speaking ?

According to historical records, the term public speaking was originally interpreted by rhetoricians
as the ability or art of speaking. This term has evolved since the century BC.
At that time, the term public speaking was synonymous with speech.

In its development, public speaking began to be defined by experts. According to the
Merriam-Webster dictionary, public speaking is defined as “the act or skill
of speaking to a usually large group of people” . That is, public speaking is an
action, act, or art of speaking which is usually done in front of a large group of people.

Meanwhile, David Zarefsky defines public speaking in his book entitled Public speaking Strategic for
Success as ” public speaking is a continuous communication process in which messages and signals
circulate back and forth between speakers and listeners” . This professor and expert on
communication and rhetoric in the United States stated that public speaking is a
continuous process of communication, where messages and signals are involved in the interaction between the
speaker and the listener.

Public speaking goals

Someone who does public speaking certainly has its own goals. It becomes important to
clarify the reasons for doing public speaking according to the intended needs.
Here are some of the purposes often used by speakers :

• Submit information

One of the goals when someone does public speaking is, of course, to convey information.
The information to be conveyed can be in the form of programs, ideas, ideas, projects, thoughts
and research. Submission of this information is done to help other people better
understand, know, and understand something.

When interpreted in language, information is a form of news or news about something. Another
meaning of information is also called notification. Therefore, the delivery of information is
carried out in the delivery of news containing certain messages.

• Make an impact

The next goal of doing public speaking is to influence other people. Influence is
defined as an effort to change or maintain a thought as well as the actions of others.
Individuals who have good public speaking skills , of course, can
influence the public to follow something that he is presenting in his material. This goal
is usually carried out by someone who works as a motivator, sales marketing ,
lecturer, and others.

• Opinion submission

The delivery of opinion referred to in this next objective relates to the expression of thoughts from an
individual who is the speaker or speaker . Here someone will convey what is in his mind
to clarify what he wants to do. Usually people who want to express opinions want effective
communication with others.

• Giving motivation

Providing motivation is a very important goal in doing public speaking . Remembering to
provide motivation can encourage the public to act and think more positively. This is often
done by speakers such as motivators who are giving motivation at a seminar.

In providing motivation, a motivator will raise his voice and provide more enthusiastic energy so that the
audience is motivated. In addition, the motivator will present his public
speaking material in an attractive style. This is what makes the
audience interested and compelled to follow the motivator’s thoughts.

• Entertaining the audience

Apart from its basic purpose, public speaking is also often used to entertain the audience.
We know that many people like to be entertained with jokes or comedies and the way the speaker
delivers the material. We can easily find this entertaining activity on television shows
such as talk shows , comedies, and buffoonery.

Recently, there have also been many events that combine public speaking with comedy, namely Stand Up
Comedy. This program is carried out by someone who has good communication skills by
presenting material with humorous characteristics. The characteristics of humor can be seen
from facial expressions, body language, and funny stories.

Public speaking method

There are four methods that are often used to do public speaking . You can use one
method or several methods at once by adjusting the conditions. Come on Sinaumed’s, let’s just
look at the methods.

1. Impromptu or Ad Libitum Method

The impromptu method is a way of doing public speaking without any notes or script at all.
Not even a record of what needs to be remembered and learned. This method is
generally done because of the urgent need to do public speaking .

The impromptu method is carried out spontaneously. In the world of broadcasting,
ad libitum means speaking without a script or script . Thus, this
method multiplies the ability of personal public speakers .

The advantages of the impromptu method are as follows:

• Because without preparing a script or framework of any kind, you as public speakers
  speak spontaneously. What are your ideas and ideas , your
  ability to express ideas, and your body language skills can be read clearly.
  At that time, you will see your capacity in doing public
  speaking .
• What you convey feels natural, without contrivance.
• You will be compelled to think constantly throughout the process.
• Your creativity is automatically honed.

Meanwhile, the disadvantages of the impromptu method are as follows:

• The conclusions, assumptions and data that you present are sometimes undercooked due to old
  data.
• Because without preparation, you don’t even have time to make a framework, the ideas you convey may
  not be coherent.
• If you lack experience doing public speaking , conveying ideas will not run smoothly.

2. Manuscript Reading Method (Reading the
Manuscript)

Public speaking with the script reading method is done by reading the script that has been prepared
beforehand. This method is generally used to do public speaking at formal or
official events. Officials or people who have more important positions choose this method
to avoid mistakes.

Manuscripts that are read in public speaking usually have important content so it is not uncommon for the
mass media to also cover or quote them. Not only that, the wider community also pays serious
attention. Examples of public speaking using this method are speeches at
ceremonies, important public policy announcements, election announcements, and so on.

The advantages of the manuscript reading method are as follows:

• Fear or anxiety can be minimized because you only need to read it.
• Can choose the best words to read because they have sufficient preparation.
• Can speak effectively and efficiently so you don’t need to convey long sentences but have little meaning.
  You can save statements.
• Can expedite the pronunciation of the language.
• Can reduce the risk of data being out of date .
• Can reproduce the manuscript so listeners can read it too.

Although it has many advantages, this method of reading manuscripts also has disadvantages, namely:

• Interaction with the audience is reduced because you are more focused on reading the script.
  Your eyes and thoughts are more focused on the script, not on the audience.
• Public speakers are impressed as people who are less skilled because they read the text.
  After all, someone talking without looking at the text will look cooler .
• Public Speakers seem stiff because the majority of public speakers who use this method seem to feel
  “constrained” by feeling “must be as beautiful as the text”.
• Lack of spontaneous improvisation.
• The time needed to prepare is longer.
• The response given by the audience is relatively more difficult to influence the message
  conveyed. Because what is conveyed is more informative in nature, not an interactive
  discussion.

3. Memorizing or memorizing method

As the name suggests, the rote or memorizing method is used in public speaking by memorizing texts or
scripts that have been prepared beforehand. When the speaker is doing public
speaking , he no longer uses the text because he has memorized its contents. When
appearing to deliver his speech, the speaker spontaneously recalled the contents of the text he had
memorized.

This method is very challenging, because this method is only recommended for those of you who have a sharp
memory. Not only that, you are also required to master the ideas, thoughts, and arrangement of
the language in the text. Those of you who have the ability to improvise in communication and
rhetoric are very suitable for this method because the rote method is greatly influenced by the speaker’s
ability to convey emotions through his speech.

This method is not recommended for those of you who do not have a sharp memory. The reason is,
neglecting the text when making a speech can cause stage fright, embarrassment, mixed data, and
misinformation. Of course this is very dangerous if it is done by important people in official
events.

This method has advantages, namely:

• You will look cool, dignified, and awesome.
• You guys seem like a smart and clever person.
• The message that you convey in the speech is still neatly arranged.

This method also has some drawbacks, namely:

• If you forget the contents of the text and you don’t find any clues , you can lose control.
  Meanwhile, losing control can make you appear as someone who is rambling
  incoherently.
• The time you prepare is longer than the script reading method.
• The work done by your brain will be harder because you have to memorize the contents of the text first.

4. The Using Note Method or Using Small
Notes

The using note method is the method we most recommend for you. This method is
done by writing a grid, outline , or outline of the discussion you want to convey to the
audience . You will develop a complete explanation and details yourself when you are on
stage.

For those of you who already have high flying hours in public speaking , this method of using small
notes is highly recommended. This method does not complicate your work and does not take
much time. It’s just that this method requires you to have speaking skills and think
critically about everything.

The advantages of using small notes method are as follows:

• Interaction with the audience can be maintained properly. You can occasionally make
  eye contact with them.
• Audiences will be more interested because what you convey is tailored to their needs.
  This can not be separated from the improvisation that you do.
• You look smart, dignified, elegant and professional.
• The time you need is quite economical, even tends to be spontaneous.

Meanwhile, the drawbacks of using public speaking with this method are:

• If the preparation you do is too rushed, this will cause you to be less than optimal.
• If you are not used to it, the diction you choose will feel less interesting.
• Before making a speech, the committee will place an order. This method provides a large
  enough potential for deviations from the initial order.

Tips for Doing Public Speaking

If Sinaumed’s wants to do public speaking , but is confused about where to start, then you
can use the following methods. Here are tips for doing public speaking
:

• Get to know the target audience

Recognizing the audience or public when they are about to speak in public can help speakers be more
easily accepted. Other people who become the audience will feel
more cared for, compatible and interested. The things that need to be recognized from the
audience are background, language, age, ethnicity, education, and the purpose of holding the
event.

• Over matter

Good mastery of material is the key to success in public speaking . This is important,
because if a speaker speaks in public, then he becomes the center of everyone’s attention.
In addition, good mastery of material when in public is also very influential on a person’s
level of confidence when presenting the material. So it becomes important to have a topic
or issue that is more mastered, than just choosing.

• Make important points

Preparation of important points can be in the form of an outline. This is done to anticipate a
very limited individual memory. Write down the important things you want to talk about so that
the conversation is focused and doesn’t spread everywhere, besides that it makes it easier to convey the
material.

• Setting up tools

Tools can be used with the aim of making public speaking more interesting. Other people
will be happier if in following something all the senses can feel good seeing, hearing, touching, and
speaking. Therefore, the use of assistive devices is important. Such as the
use of props, demonstrations, power point slides , videos, and more.

• Exercise

Before appearing in public, it is better if a speaker does some practice first. The practice
is intended so that when we are in public we minimize mistakes, besides that the public
speaking process runs smoothly. Exercise can be done independently in front of a mirror
or other people we trust.

Conclusion

Public speaking is the ability to communicate in public which includes various activities such as lectures,
speeches, presentations, discussions, and other activities. People who do public
speaking are also called speakers or speakers. Public speaking skills are
widely used in various professions.

In addition, public speaking is important for several professions that prioritize speaking skills.
Through public speaking also people can understand each other.
So, those are some explanations regarding public speaking, both
understanding, methods, ways, and examples.

Public Sector Accounting – To find out the meaning of accounting can be seen from two main sources which are used as guidelines. The first is based on the American Accounting Association (AAA), accounting is the process of identifying, measuring, and reporting from various information which will later be used as an assessment and decision making that is useful for those who will use the information.

While the second according to the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants (AICPA), accounting is the art of recording, calculating and summarizing accurately and expressed in the form of units of currency, there is a transaction process from various events that are financial in nature and the interpretation of the results.

From the notion of accounting according to the two sources above, the notion of accounting is simply a process that begins with identifying, measuring, recording and reporting various financial information that will be used as an assessment and decision-making that is useful for those who need this information.

Accounting is also often referred to as a business language which is meaningful for measuring the results of economic activities in a company while conveying information to various parties such as management, investors, creditors and regulators. 

In addition, many people interpret that the science of accounting is related to arithmetic systems. But basically the science of accounting is not that simple. As time goes by, the development of accounting knowledge is increasing so that many people want to learn it. 

 

Definition of Public Sector Accounting According to Experts

Public sector accounting is an entity whose activities are related to efforts to produce useful public goods and services to meet the needs and rights of the public. In several ways, public sector institutions have similarities with the private sector. Both use the same resources and almost the same control process. However, in certain tasks, the public sector cannot be replaced by the private sector as is the case with government functions.

This is the definition of public sector accounting according to experts:

• Indra Bastian (2014: 6)
  Public sector accounting is a technical mechanism and accounting analysis applied to state high institutions and their subordinate departments for implementing the management of various public funds.
• Mardiasmo (2015:14)
  According to Mardiasmo, public sector accounting is an information tool either from the government as management or an information tool for the public.
• Halim (2014: 18)
  Public sector accounting is a service activity in order to provide quantitative financial information based on government entities that are useful for decision making for interested parties.
• Erlina, et al (2015)
  Public sector accounting is the process of recording economic events in an organization which is often carried out in the public sector such as political parties, communities, schools, universities and others.
• Dwi Ratmono (2015)
  According to Dwi Ratmono the notion of public sector accounting is the process of identifying, measuring, recording, and reporting financial transactions of local government entities for making economic decisions that benefit external parties.

To better understand the basic concepts and how to implement them, you can use the Public Sector Accounting book below with a total of seven chapters that have been arranged systematically.

 

Characteristics Of Accounting For The Public Sector

• Relevant
  Financial statements in public sector accounting must be relevant. What is meant by relevant is that it contains information that can influence decision-making and evaluate past and future events.
• Reliable
  Financial reports on public sector accounting have useful information for consideration with previous financial reports.
• Easy to Understand
  Public sector accounting financial reports have information characteristics that can be easily understood by all parties, both internal and external parties.

Components Influencing Public Sector Organizations

The following are some of the components that influence public sector organizations.

Economy 

1. Inflation rate
2. Exchange rates or currency exchange rates
3. Productive workforce
4. Per capita income growth rate
5. Infrastructure or infrastructure facilities

Political

1. Government legal legitimacy 
2. The types of government in power
3. Ideology or basic adherence 
4. International network 
5. Relations between countries and their citizens 
6. Inter-agency relations 

Cultural

1. community Values, 
2. Diversity of ethnicity, race, religion, culture and religion
3. History or history
4. Level of education, 
5. Sociological condition of society
6. Characteristics of people from various regions

Demographic

1. population Growth Rate, 
2. Migration, transmigration, immigration
3. Public health 
4. Age distribution of the population
5. Life expectancy

Public sector institutions must also pay attention to the value of money or the concept used when managing public sector institutions. The concept must be guided by three elements, namely economy, efficiency, and effectiveness. These three elements will later become the main value of money which has the benefit of improving public services, reducing public costs and increasing the effectiveness of public services that are evenly distributed according to the target.

Objectives of Accounting for the Public Sector

The purpose of public sector accounting according to the American Accounting Association (1970) is stated in the following: 

1. Management Control

The first objective of public sector accounting is management control . Management control is providing information that is really needed in proper, efficient and economical management of the operations and allocation of resources of an organization or institution.

2. Accountability

The next goal of public sector accounting is accountability . Accountability aims to provide useful information for public sector managers in preparing accountability reports for fields, divisions or resources under their auspices. It also aims to report various activities on government operations and use of the budget to the public.

Meanwhile, according to the conceptual framework of public sector accounting, it is explained that the financial reports of the Regional Government must be able to explain various information that has benefits for assessing accountability and making appropriate decisions. Here are some of the objectives of public accounting:

1. Provide information regarding the source, allocation, and use of financial resources. 
2. Provides information relating to the adequacy of current period revenues to finance all expenses.
3. Informs the amount of economic resources used for the activities of the reporting entity as well as the corresponding results.
4. Informing the financial position in accordance with the condition of the entity making reports according to sources of income in the short and long term.

You can also find a discussion of public sector accounting in the book Public Sector Accounting by V Wiratna Sujarweni which discusses in full the theories, concepts, and how to apply them to the government and other non-profit organizations.

Types of Public Sector Accounting

Public sector accounting is divided into several types including:

1. Government Accounting ( Governmental Accounting )

Government accounting in its application uses accounting data as information related to various government economic and financial transactions provided to the executive, legislative, judiciary and the community in it.

In this government accounting can be divided into two, namely central government accounting and local government accounting. Meanwhile, regional government accounting is still differentiated into provincial accounting and district or city government accounting.

2. Social Accounting ( Social Accounting )

Social accounting or Social Accounting is a field of accounting that records economic events in non-profit and non-profit organizations that are run specifically for macro institutions such as political parties, mosques and various other community institutions.

 

Scope of Public Sector Accounting

Public sector accounting was formed due to the emergence of various supporting factors that assisted the formation process. The parliamentary government system applied in Indonesia is the first factor. Therefore, a public sector accounting system emerged whose implementation was under the influence of executive and legislative institutions in a state of checks and balances. The second factor is resources which are indirectly related to the results. And the last influential factor is the country’s political conditions which lead to negotiations between government agencies and the legislature.

You can study the running of public sector accounting yourself in Mardiasmo’s book entitled Public Sector Accounting which also explains the techniques of existing public sector financial accounting.

Public sector accounting has been proven to have an important role in the government system and is the backbone of the country’s economy. If there is a limitation on the discussion of public sector accounting in government, it will have an impact on the vacancy of regulating accounting practices in the sector itself. 

The scope of public sector accounting is wider than that of the private sector. The field of public sector accounting covers a broad scope for the common good. Public sector accounting covers

1. Financial planning and development
2. Monitoring and inspection system
3. Financial implications according to government policy. 

In addition, public sector accounting has the scope of high state institutions and their subordinate departments, regional governments, foundations, political parties, universities and other organizations. However, public sector organizations are strictly limited to organizations that use public funds. Therefore public sector accounting only covers the following main areas:

1. Central Government Accounting
2. Local Government Accounting
3. Political Party Accounting
4. NGO accounting
5. Foundation Accounting
6. Educational Accounting
7. Health Accounting
8. Accounting for Places of Worship

Characteristics of Public Sector Accounting

Public sector accounting is accounting that is usually used by public or government agencies. Almost every public institution is required to manage financial reports transparently.

Therefore accounting in the public sector is often used as a means of accountability to the public. Therefore, in the process there is something called public sector auditing which is fully explained in the Latest Edition of Public Sector Accounting.

Public sector accounting is often interpreted as a process of collecting, classifying, analyzing and reporting financial management and public institutions. These financial reports will be used as information to be conveyed to interested parties. Of course this management report will later help the process of making the right decisions, quickly and efficiently.

In practice, every public institution is required to manage social and economic costs more efficiently. If the demands of public institutions regarding public accountability are stronger, then public sector accounting will be recognized as a science for managing public finances. Public sector accounting can also be said as a form of transparency to the public in fulfilling public rights. 

In public sector accounting, this is closely related to accountability for the sources of funds used. Therefore, this field certainly requires people who have the qualifications of competence, honesty, and a sense of responsibility in its implementation. Because graduates in this program will later be directed to careers in the public sector both in government offices as civil servants and non-PNS. Professions that public sector accounting graduates can engage in include:

1. Public Sector Accounting Staff
2. Public Sector Auditors
3. Government procurement of goods and services management
4. Tax Staff of the Department of Public Sector Accounting

Apart from that, the existence of public sector accounting also increasingly embodies the characteristics of good governance . These characteristics include:

• Transparency
  Character formed because of freedom in obtaining information
• Participation
  Character formed because of the freedom to socialize, speak, and participate constructively.
• Accountability
  Character that is realized because of a real sense of responsibility to the public.
• Consensus Orientation
  This character has a full orientation towards the public.
• Equity
  With this character will realize equal rights, justice and public welfare.
• Rule of Law
  This character has a goal to realize the law in a more upright and not underestimated.
• Responsiveness
  A character who is alert and responsive to public services.
• Strategic Vision
  Character with the aim of realizing the vision and mission explicitly.
• Efficiency and Effectiveness
  This character will manage resources from collection to their use efficiently and effectively and responsibly.

 

Differences in Public and Private Sector Accounting

There are several differences between public and private sector accounting. The following are discussed one by one.

Organization goals

Each organization has different goals according to the specifications to be achieved. Likewise with public sector accounting and private sector accounting which have different objectives. This difference is very prominent, especially in the achievement of profit. In public sector accounting, it is not only about making profits but also providing the best possible public services. While in the private sector, the maximum profit is achieved.

Sources of financing

Differences in public sector and private sector accounting can then be seen from the source of funding or capital structure used. In the public sector, sources of funds come from taxes, levies, debt, government bonds, BUMN/BUMD profits, sales of state assets, etc. While the private sector comes from internal financing which includes own capital, retained earnings, sales of assets and external financing which includes bank loans, bonds, stock issuance.

Accountability

Accountability in the public sector is different from the private sector. The public sector is responsible to the community because the source of funds used to provide public services comes from the community. Meanwhile, the private sector is responsible to company owners or shareholders and creditors for the funds provided.

Organizational structure

The organizational structure of public sector accounting is bureaucratic, rigid and hierarchical. Meanwhile, the private sector is more flexible.

Characteristics of the Budget and Stakeholders

The characteristics of the budget in the public sector are more openly published for discussion with the public. For the government, the budget is no longer a secret that must be covered up. In contrast to the private sector which is more closed and has become a company secret. 

Accounting System 

Private sector accounting applies accrual-based accounting (accrual accounting) while public sector accounting still uses a cash-to-accrual- based accounting system . which you can learn from the book entitled Anthology of Public Sector Accounting Systems by Abdul Halim below.

 

Public Sector Accounting Book

This public sector accounting book discusses accrual-based local government financial accounting in full. This book focuses more on discussing the technical aspects of financial accounting in local government. This book can also be used as a basis for accounting descriptions at the government level. In addition, there is also a discussion regarding the relationship between regional financial management and local government financial accounting. And equipped with the preparation of financial reports at the regional level. 

In addition, there are introductory accounting books, financial accounting books, and cost accounting books from sinaumedia

 

Material Related to Public Sector Accounting

Definition of a Public Accountant – Hello sinaumedia friends , Interested in the public accounting profession? First, find out the definition, roles, duties and types of public accountants that you can read on the sinaumedia Blog .

Public accountants are required to audit and review the company’s financial statements. Financial information provided by public accountants can affect the good image or reputation of the company.

The company’s reputation is at stake if the accountant does not provide good financial reports. For example, at the beginning of 2020, the accounting firms owned by several large companies were sanctioned by the Indonesian Ministry of Finance.

Why is that? In fact, the company’s financial reports are related to the issue of the mode of play in shares and have a negative impact on the national economy.

That is why public sector accounting is so important nowadays when many new businesses are being formed.

Accountants are those responsible for compiling, instructing, supervising, checking and improving the accounting and governance of businesses or government agencies.

The public accountant’s job is to review financial statements. Financial reporting information provided by a good accountant can affect the company’s image.

The company’s image will deteriorate if the public accountant does not provide good financial reports. In addition to auditing financial statements, public accountants have many duties, for example, calculating and paying income taxes, complying with applicable tax regulations, reviewing financial records and advising on general accounting.

Definition of Public Accountant

Public accounting   is a profession that provides professional accounting services to individuals or businesses independently. In general, the concept of an accountant is an accountant who is responsible for guiding, supervising and improving the accounting and operations of a company, private company or government agency.

Public accountants are independent accountants who provide accounting services and receive payment for the services they provide. This profession has many tasks, not only auditing financial statements, public accountants are also in charge of management accounting, tax audits, financial report audits, and others.

Accounting is divided into two, namely public accounting and internal accounting. Public accountants are accountants who provide services to meet public needs. According to Law Number 5 of 2022 concerning Public Accountants, public accountants must be permitted to practice public accounting by the Minister of Finance or an authorized official.

A good public accountant must also have a Certified Public Accountant (CPA) which is the highest qualification in the CPA profession in Indonesia and is based on individual competency. Then, based on Minister of Finance Regulation No. 443/KMK.01/2011, it is stipulated that every accountant hired must be a member of IAPI (Indonesian Association of Public Accountants).

Public accountants usually work in a public accounting firm (KAP) or open their own independent KAP. According to Article 3 paragraph (1) of the Public Accountant Law No. 5 of 2011, the services provided by public accountants are:

• Audit Services on Historical Financial Information.
• Evaluation Services on Historical Financial Information
• Other insurance services.

In addition to the services mentioned above, public accountants can provide other services related to accounting, finance and management as determined by law.

Reports written by an accountant are also important in analyzing and making future business decisions. So, to do this job, you need a professional at work.

So, from the assessment above, it can be concluded that this profession is an accountant who has been authorized by the government to practice as an official accountant when reviewing a company’s financial statements.

In addition to verifying financial reports, accountants also have a duty to support the company’s management accounting.

This is intended to facilitate the making of important business decisions by internal parties, such as shareholders and company managers. Another task is to carry out financial report analysis, tax audits, financial report audits and others.

With all these responsibilities and duties, the salary of a public accountant is quite large.

Duties of the Public Accountant Profession

So, after knowing the meaning and services of an accountant, and knowing the duties of this profession.

The public accountant’s job is to review the business financial statements that have been prepared by the business accountant. In particular, they are responsible for checking financial reports for errors according to Indonesian financial standards.

In addition to auditing financial reports, this profession is also responsible for helping companies prepare tax returns to prevent errors, such as tax amnesty and invalid annual tax returns.

Public accountants can also help companies pay as little tax as possible, while respecting the provisions of tax laws. In addition to verifying financial statements, this service is also responsible for verifying ownership statements on company assets to avoid confiscation.

They are also required to disclose information related to the company’s financial statements in a transparent manner to the public. In the case of inflation, the public accountant’s job is to provide financial solutions to companies so that the right decision can be made.

Public accountants also need to provide information to companies about how to allocate limited resources, such as company assets, employees and capital.

Another job of a public accountant is to review company property ownership records. Its purpose is to prevent businesses from foreclosure or litigation on property purchased or owned. After the public accountant reviews the financial statements, the next task of the public accountant is to communicate the results of the audit in a transparent manner to the public.

The hired public accounting profession is very helpful for clients because it can provide financial solutions to clients so they can make the right decisions. Public accountants can provide guidelines for allocating their finances for asset management, employee recruitment, or capital management.

Types of Public Accountant Services

In addition to analyzing the client company’s financial statements, accountants have various types of services that can be provided to companies or individuals who need them. The following are the types of public accounting services:

1. Accounting or Bookkeeping Services

This type of accounting service is used to assist companies in preparing financial reports, starting from general journalism, balance sheets and ledgers.

This aims to make financial reports accurate and accountable to the company. This type of accounting and bookkeeping services has become a common task for a professional accountant.

2. Tax Services

This tax accounting service only focuses on taking care of client taxes. Accountants are responsible for ensuring that their clients’ taxation is in accordance with the applicable laws and regulations in Indonesia. Hopefully the customer won’t face any legal or tax issues.

Accountants are also responsible for determining their clients’ tax strategies. Public accountants prepare tax documents, arrange audits with the relevant tax authorities, interpret tax laws and interpret any changes to tax regulations from tax laws issued by the government.

3. Management Consulting Services

Currently, accountants also provide management consulting services for businesses in need. It’s about making company financial reports better and better and better audit results.

How to Become a Public Accountant

There are a number of requirements that you must meet if you want to become a public accountant. This requirement has been officially written in law number 5 of 2011, article 5 paragraph 1.

The first requirement is that you have a valid achievement certificate from IAPI or an accredited university for this vocational training. The next requirement is that you must submit proof of participation in PPL (advanced professional education) with a minimum number of credits taken of 60 PPL credit units (SKP) in 2 years .

The next requirement is that you must have practical experience in the field of general auditing, at least 1000 hours in 5 years which is approved by the head of the KAP office. The accountant must be domiciled in the territory of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia and must show an Identity Card. In addition, you must also have an NPWP.

In addition, you must be a member of IAPI and never be penalized for license revocation and never be penalized. Potential public accountants are also not custodians and must prepare and complete a public accountant license application form,

In addition, you must also state that you are not carrying out concurrent functions as described in article 46. You must also write a statement letter that has been stamped and state that the data request you have submitted is correct.

How to Become a Professional Public Accountant

Here are some tips that you may find useful and that you need to know if you want to become a public accountant:

1. Earn a Degree in Accounting Studies

Prior to September 2013, graduates of the S1 or D4 accounting study program must have completed the Accounting Profession Program (PPAk), obtain a national accountant register, and practice accounting before taking the Chartered Accountant Certification Examination (USAP).

However, these graduates can immediately take the certification exam without having to undergo vocational training.

This means that obtaining a degree in accounting, either S1 or D4, is a basic requirement for pursuing your dream of becoming a professional accountant.

2. Choose the Right Specialization

This profession has various specializations with their respective job descriptions, be it auditing, management, budgeting, tax and others. Most accountants have their own specialty and sometimes follow an earned accounting degree.

Make sure you choose the right major that best fits your previously chosen degree and your ability to focus on it.

3. Pass the Public Accountant Examination

There are several differences between an ordinary public accountant and a licensed professional. Public accountants often perform simple tasks such as preparing financial reports, while certified professionals are authorized to perform more professional work such as conducting audits, reviewing reports and representing customers before the IRS.

So, to become a professional, you must pass the Public Accountant Certificate Examination (USAP).

USAP, according to the Indonesian Public Accountants Association (IAPI), is the highest certification designation for the accounting profession in Indonesia.

This certification is an individual competency-based certification; The basis of credential administration is therefore, and will always be, on the skills an individual requires to practice, or wants, the skills necessary for the profession.

USAP is given during the first two months of each trimester and usually lasts a few days. Candidates can take the sections of the test in any order they choose. There are 3 types of tests that you can choose from, namely the Basic Level Test, the Professional Level Test, and the Assessment Partner Competency Test.

4. More Work Experience

In addition to increasing knowledge through education and training and passing competency exams, professional public accountants must also have experience.

Inexperienced listeners make more mistakes than experienced listeners. Therefore, seek as much work experience in accounting as possible.

5. Commitment to Ethics

Intelligence and intellectual excellence are needed in carrying out the duties of an accountant. However, being an accountant also requires ethics, which will protect you in carrying out your professional functions.

In the Principles of Professional Ethics for the Indonesian Institute of Accountants, the second point regarding the public interest states that each member must always act in the framework of public service and demonstrate a commitment to professionalism.

Therefore, the professional requirement in carrying out official duties is to uphold the established professional principles. A person who carries out this profession can be called an expert if at the time of conducting an audit he conducts an audit in accordance with the regulations set by the agency and in accordance with the code of ethics or professional standards.

6. Sensitive to Technological Developments

Technology has now penetrated all professions, including the accounting profession.

Therefore, accountants must be sensitive to technological developments in order to adapt to changes in the field of accounting.

The solution to this problem can be found in the University Journal. University of Journalism is a special training program that invites customers, partners and students to learn and better understand online accounting software.

With a vision to produce graduates with the best skills and success in modern technology-based accounting, Journal University is the place for you. Register now with University Journal partners at top universities.

Public Accountant in the Capital Market

Based on the Capital Market Law book, the role of a public accountant is to disclose company financial information, audit issuer financial statements, and provide opinions on the numbers in financial statements.

Based on the figures in the financial statements, the public accountant will provide an opinion which can be divided into four, namely:

1. Unqualified Opinion (unqualified)

Known as an Opinion , perfect review, net result, or WTP (Unqualified) rating. This opinion is expressed by a public accountant if the financial statements generally describe a reasonable financial position and results of operations, using the most commonly accepted accounting standards.

2. Qualified Opinion (fair with exception) 

Often known as a qualified opinion, qualified opinion, conditional opinion or qualified opinion. A professional accountant will express this opinion if he or she believes that the financial statements have been properly presented and prepared in accordance with existing financial accounting standards throughout.

However, there are some things that the accountant cannot accept as material or because of some warnings or limitations or exceptions, even if it does not affect the fairness of the financial statements.

3. Adverse Opinion (unfair opinion)

Public accountants will give an unqualified opinion if the financial statements as a whole describe an unfair situation, or because there are estimates or amounts that are dubious or because of the application of other accounting principles. This opinion is expressed if the review results find significant deviations from financial accounting standards.

4. Disclaimer Opinion (statement does not provide an opinion)

This opinion is the opinion of a public accountant who refuses to give an opinion on the financial statements of the companies he examines.

A disclaimer of opinion is made if the accountant considers that his examination is not justified in expressing an opinion on the financial statements or that he is not independent enough to express an opinion on the financial statements in a professional manner.

These objections may arise because of limited scope of the review or because of unusual uncertainties about the amount of expenses or business results.

Accountant Salary

Basically, not only preparing financial reports, but the accounting profession is also responsible for calculating and monitoring the finances of a business or organization. Many of you dream of becoming an accountant, one of the reasons is to get a fairly high salary.

The salary of an accountant for a fresh graduate is around IDR 4-8 million. In addition, an accountant usually has the ability to calculate the value of each company’s tax object.

Author: Ziaggi Fadhil Zahran

Also read related articles:

Final Plural Prayer – Prayer is one of the five pillars of Islam, which must be carried out and obeyed by Muslims under any circumstances and may not be abandoned, except in certain conditions such as women who are menstruating and others. Even though the law is obligatory and cannot be abandoned, Islam provides relief for Muslims to perform prayers by allowing them to pray in congregation.

The plural prayer is a prayer that combines the performance of two prayers at one time. Prayers that can be plural are the noon prayer with ashar prayer, and the maghrib prayer with evening prayer. As for the morning prayer, it should not be plural. There are two types of plural prayers, namely plural taqdim and takhir . This time, let’s learn about the final plural prayer. Read to the end, OK!

Definition and Law of Plural Prayer

As explained above, the plural prayer is a prayer that combines two prayers at the same time at the same time. Examples are maghrib and evening or noon and asr.

The law of plural prayer, initially is done in accordance with a predetermined time. However, a Muslim has reasons or causes that make him have to pray in the plural way, therefore, Islam also makes it easier and allows him to pray in the plural way.

The limitation of a person being allowed to pray in plural is as long as the Muslim has difficulty praying according to the time. Therefore, it is permissible for Muslims who have difficulties to pray multiple prayers. One of the reasons is in the journey or safar.

However, not all Muslims are allowed to pray in congregation. Only certain people, who get relief to perform prayers in a plural way. Here are some of them.

• Traveling or traveling.
• People who are experiencing severe pain, so that it is impossible or unable to stand or sit. Or the condition of the person is very weak, so he feels that his body is difficult to move.
• Have an urgent excuse. For example, such as going to surgery or other examinations that cannot be abandoned.
• A pilgrim going to Muzdalifah. In a hadith from Abi Ayyub al Ansari, he said ‘that the Messenger of Allah did the plural maghrib and isya at Muzdalifah on the pilgrimage of wada’ (HR. Bukhari).
• When it rains. A hadith narrated by Ibn Abi Syaibah narrates about the ruling on pluralizing prayers when it rains. From Nafi’ Maula Ibn Umar said, ‘Abdullah bin Umar, if the umaro do the prayers in a plurality, it is between maghrib and evening because it is raining. So he also joins in praying together with them.’

There are two types of plural prayers, namely the plural taqdim prayers and the plural takhir prayers. The plural taqdim prayer is to combine the performance of two obligatory prayers at the same time at the time of the first prayer, which are as follows.

Dhuhr and Asr prayers, so when pluralizing the midday prayers, they are done first, then the Asr prayer. Plural taqdim maghrib and evening prayers, so the first thing to do is the maghrib prayer, then continue with the evening prayer.

Then the second type of plural prayer is the final plural prayer, which is doing two obligatory prayers at the same time, namely as follows.

Carry out the dhuhr and asr prayers, in the plural takhir then what is carried out first is the asr prayer. Carrying out the plural takhir maghrib and evening prayers, so the first thing to do is the evening prayer, then continue with the maghrib prayer.

 

Provisions for Carrying out the Final Plural Prayers

When carrying out the last prayer, there are provisions that must be carried out and known. In accordance with the understanding of the last plural prayers explained earlier, the last plural prayers must be carried out at the time of the last prayer.

Therefore, when performing the last plural prayer, the prayer is performed when it is time to perform the last prayer. For example, the time for the Maghrib prayer has been missed, so you can perform the final plural prayer and perform the evening prayer first. However, there are two versions of performing the final plural prayers. The first version is to perform the last prayer first, according to the example. While the second is to perform the prayer that was previously missed beforehand and then perform the next prayer like the usual taqdim plural prayer.

The other procedures are the same as praying as usual and nothing is different, except for the intention. When carrying out the plural taqdim prayers, or the plural taqdim prayers, it is necessary to continue the prayer immediately after the greeting, without thinking or speaking.

Prayer Intentions and Final Plural Procedures

The procedure for praying the plural takhir is not much different from praying as usual. However, the intention when carrying out the plural takhir prayer is different, here are the intentions and procedures for carrying out the plural takhir prayer. 

• The intention of the plural takhir prayer (dhuhr and asr)

Usholli fardlozh zhuhri arba’a raka’at in majmu’ah ma’al ashri adaa-an lillaahi ta’aalaa. 

Meaning: I intentionally carry out the fardhu dzuhur prayer four cycles and join it with the asr fardhu prayer, because of Allah Ta’ala.

Then perform the four cycles of midday prayer as usual, and continue with the Asr prayer without any pauses or speaking with the following intention.

Ushollii fardlol ‘ashri arba’a raka’aatin majmuu’an ma’azh zhuhri adaa-an lillaahi ta’aalaa.

Meaning: I intend to perform the fardhu asr prayer four cycles of prayer together with the noon prayer, fardhu because of Allah Ta’ala.

• The intention of the plural takhir prayer (maghrib and isha)

Ushollii fardlozh maghribi thalaatha raka’aatin majmuu’an ma’al ‘isyaa’i Jam’a ta-khiirinin adaa-an lillaahi ta’aalaa.” 

Meaning: I intentionally carry out the fardhu maghrib prayer three cycles and plural it is the evening prayer, with the plural takhir, fardhu because of Allah Ta’ala.

Then perform the maghrib prayer first and continue with the evening prayer, without speaking or any pauses. The following is the reading of the intention for the plural isya prayer.

Ushollii fardlozh ‘isyaa’i arba’a raka’aatin majmuu’an ma’al magribi Jam’a ta-khiirinin adaa-an lillaahi ta’aalaa. 

Meaning: I intend to carry out the evening prayer four cycles of prayer together with the maghrib prayer, with the plural takhir fardhu because of Allah Ta’aala.

Then, after reading the intention according to the intention of the final plural prayer, the prayer continues as usual.

In addition to the usual plural takhir, plural takhir and taqdim prayers can also be performed by means of qashar. Here’s an explanation. 

• Qasr prayer

When performing the plural takhir or plural taqdim prayers, it can also be accompanied by qashar. What is qashar?

The qashar prayer is the obligatory prayer by summarizing or reducing the number of cycles of prayer that should be carried out at that time. There are three fardhu prayers that may be recited or abbreviated as rakaat, namely noon, asr and isya, where the three fardhu prayers have four cycles. When praying at qasar, then the prayer which was four cycles before, it is enough to do just two cycles and this plural qashar, is only permissible for a Muslim who is on a long journey.

Then, what is the ruling on performing prayers with this diqashar? Basically there are three laws regarding performing prayers by diqashar. Here’s an explanation.

• May or answer. This means that prayer may be carried out by diqashar if a Muslim is on a journey and has traveled at least 16 Farsakhs or 84 miles long or 2 Marhalahs or 80,640 km long or 8 km over 640 m and has not reached 3 Marhalah or 120 km over 960 m long ( 120,960 km).
• Afdhal or better to pray by diqashar. This means that prayers may be recited and it is better if they are recited, if a Muslim is traveling and has traveled a considerable distance, namely reaching 3 Marhalahs or even more.
• Must. Prayer becomes obligatory to be recited if the prayer time is not enough to be used. This means that when on the way there is a Muslim who does not have time to pray and the time is running out, then the prayer becomes obligatory to be recited.

Those are the three laws regarding the qashar prayer and its meaning. Prayer can also be done by jama and mengqashar. Here’s the guide.

The Procedure for the Final Plural Prayer is Qashar

Before knowing the procedures for performing prayers in the plural and qashar way, it is better if Sinaumed’s knows the procedures for praying in qashar without being plural. Here’s an explanation. 

The procedure for the qashar prayer

When performing the qashar prayer, the intention of the prayer also changes. The following are the intentions to carry out the Dhuhr, Asr and Isha prayers by means of diqashar.

1. The intention of the midday prayer : Usholli fardhol dhuhri rak’ataini qoshron lillahi ta’aala. That is, I intend to perform the obligatory dhuhur prayer of 2 cycles by means of being recited for the sake of Allah Ta’ala. 
2. The intention of the Asr prayer : Usholli fardhol ashri rok’atainii qoshron lillaahi ta’aala. That is, I intend to carry out the fardhu asr prayer two rak’ahs by means of being recited for Allah Ta’aala. 
3. The intention of the evening prayer : Usholli fardhol isya’i rok’atainii qoshron lillaahi ta’aala. That is, I intend to perform the fardhu isya prayer two rak’ahs by means of diqashar because of Allah Ta’aala .
4. Do takbiratul ihram.
5. Read the iftitah prayer as usual
6. Read Surah Al Fatihah, then proceed with reading short letters.
7. Carry out bowing with tumakninah, then proceed with doing i’tidal.
8. Perform prostrations and continue by sitting between the two prostrations. Then, back down.
9. Stand up again, and perform the second cycle as usual.
10. Doing the final tasyahud with tuma’ninah then greetings and prayers are finished.

 

The procedure for the plural takhir qashar prayer

Whether it’s plural takhir or plural taqdim, plural prayers can also be performed by means of qashar if it fulfills the terms and conditions for carrying out qashar prayers. The following is the procedure for the plural takhir qashar prayer.

• Prayer intention for plural takhir qashar (noon and asr):

Ushollii fardlol zhuhri raka’ataini mustaqbilal qiblati majmuu’an bil ashri jam’a takhiiri qhasaraa illaahi ta’aalaa.

Meaning: I intend to pray two cycles of midday prayer, facing the Qibla with plural takhir, qashar with Asr prayer because of Allah Ta’ala.

Then perform the dhuhur prayer at qashar two cycles in accordance with the qashar prayer procedure and continue with the asr prayer without pause, by reading the following intention.

Ushallii fardhal ‘ashri rak’ataini qashran majmuu’an ilazh zhuhri adaa’an lillaahi ta’aalaa.

That is, I intend to perform the fardhu asr prayer two cycles, qashar by pluralizing it with the noon prayer because of Allah Ta’aala.

• Prayer intention for plural takhir qashar (maghrib and isya)

Ushollii fardlozh maghribi thalaatha raka’aatin majmuu’an ma’al ‘isyaa’i Jam’a ta-khiirinin adaa-an lillaahi ta’aalaa.

Meaning: I intend to do the fardhu maghrib prayer three cycles of prayer with the plural isya prayer in the plural way of fardhu because of Allah Ta’ala.

Then, pray the maghrib as usual, namely three cycles because the maghrib prayer cannot be recited and continued with the evening prayer by reading the plural intention of ending in the qashar as follows.

Ushollii fardlol isya’i rak’ataini mustaqbilal qiblati majmuu’an bil magribi jam’a takhiiri qhasaraa lillaahi ta’aalaa.

Meaning: I intend to perform the evening prayer two cycles, qashar in a plural way with maghrib because of Allah Ta’aala.

That is the procedure for carrying out prayers in the plural way of takhir and diqashar. When going to perform the qashar prayer, it is necessary to know what conditions must be met so that Sinaumed’s may pray in the plural and qashar way.

 

Terms of Plural Prayer with Qashar

Basically, every facility offered or provided by Islam is accompanied by terms and conditions that must be met. Likewise with prayer in a plural way or in qashar. Here are some conditions when going to perform the qashar prayer.

• Are on a long journey or traveling with good intentions and have no intention of committing immorality or associating partners with Allah.
• To carry out prayers with qashar, a Muslim must travel at least 48 miles or a journey that takes two days.
• The prayer that will be performed by means of qashar, is an ada prayer, meaning that the prayer is performed on time and not made up, or not made up of prayer during the journey. As for the qadha prayer from home, it is not permissible for it to be qashar.
• The intention uttered when carrying out the qashar prayer must be guarded. If in the middle of carrying out the qashar someone feels doubts, in the form of wanting to perfect his prayer and not being qashar, then it is better if the prayer is continued without the need to cancel the prayer and be completed with the tuma’ninah prayer movement.
• The qashar prayer is not performed by saying the imam who performs the itmam prayer or with a complete cycle of prayer. Either the priest is a traveler or the priest is not traveling or the priest is in doubt at the time.
• When going to perform the qashar prayer, a Muslim knows whether it is permissible to pray in the qashar way, and not just join in without knowing the law of praying in the qashar way.

That is an explanation of the provisions and procedures as well as the intention to carry out the plural takhir prayer and perform the plural takhir in the qashar way. If Sinaumed’s wants to know the proper and correct prayer procedures according to the teachings that are loved by the Apostle and Allah, then Sinaumed’s can dig deeper by reading books.

Sinaumed’s can get books about how to pray at sinaumedia.com as #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides various books with various interesting topics for Sinaumed’s . So what are you waiting for? Immediately have the book right now!